SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1
2
Abiotic factors: the non-living/physical components of the
environment (temperature, light, soil pH)
Light intensity: affects plants only
Carbon dioxide concentration: affects plant populations only
Mineral ions: affects plants only
Water availability: affects both plants and animals
Temperature: affects both plants and animals
Abundance: counting the number of organisms in the sample.
Usually the abundance of each species is recorded. If we
divide abundance by size of the sampling area we get the
density (number/m2
)
Autotroph: an organism that can trap an inorganic carbon
source using energy from light or chemicals
Biomes: parts of the atmosphere that have very different
environmental conditions to each other.
Biosphere: the parts of the earth that support life. Then
organisms of the biosphere depend on one another and the
earth’s physical environment which consists of the….
Biotic Factors: A living factor that affects a population or a
process (predation, competition, parasitism, disease)
Carrying capacity: The highest population that can be
maintained for an indefinite period of time by a particular
environment
Climax community: the final community in succession
Community: all the populations of different species that live
and interact together in the same area at the same time
Competitive exclusion principle: when two species are
competing for limited resources the one using the resources
most effectively will eliminate the other. Two species can’t
occupy same niche indefinitely when resources are limiting
Consumers: an organism that obtains energy by eating other
living things
Decomposers: live in the soil (generally) and feed on detritus,
dead, decaying organic matter. There are two groups, the
detritivores and the saprobionts/saprophytes.
Detritivores: organisms that feed on dead or decaying
organic matter
Ecosystems: an area within which the organisms interact with
each other and their physical environment
Detritus: dead or decaying matter
Ecology: the study of interrelationships between organisms
and their environment. The environment includes both abiotic
and biotic factors
Ecosystems: An ecosystem is a self-supporting system made
up of all the interacting biotic and abiotic features in a specific
area.
Ecological niche: the position an organism fills in its
environment, comprising its habitat, the resources it uses and
the time at which it occurs there
Environmental resistance: conditions that reduce the growth
rate of a population
Food webs: a diagram showing all the feeding relationships in
a single ecosystem or community
Gross primary production: the rate at which chemical
energy is stored in plants
Habitat: the place where an organism is found
Inorganic fertiliser: a fertiliser containing inorganic ions such
as, nitrate, ammonium, potassium and phosphate ions.
Intraspecific competition: between members of the same
species
Interspecific competition: between members of different
species
Limiting factor: the one factor of many that affect a process,
that is nearest its lowest value and hence is rate-limiting.
Microhabitats: an area within a habitat that has specific
conditions
Net primary production: the energy that remains after the
energy used in respiration has been subtracted from the gross
primary production
Organic fertiliser: a fertiliser containing organic substances
such as, urea.
Omnivores: animals that regularly feed at both primary and
higher trophic level.
Pioneers species: species which are first to colonise cleared
or disturbed ground.
Primary succession: succession that occurs on previously
uninhabited ground
Population: a group of organisms of the same species that
live together in the same area at the same time
Producers: an organism that uses solar energy in
photosynthesis to produce carbohydrates
Pyramid of numbers: A diagram that shows the number of
organisms at each trophic level in an ecosystem/food chain at
a given moment irrespective of size.
Pyramid of biomass: A diagram that shows the total biomass
at each trophic level in an ecosystem/food chain, at a given
moment, irrespective of the numbers
Pyramid of energy: A diagram that shows the energy
transferred to each trophic level of an ecosystem/food chain in
a period of time irrespective of the numbers and biomass.
Richness: number of different species found in the sample
Saprophytes/saprobionts: microorganisms (fungi and
bacteria0 that feed through extracellular digestion, secreting
enzymes onto organic matter and absorbing the soluble
products into their body to use in respiration (releases carbon
dioxide to the environment again for use in photosynthesis) or
to use in assimilation building new cells (biomass)
Secondary succession: succession that occurs on in a place
where there was some vegetation already present and the
area has been disturbed by natural disaster or by
deforestation etc.
Succession: the process by which a community changes
over time, a directional process where organisms affect the
environment making it less suitable for themselves and more
suitable for the next dominating species.
Food chains: A very simple diagram showing how energy
flows through an ecosystem
Trophic level: the position in a food chain at which an
organism feeds
3
Random sampling: to get a representative sample of
the whole area. Area is divided into a grid using
measuring tapes; random numbers are generated (from
tables, calculator, computer) and used as co-ordinated
to place quadrats.
There should be a large number of samples to be
representative, allow for anomalies, and improve
reliability and to allow statistical analysis. One should
aim to sample 2% of the total area.
Systematic sampling: used when you wish to
investigate an environmental gradient (change across a
habitat). Commonly this uses a transect. In the line
transect the organisms touching the string are
recorded. In a belt transect quadrats are placed at
along the transect (it can be continuous, or interrupted,
where quadrats are placed at regular intervals).
Measuring Abiotic factors: usually requires digital equipment, temperature probe, pH probe, light meter. These give quick, calibrated, quantitative accurate data and can be used to record data at
regular intervals or continuously across a time period
Abiotic factors: water/air temperature, pH, turbidity (suspended solids), oxygen levels (air and water), mineral levels in soil and water, soil depth, texture, wind speed and direction, humidity
Quadrats vary in size 10cm, 50cm, 100cm sides are common, and
they may be subdivided into 25 or 100 squares. To find the best size
quadrat nesting is used. Different sized quadrats are used and the
number of species counted. From the species area graph the most
appropriate size quadrat can be identified that is likely to catch all
species but not waste effort. Quadrats are used to get quantitative
data like…
Density: number of individuals of each species in quadrat divided by
area of quadrat
Species frequency: record the number of quadrats within which the
species was found e.g. 12 out of 40 had a species so, frequency was
30%
% cover: useful when difficult to identify individual plants. Estimate
to nearest 5%, the % area of the quadrat covered by a particular
species, easier when quadrat is subdivided, this is subjective though.
Abundance scale: ACFOR, Abundant, Common, Frequent,
Occasional, rare. Not quantitative, but can be made semi quantitative
by making each point (ACFOR) correspond to a % cover range
4
Sampling animals is made more difficult by the fact they move. So traps need to be used
Sweep nets in long grass and crops to catch insects, standardise the sweeping time height to
allow comparisons
Beating trays: used to get invertebrates from trees. Tree is hit with a stick and invertebrates fall
into a tray
Pitfall traps: smooth sided cup buried in ground, a raised cover keeps out predators and rain.
Used to catch invertebrates
Longworth traps: To catch small mammals: prepared with dry bedding and food; placed
randomly in the area. Animals enter and trigger the door to close, they are safe from predators
Capture – Mark – Recapture: the problem with counting animals is getting a good estimate of the total number in the area; they move quickly, they cover larger area and
they try to remain hidden. So the capture, release, recapture method is used
1 Capture a sample of animals using one of the trapping techniques described above. The larger the sample the better the estimate works.
2 Count all the animals in this sample (S1) and mark (using one of methods below) then so that they can be recognised later. Typical marks include: a spot of paint for
invertebrates, leg-rings for birds, a shaved patch of hair for mammals, small metal disks for fish, etc. Larger animals can also be “marked” by collecting a small blood sample
and making a DNA fingerprint. Ensure marking is not harmful to animals, or prevents reintegration to the population or that it will wash off, or that it makes them more
susceptible to predators.
3 Release all the animals where they were caught and give them time to mix with the rest of the population (typically one day).
4 Capture a second sample of animals using the same trapping technique.
5 Count the animals in the second sample (S2), and the number of marked (i.e. recaptured) animals in the second sample (R).
6 Calculate the population estimate (N, the Lincoln-Petersen Index) using the formula:
Assumptions
Marking does not affect their survival
Capture of marked and unmarked animals is
random
Marks are not lost
Animals mix with population again randomly and
completely
There are no massive changes in population size
between sampling s1 and s2 due to reproduction
or migration/immigration, population thus remains
stable between samples
Animals are not trap happy or trap shy
Limitations
Animals must be captured which can harm them or
alter behaviour steps taken to minimise this.
Marks can be lost
Marking could affect interaction with population after
capture
‘Catchability’ of animals can vary with season, time of
day, life stage, but assumes equal ‘catachability’.
Immigration/emigration/migration/birth and death
issues can be overcome by having a small delay
between sampling
N = population
n1
= number first caught and marked
n2
= number caught in second sample
m = number in second sample that had markings
Marking techniques: A spot of paint for invertebrates, leg-rings for birds, a shaved patch of hair for mammals, small
metal disks for fish, etc. Larger animals can also be “marked” by collecting a small blood sample and making a DNA
fingerprint. One new solution is to mark with an ultra-violet marking pen which can’t be seen undernormal sunlight,
but can be seen under ultra-violet light.
5
Succession: The change in a community over time due to changing environmental (abiotic) and biotic factors conditions.
This change in plant life is often quite predictable until a stable climax community is reached.
Primary succession: when succession begins on an area that has not been inhabited previously (a slow process)
Secondary succession: occurs on previously inhabited areas (farm land left to re-grow, forest areas devastated by fires or floods). It is faster as the soil is already in place.
The key idea is that each species of plant changes its environment to make it more suitable for new species to colonise. Consequently, these initial species are often out-competed as the
new species are usually more sophisticated and bigger. As the succession proceeds the habitat becomes less harsh and abiotic factors less hostile.
Daily temperature fluctuations decrease due to shade, water holding capacity of the soil improves due to an increase in organic matter, nitrates in the soil increase, roots help hold soil together
minimising erosion,
As the plant life becomes more diverse the animal community becomes more diverse as there are more food sources, more niches, habitats. The climax community supports a complex food
web.
Early colonisers, pioneer species are fast growing plants, with shallow roots and wind-dispersed seeds being replaced by taller, slower growing plants with deep roots and animal dispersed
seeds.
The change occurs in stages called seral stages.
The initial habitat is very harsh….
Extreme pH High winds
Lack of minerals Lack of water
Temperature fluctuations
High salinity
Pioneers are organisms adapted to cope with these
extremes
Lichen, algae and mosses
The action of pioneers and successive species alters,
pH, builds a simple soil, add minerals to this soil by
death and decomposition, improve water holding
capacity
Lichen: fungus and algae mutualistic relationship.
They are excellent pioneers because
Fungus: can make minerals available form rock (acidic
secretions) and decomposition of organic matter.
They prevent desiccation of algae and anchorage to
the rock
Algae are photosynthetic providing sugars for the
fungus.
Describe and explain how succession occurs:
Colonisation of area by pioneer species; these organisms changes the environment; this enables new species to colonise;
Repetition of this process results in the environment becoming less hostile, biodiversity increases, providing food, habitat, nesting sites and niches,
Eventually a climax community is reached
(Human activities: ploughing, harvesting, animal grazing, burning, may prevent the
development of the climax community and result in an artificial or Plagioclimax community)
6
Bare rock
Pioneer
community
Legumes and
horse tails
Grasses and
ferns
Small trees and
shrubs
Climax
community
Barren land develops: Fire, flood, deforestation, glaciers retreating, volcanic
eruption, silt and mud deposition.
Hostile (abiotic factors): pH, salinity, wind speed, nutrient levels, temperature
fluctuations, water availability
Chemical and physical weathering allows slow soil formation
Pioneers must have adaptations to tolerate harsh abiotic factors: xerophytes,
fast seed germination, low nutrient requirements, able to fix nitrogen, produce lots
of seeds or spores (germinate fast and can tolerate acid soils, waterlogged soils)
Lichen good pioneers mosses grow on top. They trap debris and increase organic
matter through death and decay of themselves and detritivores forming a simple
soil. Some free living nitrogen fixing bacteria may be present in soil.
Nitrogen fixing bacteria (Rhizobium) found in root nodule of these plants and can
fix atmospheric nitrogen allowing these plants to grow in a simple soil with lower
nutrient levels. Their activity and death increases soil depth and nutrient quality.
Increase in organic matter (humus) improves water holding capacity of soil and
root growth aerates the soil and secretions change soil pH.
Previous species (pioneers) have improved soil depth, quality (nutrients, pH,
oxygen levels) and water holding capacity.
Taller plants shelter soil reduce diurnal temperature variation and desiccation
Pioneers can not compete and die out. Animal diversity and nesting increases
Biodiversity increases rapidly due to hunting mating and nesting sites these birds
bring in seeds. More niches are available, greater variety of habitats and food
sources. Biodiversity may be greatest here before the dominant species of the
climax community takes over and out competes many species. Nutrient cycling,
light, temperature water availability of soil changes dramatically. Leaf litter may
alter the soil pH significantly
Interspecific competition leads to a reduction in biodiversity. Number of species
and their populations will stabilise limited by….
Nutrient availability, light, number of producers, disease killing weak member sof
species, predation, intra and inter specific competition.
This is the most stable community with more complex food webs and a change in
one species does affect others as greatly as other food sources exist.
Succession: early pioneer species change the habitat making it more suitable for those that replace them in next
stage. As it progresses biodiversity increases, as nesting sites, breeding sites, habitats, food sources are more
varied and stable as abiotic factors are less harsh.
7
8
So why conserve a forest ecosystem.
Trees available as a sustainable resource;
Maintain habitats / niches / shelter;
Maintain diversity / avoid loss of species / protect endangered species.
Maintain stability (of ecosystem);
Maintain food chains / webs / supply of food;
Reduced loss of soil / erosion;
Reduced flooding;
Act as carbon sink / maintainO2and C02 balance reduce greenhouse effect
Reduce global warming;
Source of medicines;
Examples of sustainable management and reasons to preserve the indigenous
species of a habitat….
1. Protection of habitat: maintains food sources, nesting sites
2. Legal measures like e.g. quotas, hunting bans: prevents populations falling to
dangerously low numbers
3. Capture/culling of non-native species: these can often replace/kill off indigenous
species
4. Captive breeding: to boost numbers of populations and ensure members of species
are together at most fertile time
5. Surrogacy / artificial insemination / genetic manipulation techniques;
6. There may be cultural and aesthetic reasons for conservation and a link to tourism
and the economic benefits to economy.
7. Possible undiscovered benefits where some genes may provide medicinal products
or characteristics for biotechnology.
8. Maintaining genetic diversity for future breeding programmes.
9. Avoid damage to food webs and it helps control local pests.
10. Ethical reasons, taking into consideration other organisms have occupied the
earth longer than man and should be respected
One key area of controversy is deforestation. This is essential for
building material, paper, farmland, urbanisation, fuel. However, it
leads to many problems
1. Soil erosion/ mud slides / flooding / leaching of minerals – trees
no longer protect soil from rain / from wind / roots no longer hold
soil;
2. Increased CO2 (in air) OR “greenhouse effect” – trees remove
CO2 in photosynthesise, the large scale felling of trees and
subsequent decay or burning releases CO2.
3. Less diversity– loss of food / loss of habitat / niches
4. Changed rainfall patterns / drought – less transpiration from
trees;
5. Loss of pharmaceuticals / ‘medicines’ / timber / ‘wood’;
Conservation: the concept of preservation/maintenance of biodiversity, through sustainable
management of resources to maintain forests and the habitats/niches and food they supply that
ultimately maintains biodiversity.
Biodiveristy includes…genetic diversity (variety of alleles), species diversity (variety os species) and
habitat diversity (variety of habitats)
So the aims of conservationa are to: 1) maintain diversity 2) maintain organisms’ habitats
Effective conservation does nto eman leaving the environment untouched, which would lead to a
small range of climax communities, instead it requires active inetervaention to manage succession and
maiantain a wide range of plagioclimaxes (false climax communities), some techniques for this
intervaention
Thinning of woodland to ensure light reaches the ground encouraging shrubs and wildflowers to grow.
Hedgerows maintained in farmland, providing ecological corridors for animals to move between areas,
nesting sites, food sources, habitats for insects that may be natural predators of crop pests
Grazing by animals, maintains grassland but prevents growth of tress and shrubs
Periodic burning to remove saplings and allow fire resistant heather to thrive
Cutting back reeds that dominate and dry out fenland, pump water into the fenland to keep it
waterlogged
9
Decay/decomposition/rotting/putrefaction: is the breakdown of detritus by organisms collectively known as decomposers. There are two groups of decomposers
1) Saprobionts (previously called saprophytes): these are microbes (bacteria and fungi)
2) Detritivores: small invertebrates that eat detritus
Saprotrophs/ saprobionts
Use saprobiotic nutrition, extracellular digestion
They secrete digestive enzymes
Absorb the soluble products
Use these in aerobic respiration
Release carbon dioxide
Some of the bacteria have cellulose to break down plant fibres. Herbivores depend on these in their
guts. Other enzymes like deaminase help with the ammonification process in N cycle.
In terrestrial environments the main saprobionts are fungi. Fungi are composed of long thin hyphae
that grow throughout the soil giving a large SA:VOL . In aquatic environments the main saprobionts
are bacteria
Detritivores: Use holozoic nutrition
Ingest food, digest it in a gut, absorb soluble products and egest waste.
They speed up digestion by helping the activity of saprobionts by……
Increase surface area of detritus for saprobionts
Tunnelling activity: aerate soil, provides oxygen for saprobionts to respire aerobically
Excrete useful minerals (urea) which saprobionts can metabolise
(iii) Explain the role of bacteria in making carbon in dead plant remains available
to plants. (4)
decomposers/ saprotrophs;
release enzymes and digest detritus/extracellular digetsion
absorb products of digestion/ suitable e.g. that relates to
these are respired and CO2 released;
CO2 diffuses in through the stomata
used by plants in photosynthesis/ enters leaves;
What is the importance of decomposers to the producers? (1)
Supply of inorganic molecules / e.g. CO2 / nitrate / phosphate / minerals;
10
Describe how the carbohydrates in the dead leaves in the beech wood would be recycled
by the activity of detritivores and microorganisms and the carbon dioxide made available
for plants. (7)
Detritivores break leaves into small pieces / increase surface area;
Deposit faeces;
Increases rate of microbial action;
Bacterial fungi decompose / break down leaves or organic matter;
Secretion of enzymes for digestion;
Absorption of sugars;
Respiration by detritivores/ microorganisms;
Release of carbon dioxide;
Carbon dioxide used in photosynthesis;
The level of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere (0.04%) remained constant for millions of years
Most carbon dioxide removed in photosynthesis is balanced by respiration
Some was diverted for longer periods of time in carbon sinks
Fossilisation
Biomass (trees and animals)
Dissolved in oceans
Incorporated in carbonate based rocks
The balance has been skewed due to the industrial revolution and changes to meet human
population increases as outlined below
Combustion of fossil fuels for electricity and heating
Deforestation for farm land, communication networks, housing, shops
Increased acidity rain from combustion led to chemical weathering
Rising global temperatures led to less carbon dioxide dissolved in the oceans
Less trees means less carbon dioxide fixation in photosynthesis
The levels of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere fluctuate as rates of respiration and
photosynthesis vary.
Daily variations: Lowest carbon dioxide in the day when photosynthesis is taking place
Highest at night when only respiration is taking place in both animals and
plants
Seasonal variation:
Lowest CO2
in summer when days are warmer (enzymes), brighter (light intensity), longer
Highest CO2
in winter when days are cooler (enzymes), shorter, lower light intensity and
tress lose their leaves less photosynthesis. Also increased combustion of fossil fuels to cope
with cold winter
The concentrations of carbon dioxide in the air at different heights above ground in a forest changes
over a period of 24 hours. Use your knowledge of photosynthesis to describe these changes and
explain why they occur.
1. High concentration of carbon dioxide linked with night/darkness;
2. No photosynthesis in dark/night / light required for photosynthesis/light-dependent reaction;
3. (In dark) plants (and other organisms) respire;
4. In light net uptake of carbon dioxide by plants/plants use more carbon dioxide than they produce/
rate of photosynthesis greater than rate of respiration;
5. Decrease in carbon dioxide concentration with height;
6. At ground level fewer leaves/less photosynthesising tissue/more animals/less light
The carbon dioxide concentration was monitored at ground level in the centre of a small roundabout.
The measurements were made on a summer day. Describe and explain how you would expect the
concentration of carbon dioxide to fluctuate over the period of 24 hours. (5)
1Higher carbon dioxide concentration at night/during darkness;
2Photosynthesis only takes place during light;
3Photosynthesis removes carbon dioxide and respiration adds carbon dioxide;
4Respiration taking place throughout 24 hours;
5Quantitative consideration such as that in plants overall
photosynthetic rate greater than respiration rate;
6Human effect such as additional carbon dioxide from heavy
daytime traffic/street lighting could prolong photosynthesis;
Carbon source: ecosystem releasing more CO2 than it accumulates as biomass.
Carbon neutral ecosystems fix and release equal amounts of carbon over time
Carbon sink is an ecosystem accumulating more carbon biomass than it
releases, occurs when decay is prevented, peat bogs too acidic, ocean is cold
and anaerobic, growing forests as trees grow and live long lives.
11
High frequency/shortwave
solar radiation pass easily
through the earth’s atmosphere
Some solar radiation is
reflected by clouds
Greenhouse gases:
CO2
(69.6%), CH4
(12.4%), N2
O (15.8%)
Earth surface absorbs the solar radiation and heats
up emitting long wave/low frequency infrared
radiation
Infrared radiation
does not pass easily
through the
greenhouse gases
and is absorbed and
re-emitted.
This was how earth
stayed at ambient
temperature
Crops
Higher/lower rainfall or higher/lower temperature may
result in failing crops/plant life causing a change in the
distribution of plant life and hence animals dependent on
them.
There may be changes in the type of crop that can be
grown, no longer possible, now possible. Higher night
temperature will affect the ability of some crops to set
fruit or seed giving lower yields and less seeds for next
planting.
Warmer/shorter winters and warmer longer summers
may allow pests to survive longer or appear in greater
numbers than before, causing extensive crop damage,
thus increase expenditure on pesticides.
Melting polar ice caps cause loss of fertile low lying land
(Nile delta). May lead to destruction of forests to provide
farm land and as consequence this only adds to the
issues.
Rising sea levels due to melting of ice shelves and glaciers
and thermal expansion of the ocean means salt water is
extending further up rivers making soil salinity increase
affect water availability for crops and irrigation difficult.
Selects for xerophytes and changes biodiversity of the
animals feeding.
Animal
Migratory birds are not travelling as far south as they would normally and are migrating north earlier. This means that food
sources may mot be ready yet, plants with day length dependent flowering are not yet in bloom and as a consequence seeds,
fruit and insects may not yet be abundant.
As air temperature rises the Alpine snow line is rising. Animals that live on or above the snow line are forced to move with it
and are forced in to smaller areas. This increases competition. Those that can not move up (higher altitudes less oxygen) also
face extinction.
Disruption of niches available within a community. Each organism is adapted to a particular niche and, as these change so does
the species distribution. A niche is the place or function of an organism in an ecosystem. Organisms compete for a niche. If
there is a niche for a flying organism that can feed on nectar, and carry pollen this can be filled by a bird, insect or mammal.
Global warming forces migration and thus they compete for the niche and may displace indigenous species.
Loss of glaciers and ice melting earlier affects hunting of Arctic animals; they must take longer riskier swims.
Water
As ocean temperatures increase less carbon dioxide can dissolve in them so
this furthers the problem
Increased evaporation leads to increased cloud cover, more solar energy
reflected and the temperature could decrease.
Others
Ice albedo effect reduced. (albedo is a measure of how strongly an object
reflects light). Ice reflects almost all the suns energy that hits it (important
in maintaining global climate). As polar ice melts more energy is absorbed
by the earth. Positive feedback loop.
Increased extreme weather events
Alteration to the timing of seasons
Advantages
Growing in regions that had previously been too dry of cold
Growing seasons are prolonged so greater yields
Higher carbon dioxide and temperature faster photosynthesis (limiting
factors)
Causes of greenhouse effect: combustion of fossil fuel, deforestation (reducing photosynthesis, decay/burning of trees
releases carbon dioxide), agriculture (methanogenic bacteria in rice fields and ruminant intetsines) has led to mass
increase in cattle rearing and rice fields to meet food demands, landfill sites have these bacteria too.
12
13
Dead/waste (urine) organic
matter
Ammonia
NH3
Ammonium Compounds
NH4
+
Nitrites
NO2
-
Nitrates
NO3
-
Ammonification by Decomposers: saprobionts with extracellular digestion secreting proteases to form amino
acids and then deaminase enzymes (removes amino group) ultimately leading to ammonium ions
Water
Nitrosomonas
Nitrobacter
Nitrogen Fixation: reduction of atmospheric nitrogen by free living soil bacteria
(azobacter/clostridium) to ammonium ions, this is then passed through nitrification.
Symbiotic organisms (Rhizobium) found in leguminous plants using an enzyme system
Nitrogenase. This provides the plant directly with ammonium compounds, so nitrification
does not follow, plant can assimilate ammonium compounds more easily than nitrates,
but cannot absorb them in the soil, hence need for nitrate formation
Bacteria get carbohydrates from the plant
Bacteria that fix nitrogen are called Diazotrophs
N2 + 6H  2NH3 (requires nitrogenase enzyme and 15 ATP molecules)
Active uptake and
assimilation
Denitrification: occurs where there is a lack of oxygen in the soil leading to more
anaerobic denitrifying bacteria, pseudomonas and thiobacillus
Nitrification: Oxidation of ammonium compounds by these two different strains of
nitrifying bacteria. These bacteria are chemoautotrophs: they gain their energy by the
chemical oxidation (chemo) of ammonium compounds and use carbon dioxide to
synthesise organic compounds. Autotroph means they do not depend on preformed
organic material.
This oxidation reaction is exothermic, releasing energy which bacteria use to make ATP
instead of respiration.
Mineralised nitrogen: Nitrogen as inorganic ions/nitrate/ammonia / nitrite
Excretory nitrogen: Nitrogen in waste products of metabolism/urea/uric acid /ammonia
Organic compounds containing nitrogen: Protein/amino acid/nucleic acid/ATP / urea;
14
Substances found in fallen leaves contain the elements carbon and nitrogen. Explain how the
activities of decomposers and nitrifying bacteria recycle the substances in fallen leaves for re-
use by the trees. (7)
A question asking about making carbon available and N available again for the trees, so answer
both parts….
Carbon available because……
(Decomposers/saprobionts): Secrete enzymes (extracellular digestion)
These enzymes hydrolyse organic matter;
the soluble products are absorbed
by named process e.g. diffusion/active transport;
these products are used in respiration
Releases carbon dioxide;
Carbon dioxide used in photosynthesis;
N available again because
saprobionts release ammonia from organic material;
Through action of proteases and deaminase enzymes
(Nitrifying bacteria):convert Ammonia nitrate;
Via nitrite
An oxidation reaction
Nitrates absorbed and used in synthesis of amino acids/protein/nucleic acids/other correct
organic –N;
Sources of ammonium compounds:
1) Decomposers (mainly saprobionts) convert (nitrogen in organic compounds) into
ammonia/ammonium;
2) Nitrogen fixing bacteria: Convert nitrogen (gas) into ammonium; adding usable nitrogen
to an ecosystem. This is a reduction process.
This can be done by free living soil bacteria, the ammonium compounds must undergo
nitrification then as plants cannot absorb the ammonium but can absorb nitrates. In N fixing
bacteria associated with root nodules the plant uses the ammonium compounds directly.
Nitrification: (Ammonium)  nitrite; then Nitrite  nitrate; by nitrifying bacteria
(Nitrosomonas / Nitrobacter respectively) this is an oxidation reaction
15
The law of diminishing
returns: the increased
application of fertiliser
does not increase yield
and so becomes
uneconomic
Eutrophication: the main cause is leaching of fertiliser from farms and sewage form houses and
factories. Nitrate and phosphate concentration are the biggest limiting factors to grow of aquatic
plants. Algae grow fastest, and this results in the algal bloom.
Farming practices disrupt natural mineral cycles. Minerals taken from the
soil by plants directly and animals indirectly are not returned. So the soil
depletes of minerals. Plant growth is limited by mineral levels,
particularly, NPK. So the problem can be tackled by…
N fixing crops: crop rotation that includes leguminous crops one year of
4. The clover is then ploughed back into the soil. Clover will add humus to
soil, nitrates (needed for protein synthesis), it is cheap, releases it
minerals slowly causing less run-off and pollution.
Inorganic fertilisers: soluble artificial fertilisers containing NPK.
Organic fertilisers: natural fertilisers, animal manure, composted veg,
sewage sludge. The also contain NPK, but in organic matter, urea,
proteins, lipids and organic acids. These minerals must be released by
decomposition.
A combination of both the types of fertiliser maximises productivity.
Considerations needed as beyond a certain point addition of fertilisers
will have no further increase on growth so is an unnecessary expense. A
Balance between increase in yield and profit against cost of buying and
applying fertiliser.
Fertilisers often contain Nitrogen/ Phosphates/ Potassium:
1) N = protein synthesis
2) Phosphates = help production of DNA, RNA, NADP and ATP
3) Potassium = Proteins synthesis, chlorophyll production (magnesium
important here too)
Explaining eutrophication
Increased phosphate/nitrates causes algal bloom;
algae (cover surface and) block out light;
Plants (under surface) unable to photosynthesise;
They die, and algae die (due to minerals now depleting)
Algae are too numerous to be eaten by their consumers they
accumulate
Sudden increase in detritus (plant & alage)
Increase in (aerobic) bacteria (decomposers);
Bacteria use up oxygen in water; (high BOD)
In respiration;
Other aerobic organisms die,
Anaerobes thrive releasing H2
S, CH4
, NH4
16
Agricultural ecosystem
Agricultural ecosystems are comprised largely of domesticated
animals and plants used to produce food for man. There are
considerable energy losses at each trophic level of a food
chain. Humans are often third or even fourth in the chain. This
means the energy we receive from our food is only a small
proportion of the total energy available from the sun.
Agriculture tries to ensure as much of this energy as possible
is transferred to humans (effectively it channels energy away
from other food chains and into the human food chain) this
increase the productivity of the human food chain.
Productivity
Productivity is the rate at which something is produced. Plants
are producers as they produce chemical energy from light
energy in photosynthesis. The rate at which the plants
assimilate this chemical energy is called gross productivity
(measured for a given year and expressed as KJm-2
year-1
.
Some of this chemical energy is used by the plant in
respiration, so the remaining chemical energy is the net
productivity and this is available to the next organism in the
food chain (not all of this energy passes to the organism due
to, indigestible and inedible parts)
Net productivity = gross productivity – respiratory losses
Net productivity is affected by two main factors
1) The efficiency of the crop carrying out photosynthesis,
maximised by reducing the effects of limiting factors, carbon
dioxide, light, temperature, water, minerals.
2) Area of the ground covered by leaves (photosynthetic
organs)
The two major differences in this system are
1) Energy input: naturally the sun is the only source of energy input. The additional
energy input in the agricultural ecosystem is required for preventing the development of
the climax community and also maximising the growth, Energy is required in ploughing,
sowing crops, removing weeds, suppressing pests and disease, housing and feeding
animals and transport etc.
2) Productivity: Natural ecosystems have a low productivity. The additional energy
input to agricultural systems is used to reduce the impact of limiting factors. Energy used
to exclude other species reduces competition and the ground is almost completely
covered by the crop. The application of fertilisers and pesticides and disease prevention
help increase productivity.
17
Explain how farming practices increase the productivity of agricultural crops.
1. use of Fertilisers contain minerals NPK (added to soil);
2. Nitrate for proteins and phosphate/phosphorus for ATP/DNA;
3. Pesticides/biological control prevents damage/consumption of crop;
4. Weed killers/herbicides remove competition;
5. Selective breeding / genetic modification (of crops);
6. Glass/greenhouses enhance temp/CO2/ light limiting factors
7. Ploughing aerates soil to improves drainage;
8. Ploughing aeration of soil allows nitrification/decreases denitrification;
9. Benefit of crop rotation in terms of soil nutrients/fertility/pest reduction;
10. Irrigation/watering to remove limiting factor;
11. Protection of crops from birds/pests/frost by covers/netting etc.;
Describe and explain the effects of monoculture on the environment.
Removal off hedgerows; since small fields impracticable for large machines;
so soil more exposed to wind; resultant increase in soil erosion (once);
so reduction in diversity;
since smaller variety of niches/habitats;
since smaller variety of producers/plants
also, deeper rooted plants removed; resultant increased soil erosion (once);
increased risk of large-scale crop failure/increased disease/increased number of pest;
since large numbers of same crop species grown close to each other;
increased use of fertilisers result in eutrophication/damage to soil structure;
reduction of gene pool increases susceptibility to disease
Pests spread more rapidly
Productivity: the amount of biomass produced by that ecosystem in a year measured either as
Biomass: Kgm-2
y-1
Energy: MJm-2
y-1
Gross Primary Productivity (GPP) = amount of energy fixed by producers in photosynthesis and stored as chemical energy in glucose
Gross Secondary Productivity (GSP) = amount of energy absorbed by secondary consumers
But energy losses as heat from respiration, indigestible parts of food, uneaten parts of food etc. means not all energy is available to the next level in the food chain, so……
Net Primary productivity (NPP) and Net Secondary Productivity (NSP) is the amount of energy accumulated in producer or consumer biomass and available to the next trophic level
Net productivity = Gross Productivity – losses due to respiration and heat.
NPP gives us an indication of how good the ecosystem is at fixing solar energy
Productivity is of interest to farmers who wish to maximise the NPP (arable farms) NSP (pastoral farms). So intensive methods are employed to improve productivity, such as…..
Genetic engineering Selective breeding Fertilisers Pest control Factory farming herbicides Large fields Monoculture Mechanisation
Some increase gross productivity (fertilisers) while some decrease respiratory loses (factory farming)
The cost of sheds, heating, machinery, producing fertilisers demand energy and are costly, so the gains must outweigh the cost
Factory farming/intensive rearing of livestock: increasing NSP
Animals are kept indoors for part or all of the year, usually at very high density. The
barn is kept warm by the collective body heat of so many animals in close
proximity, and in very cold conditions buildings can be heated (though this costs
the farmer). Less energy is lost as respiratory heat, so increasing NPP. In addition,
animals can’t move much, so they don’t expend energy in muscle contraction.
More of the food they eat is converted to useful biomass rather than being lost in
respiration.
Animals are given specialised, high-energy food, high nutritive value so animals
grow quickly and can be sold sooner. The food is low in plant fibres (cellulose), so it
is easy to digest and less energy is wasted in egested faeces. The food also contains
mineral and vitamin supplements that the animals would normally obtain from
fresh food and exposure to sunlight.
The dense packing of animals makes it easy for pathogens to spread from host to
host so animals are given antibiotics to mitigate the effect of infectious disease.
Antibiotics also increase growth rate by killing intestinal bacteria.
Animals are selectively bred to be fast-growing (see unit 2), and they are
slaughtered before growth stops in adulthood, so more energy is transferred to
biomass thus, the farmer doesn’t waste any food, and earns profit early.
These methods are costly. Intensive farming depends on high levels of inputs to
achieve high productivity. But the gains in productivity should exceed the. Factory
farms produce large amounts of animal waste, which often pollute surrounding
water ways. Factory farming also raises many ethical questions about the welfare
of the animals.
18
Explain how the use of pesticides can result in resistant
strains of insect pests.
1. Variation/variety in pest population;
2. Due to mutation;
3. Allele for resistance;
4. Reference to selection;
5. Pests with resistance (survive and) breed / differential
reproductive success;
6. Increase in frequency of allele;
The same idea could lead to herbicide resistant weeds
Pests are any organisms that damages farmers crops
Pests: they reduce the yield in a variety of ways
They include: weeds, fungi, animals
Weeds: compete for, light, minerals, water carbon dioxide. They are usually fast
growing compared to the crops establishing roots and shoots quickly and out-
competing the crop.
Insects reduce yields by…..
Feeding on the organ of the plant that forms the crop
Feeding on the leaves and reducing surface area for photosynthesis
Feed on the roots and affect mineral uptake
Feed on sugars in the phloem
Spread disease
Control can be cultural, chemical or biological. Modern practices try to combine all
three in integrated pest management
Pesticides: These include herbicides, insecticides, fungicides and bactericides.
Characteristics of pesticide: selective toxicity, kill specific target, thus they need to be
narrow spectrum (more expensive). Broad spectrum pesticides may kill pollinating insects
and useful predators of the pest.
Biodegradable: broken down by decomposers. Persistent pesticides may accumulate in the
food chain (bioaccumulation). Particularly if fat soluble, not excreted form the body like
water soluble chemicals. Chemically stable to have shelf life.
Insecticides: can be contact, remaining on the surface of the crop and only killing insects that
come in contact with it. Systemic insecticides are absorbed and transported through the crop
and kill any insects that feed on the crop
Easy to apply, and applied in a way to minimise damage to surrounding environment
Cultural control
Practices that reduce pest problems without using chemicals or biological agents.
Provide suitable habitats close to crop for natural predators of the pest
Weeding: removal of weeds and diseased crops
Crop rotation: breaks the life cycle of host specific pests
Intercropping: planting two crops in the same field rye grass and wheat encourages
ladybirds to feed on aphids on wheat.
Tilling: ploughing to turn soil burying weeds and expose insects to predatory birds
Insect barriers: sticky bands on fruit trees to catch crawling insects
Beetle banks: strips of uncultivated land around and within fields. This allows
invertebrates to thrive that may predate a pest.
Regularly monitor the crops for early signs of pest problems
Principles of Biological control: controlling pests using other living organisms (predators, pathogen or
parasites).
Examples: The scale insect destroyed citrus trees, controlled by the ladybird beetle, ladybirds controlling
aphids on wheat
The control organism can be a predator/parasite or pathogen
Specific to the pest
The population of the control organism varies with that of the pest, both should eventually become low
The control reduces the size of the pest population below the economic threshold, to a point where it no
longer causes significant economic loss
However, it does not eradicate (kill all) the pest
The control species must be carefully selected/screened to…….
Target only the pest species
To ensure it too does not become a pest
Survive in its new habitat to establish and maintain its population
Can reproduce
It is active during the growing season and when pest is a problem
Ensure it does not carry disease
Ensure that a new pest will not take over that niche
Trials should be carried out in quarantine before being brought to farm
Herbicides
Weeds are plants growing where they
are not wanted; they compete for
resources and can harbour pests and
disease that affect the crop.
Crop seeds are treated with fungicides
before sowing
Advantages of biological control
If well screened it will only target pest
Self-perpetuating population (one application
needed)
No chemical residue left on the crop
Pest won’t become resistant to control agent
Cheaper (saves cost of repeated chemical use)
Continuous control
Disadvantages of biological control
Doesn’t eradicate the pests
Expense or setting up due to research
May becomes a pest itself if no natural predators
(must be well screened)
Slow acting compared to chemicals
Subject to environmental factors
Possible effects on non-target species
Can’t be used in stored grain or dead bodies will
accumulate in produce
Another
Sterile males of the pest
could be introduced to
reduce success of
reproduction
Pheromones could be used
attracting the pest to devices
that destroy them
19
Integrated Pest Management (IPM)
Brings together all forms of pest management, aim to reduce effect of pesticides
on the environment without compromising the maximisation of crop yields.
There are 4 stages
Identify pests and population density at which they cause economic harm
(economic threshold) only act when population exceeds threshold
Use suitable cultural methods to avoid population reaching threshold
If population exceeds threshold use biological control to reduce it
If biological control fails to reduce population use chemical control at low and
controlled levels and at times of year to minimise impact on the environment
Evaluate the effectiveness of each stage before proceeding to next
Benefits
If one method fails others are still partially effective
Reduced amount of pesticide needed
Increase yield
Reduced chances of resistant species developing
Less impact on food webs
Fewer chemicals used
Long term effect rather than the initial improvement seen by chemical methods
alone, but loss in effectiveness over time and the need to reapply chemicals
Biological control
Farming aims to maximise yield and minimise expenditure and impact on environment. Essential to
meet the growing needs of the human population. It uses many practices
Selective breeding (pg27): for fast growing animals, high yielding crops, reduce allele frequency,
genetic diversity
Factory farming (pg52): restricted movement and warm holding sheds (more biomass less energy
waste), specialised diets high in protein and fat and carbohydrates, low in cellulose so high
digestibility. Antibiotics in food, reduce spread of disease, kills gut bacteria increasing growth rate.
Monoculture (pg52): growing one crop that grows most effectively in the area. Reduce labour, more
than one crop per year, but demands a lot of fertiliser. Requires, hedgerow removal to make more
space for growing and to operate machinery. This reduces diversity due to loss of habitat and food
sources, possibly lead to increased pest issues as predators of pest may have lived in hedgerows
Pesticides (pg53): weeds and animal pests are controlled using chemicals, but these may affect the
environment. Resistance may develop. Look to use IPM, takes the best of cultural, biological and
chemical control to maximise yield minimise environmental damage
Genetic engineering: inserting genes into crops making them herbicide resistance (this may
encourage excess use of herbicides), genes into crops to make toxins to insects, may mutate and harm
humans, may lead to resistant insects developing. Transfer of gene to non-crop species producing
resistant weeds or disrupting food chains
Fertilisers (pg51): organic, inorganic or a combination. Good and bad points discussed on page 51.
Steps to selecting the Biological agent
The search for agent in pests country of origin,
in areas with a similar climate to the planned
area of release: more likely to find suitable
control agent, and it will be more likely to
survive.
Study the effect of the parasite on other
organisms in the lab: see how it affects native
species, as it may compete for food/habitat or
prey on them.
Release of large numbers of agent: Increase the
chances of successful introduction to increase
chances of reducing pest numbers below
economic threshold
The stable coexistence of pest and parasite at:
means one application should be enough,
means pest population should stay below
threshold, if pest dies out so will agent,
reapplication would be needed
20
Biomass is measured in Kg/m2
or g/m2
of in marine ecosystems Kg/m3
The dry biomass is measured as water content varies and water contains no energy. But this
requires killing the organisms, thus only a sample is used and this may not be representative
of the population. Sample is randomly selected, dried in oven at 800
C evaporates water,
does not burn organic matter until the mass is constant. Weigh a few individuals and get an
average, then multiply the number of them by this value.
Only measures the number organisms present at that time, so seasonal variation is not
accounted for and this means that inverted pyramids may exist in marine ecosystems, when
the mass of phytoplankton is less than that of zooplankton feeding on it. Across the year the
mass of phytoplankton must be greater than the mass of the zooplankton Inverted
pyramids are possible when the producer’s reproduction rate is faster than the rate of
consumption (quickly eaten and so don’t reach a high biomass, but reproduce quickly to
sustain the consumer) and has a short life unlike the consumers.
If we compared the biomass of the phytoplankton against the increase in biomass of the
zooplankton, the biomass of the phytoplankton would be greater
Limitations of pyramids of biomass
Does not show biomass can vary at each trophic level over time
Variability in abiotic factors in an area may make comparisons between ecosystems difficult
Samples required and must be large enough and random to represent the population
Biomass may not be equivalent to energy, as 1g of fat has twice the energy as 1g of
carbohydrate.
Seasonal variations may not be accounted for
Food Chains/webs: illustrate the relationship between members of a
community in an ecosystem. Eacvh stage int eh food chain is called a trophic
level, the arrows represent the flow of energy and matter.
Food chains start with producers (plants, algae, plankton and photosynthetic
bacteria)
Pyramids of numbers: shows the number of organisms at each trophic level. The width of the bars
can represent numbers using a linear or logarithmic scale.
Usually numbers decrease as we move up the chain and the size of the organisms increase
But…...........
There is no account of the size of the organisms: 1 large tree is treated the same as tiny aphids. The
numbers of 1 species may be too large to represent on the same scale as another species
The transfer of matter and energy in an ecosystem can be displayed using ecological pyramids.
There are three kinds.
Pyramids of energy: represent the flow of energy into each trophi c level over a period of
time. The units are usually KJm-2
yr-1
. They are never inverted.
Allows comparison of productivity in an area
No inverted pyramids
21
Energy enters the food chain in the form of
light energy. The light can either be absorbed,
reflected of transmitted. Only that which is
absorbed by the chlorophyll can be converted
into chemical energy (glucose and its
derivatives). As little as 1% of the solar energy
reaching the earth is fixed into biomass of the
producer
Very little light energy is used by the plant because…..
Wrong wavelength
Misses chloroplasts and is transmitted
Reflected
Energy losses due to inefficiency of photosynthesis
Some is used to evaporate water
Other factors can limit the effectiveness of photosynthesis (temp/CO2)
Only a small percentage of the light energy absorbed by the chlorophyll is stored as
biomass because…………
Energy is lost as heat in respiration and other metabolic processes
Photosynthesis is inefficient (energy lost as electrons are passed on)
CO2 and Temperature are limiting factors
The total quantity of energy that plants in a community convert into organic matter is
called the gross production.
Plants use 20-25% of this energy in respiration leaving little to be stored. So, the
stored energy is called the net production
Net production = gross production – respiratory losses
22
Consumers take in concentrated chemical energy in the form of
organic molecules that constitutes the biomass of producers or
consumers they eat.
A lot of biomass is not absorbed by the consumer (bones, hair,
cellulose, teeth, roots of plants etc.) and the energy in this biomass is
passed onto the decomposers.
Much of the energy that is absorbed is lost as heat in various metabolic
reactions, particularly respiration and friction in movement. The heat
losses are bigger in warm blooded animals and very active animals.
Not all the chemical energy in the biomass of the organisms being consumed is passed to
the next trophic level because…..
Not all of the organisms are eaten by those at the next stage
Not the entire organism is eaten (roots, woody material, teeth, bones, claws etc)
Energy is lost in excretory products (urine)
Not all of the food is digested: plant material is much more difficult to digest than meat, due
to the cellulose and lignin, consequently the efficiency of the energy transfer from producer
to primary consumer is 10% whereas from primary consumer to secondary consumer it may
be as high as 15-20%.
Energy lost in respiration (heat and movement): this uses biological molecules as a fuel
source to release energy and produce ATP. The process releases some energy as heat which
escapes to the surroundings. The ATP is used in many processes, active transport, anabolic
processes, cell division, muscle contraction, when use energy is eventually lost as heat.
Energy lost in maintaining body temperature: this is higher in mammals and birds
(homeothemrs, warm blooded, endotherms) than cold blooded animals, it is higher again in
smaller organisms as they have a larger surface area to volume ratio.
Consequently food chains are rarely more than 4 trophic levels because……
Energy losses occur at each stage, as excreted products, egested indigestible parts, parts that are
uneaten, heat from respiration and movement. There is not enough energy left to sustain a large
enough breeding population at a higher trophic level.
It may be possible to find 6 and 7 trophic levels; this may be a result of….
Aquatic food chains, where the organisms are cold blooded and so energy losses at each stage are
slightly lower with regards maintaining body temp
Animals may feed at lower trophic levels in different food chains
There is a very large density of producers (larger producer biomass) and so the collective % of light
energy absorbed may be greater thus allowing more trophic levels
C = P + R + U + F
The energy used in the production of new tissue.
P = C – R – U - F
23
Energy losses…….
Sun  producer: energy lost that is reflected, the wrong wavelength, does not fall on chlorophyll, factors like
temperature and carbon dioxide limit the rate of photosynthesis
Trophic level  trophic level
Parts of the organism are not eaten (roots, bones, teeth, fur),
Parts of the organism are indigestible (particularly plant material cellulose, lignin) energy lost in faeces
Some energy is lost in excretory materials (urine)
Energy is used in respiration to drive, active transport, synthesis, cell division, muscle contraction and none of
these processes are 100% efficient, so all respiratory energy is eventually lost as heat.
Energy transfer from producer to
primary consumer is about 5-10% of the
net primary productivity. This is lower
than primary consumer to secondary
consumer (10-20%) because….
Much plant material is indigestible
lignin and cellulose)
A lot of the plant biomass may not be
consumed by an individual
herbivore
Animal material is more digestible and
has a higher energy value. Carnivores
may be highly specialised for feeding on
their prey. But still much less than 100%
efficient because…..
Animal tissue is not eaten or digested
(bones, teeth fur)
The energy is the waste (faeces and urine) and uneaten parts and dead
organisms is absorbed by decomposers, used in the growth of these
organisms and in respiration and the energy is eventually lost as heat
In some cases it may become fossilised and the energy is released in
combustion
The efficiency of energy transfer differs at different stages as the energy is transferred through the ecosystem…..
Some light energy is reflected, the wrong wavelength of does not fall on chlorophyll. Photosynthesis has a low
efficiency (2%), there are losses in excretion and uneaten biomass, energy loss as heat, there is a lower efficiency
of energy transfer between producer and herbivore than primary consumer and secondary consumer, meat is
more digestible, they efficiency of transfer is lower in warm blooded animals and older animals that are no
longer growing
24
Productivity: the amount of biomass produced by that ecosystem in a year measured either as Biomass: Kgm-2
y-1
or Energy: KJm-2
y-1
Gross Primary Productivity (GPP) = amount of energy fixed by producers in photosynthesis and stored as chemical energy in glucose
Gross Secondary Productivity (GSP) = amount of energy absorbed by secondary consumers
But energy losses as heat from respiration, indigestible parts of food, uneaten parts of food etc. means not all energy is available to the next level in the food chain, so……
Net Primary productivity (NPP) and Net Secondary Productivity (NSP) is the amount of energy accumulated in producer or consumer biomass and available to the next trophic level
Net productivity = Gross Productivity – losses due to respiration and heat.
Only a small percentage of light energy is converted into
chemical energy (GPP). It is low because…
Some light is the wrong wavelength
Some light is reflected
Some light does not fall on the chlorophyll
Inefficiency of photosynthesis
CO2, temperature, nutrients can be limiting factors
Of the GPP only a small percentage is available for transfer
along the food chain (NPP) due to energy lost as heat in
respiration
Agricultural systems aim to increase GPP…
Irrigation
Fertilisers (add minerals NPK to soil)
Pest control: cultural, biological, chemical or integrated
Herbicides (reduce competition)
Selective breeding for high yielding crops/ GM crops
Monoculutre: growing one crop, the best crop for area year on
year (environmental consequences to consider)
Glass/greenhouses enhance temp/CO2/ light limiting factors
Ploughing aerates soil to improve drainage and aeration of soil
allows nitrification/decreases denitrification;
Protection of crops from birds/pests/frost by covers/netting
Energy losses occur at each stage of the food chain
Producer  consumer  consumer………. because……….
Energy lost in parts of the organism not consumed (roots, bones, fur, teeth)
Energy lost in parts of the organism not digested (particularly cellulose/lignin)
Energy is lost in excretory products like urine
Energy lost as heat form respiration
Active and warm blooded animals these losses are greater, small mammals the
losses can be greater due to the large surface area to volume ratio and extent of
heat loss
Agricultural practices, intensive rearing of animals
(factory farming), looks to minimise these losses and
increase NSP……..
Slaughtered when still growing so more energy
transferred to biomass
Fed on controlled diet so higher proportion of (digested)
food absorbed (high protein low plant diet)
Movement restricted so less energy used
Kept inside heated shed so less heat loss
Genetically selected for high productivity/rapid growth
In most communities the biomass at each trophic level is less than
that above because………not all the organisms are eaten by those
Loss of energy at each stage in the food chain
by respiration and/or movement and/or excretion, uneaten material
Less energy to be passed on
Explain why a food chain rarely contains more than four trophic levels.
Energy losses (at each trophic level)
In……. excretion / egestion / movement /respiration /as heat
So (too) little left to sustain a large enough breeding population at
higher trophic levels
Food chains can be 6-7 trophic levels
when….
It’s an aquatic food chain, cold
blooded animals
Animals are feeding at a number of
trophic levels
There is a large density of producers,
so GPP and hence NPP increases
25
Eutrophication:
Nitrates and Phosphates
leached from farm land
Algal Bloom blocks light
penetrating the water
Death of aquatic plants
below surface death of
algae as nutrients deplete
Increase in the numbers
of saprobionts
Respiration of
decomposers uses up
oxygen in water
Aerobic organisms die
Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD): a high BOD indicates a
high level of organic matter in waterways. The more bacteria, the
more O2 they will use and so a high BOD results
Fertilisers: used to replace minerals in the soil. IN
agricultural practices nutrient cycles are disrupted, minerals
are removed from the soil, but not replaced by decay.
Two types: organic and Inorganic
Combination of both is most effective, using the slow
release of organic minerals in early stages and applying
faster acting more readily available organic minerals at key
stages in growth
Law of diminishing returns: the increased application of
fertiliser does not increase yield and so is uneconomic.
Nitrogen needed for: Protein/amino acid/nucleic acid/ATP / urea;
Potassium needed for: Protein synthesis, chlorophyll production
Phosphates needed for: production of DNA, RNA, NADP and ATP
Nitrogen cycle:
Ammonification: release of inorganic nitrogen form organic nitrogen
(proteins/amino acids). Saprobiotic organisms; secrete enzymes which
hydrolyse organic compounds; releasing ammonia;
Nitrification: oxidation of ammonium ions into nitrite and then nitrate by
nitrifying bacteria
Nitrogen fixing: reduction of nitrogen to ammonia by nitrogen fixing
bacteria in soil (nitrification follows) or in mutualistic relationship with
plants (legumes) (plants use ammonia directly)
Denitrification: Conversion of nitrate to nitrogen; bacteria use nitrate for
respiration; occurs in waterlogged (anaerobic conditions), by denitrifying
bacteria
Nitrates are absorbed by the plant roots used
in amino acid/protein synthesis.
Farmers growing legumes because: Clover
contain N fixing bacteria;
when clover decays it adds nitrogen
compounds to soil;
less fertiliser needed;
Carbon Cycle
How organic carbon is made available as CO2
by detritivores and saprobionts: Detritivores
break leaves into small pieces increase surface
area; increase rate of microbial activity. Add
useful products of excretion (increase
nitrogen); tunnelling aerates soil increases
oxygen.
Saprobionts decompose organic matter;
Secreting enzymes for digestion (extracellular
digestion); Absorption of products (sugars);
Respiration by detritivores and saprobionts;
Release of carbon dioxide; Carbon dioxide used
in photosynthesis;
Differences in how detritivores and saprobionts
obtain nutrients: Decomposers secrete enzymes
onto organic matter extracellular breakdown;
Detritivores ingest organic matter and digest it in
a gut
26
Why???????
Higher productivity in agriculture:
Remove issues of limiting factors: greenhouses can control tmepertaure,
light internisty, carbon dioxide levels, irrigation ensures water is readily
avilible, use of fertilisers means that minerals are readily avilible,
management of pests reduces competition for resources form ‘weeds’
and minimises crop damage form animal pests. Selecetive breeding for
high yielding crops or fast growing animals and genetic engineering of
crops for tolerance or pest resistance. Factory farming of animals, reduces
energy losses by restricting movement, warm holding sheds, high energy
and highly digestible foods, growth hormones, antibiotics
Lower species diversity in agriculture:
Removal of hedgerwos removes habitats for animals and food sources,
growing one type or limited types of crops reduces biodiversity
Lower genetic diversity:
Selective breeding for certain charcateristics reduces the gene pool (risk
associated with this, susceptibility, variation maximises chances of
survival)
Limited natural recycling and high input of fertilisers:
Minerals are removed form the soil by crops and are not returned
(decomposed) in that area. Soild depletes of minerals. Fertilisers used to
replace lost minerals and to maximise yield. Organic inorganic, or
combination of both, consider problems of eutrophication.
Competition controlled naturally and artificially
Pest control, cultural, biological, chemical and integrated management.
27
28
The predator prey relationship
The population sizes of the predator and prey are interdependent.
An increase in the prey population means more food and delayed increase
in the predator population follows.
The increased number of predators kills more prey, so prey numbers fall
Lack of food means predators numbers fall
Key notes
Predator population changes always lags behind the prey
Predator number is always lower than the prey (due to energy loss in a
food chain).
Although the predator prey relationships are a significant contributor to the fluctuations they are not the only
reasons as disease, arrival of new predators and climatic factors may also act. The changes in population are not
always as severe as shown in many illustrations; this is because organisms usually have a number of food sources.
The experiment shows that both food and predation affect hare population. Food availability has more of an effect.
The combined effect is more effective than either separately.
This graph is drawn from data on the fur trading for both species. However, this assumes that the numbers of fur
traded is representative of the relative size of the populations.
The population of the snowshoe hare fluctuated in a series of peaks and troughs. Each peak and trough is repeated
roughly every ten years. The population of the lynx cycles in ten yearly peaks and troughs similar to that of the hare.
The peaks in the lynx population typically occur after that of the hare
The hare increases when lynx population is low as more survive. This increases food availability for the lynx so fewer
starve and subsequently their population increases (rear more young), this increases predation on the hares so their
population declines reducing food for the lynx so they decline in numbers.
29
A population = the number of organisms of a particular species living in a habitat.
This number is determined by a variety of interacting factors, abiotic (environmental, physical, non-living) and biotic (living
factors)
Lag phase: small numbers initially and the time needed to breed and for young to reach breeding age
Exponential phase = rapidly increasing numbers in the population
Stationary phase: carrying capacity is reached and the population remains relatively constant. Slight fluctuations in the
population now affected by, food, predation, competition
A 4th
phase (decline phase) of the population curve may exist (usually not in a natural environment) in certain
circumstances and here there is a decline in the population due to depleting resources for numerous possible reasons
Human influence (hunting, deforestation, urbanisation)
Or in bacterial growth when nutrients run out
No population will grow indefinitely as the availability of resources and competition for these will limit growth. The factors
that limit growth….Are called Environmental resistance and can be density-dependent or density-independent
Temperature: Plant growth, Cold blood animals and Warm blooded animals are affected, when it is cold they expend more
energy keeping warm, this will slow growth and slow reproduction
Light: Light affects photosynthesis.
pH: enzyme activity is affected by this
Water/humidity: low water availability limits diversity, only xerophytes growing, limits the food sources and habitat and
thus animals that can flourish.
Abiotic factors
Climatic: temperature, light, humidity, wind speed, rainfall
Edaphic (soil): pH, mineral and moisture content
Topographic: altitude
Human factors: pollution Catastrophes: floods, fires, and
earthquake
These factors can vary within a habitat creating microclimates and
microhabitats.
These factors tend to be density-independent factors: the size of
their impact is independent/is not related to the size of the
population. Low light will limit plant growth regardless of the size of
the plant population. A drop in temperature could kill many
organisms whether the population is large or small
These factors can often be seasonal
Interspecific competition: competition for resources between members of different species usually having evolved slightly
different ecological niches.
When species which occupy a similar niche are brought in close contact one will usually out-compete the other (competitive
exclusion principle), this will be the best adapted. Animals may find this situation arising due to deforestation and climate
change forcing animals to migrate. Having a more varied diet helps maximise chances of survival
Competitive exclusion principle: when two species are competing for limited resources the one using the resources most
effectively will eliminate the other. Thus two species cannot occupy the same niche indefinitely when the resources are
limiting
Intraspecific competition: competition for resources between members of the same species, this is most intense as
members have the same niche competing for exactly the same resources. This has a stabilising effect on a population, if
population gets too big intraspecific competition increases and the population falls again. This is the driving force behind
natural selection, as variants that are best competitors will survive and pass on their genes
Biotic factors
Food Competitors Predators Parasites
Pathogens
Biotic factors are usually density-dependent factors: the size of
the effect depends upon the size of the population.
Competition is greater if the population is greater. Higher
population would mean transmission of disease is more rapid
and more likely. If a population is high animals are more easily
targeted by predators.
30
An example of interspecific competition
P. Caudatum grows slowly at first then accelerating exponentially from around day 4 to day 8. The growth rate then
slows reaching a maximum around 12 days; this max population is sustained until day 20.
When P. Caudatum is grown with P. Aurelia the population grows faster initially, reaching its maximum much earlier.
The maximum population is much reduced (<half) and is not maintained for the 20 days, it reaches zero. This
suggests that the P. Caudatum is unable to compete effectively and thus the population starves.
P. aurelia‘s growth is slowed when P. Caudatum is present as availability of food is reduced due to competition. On
both occasions P. aurelia reaches the maximum, as it out-competes the P. caudatum, which dies out making food
available for growth
A second example of interspecific competition
The graph for Scotland shows evidence that changes in the red squirrel population are due to competition from
the grey squirrel because, the fall in the red is mirrored by the increase in grey after 1985
In Wales between 1970 and 75 both populations fall, this could be a result of, lack of food, adverse weather,
increase in squirrel predators, disease
One suggestion for the competitive advantage of grey over red is that grey squirrels will forage in the trees like
the red, but are more willing to forage on the forest floor increasing chance of finding food.
31
A niche is the role the organism has within the habitat. The niche includes abiotic and biotic factors that the organism needs. Organisms are well adapted to their niche.
Species with a narrow niche are called specialists. Many specialists can co-exist in a habitat as they are not competing for the same resources, this can give a high biodiversity
Species with abroad niches are called generalists, and generalists in the same habitat will compete meaning that only a few will exist, giving a low biodiversity.
Only species X would be found in section 1
Temperature and pH conditions where it is suitable for both X and Y to co-exist
are found in section 3
The section where it would be too high a temperature for X and too low a pH
for Y is section 2
Competition between X and Y would be found in section 3
No population of either X or Y would be found in section 4 because, the pH is
too high for X and the temperature is too low for Y
The abiotic factors that comprise an organism’s niche can be shown on a graph. For example, if a particular plant can only grow in a temperature range of 10–17°C and a soil pH of 6–7.5,
then these ranges can be plotted on two axes of a graph, and where they intersect (the shaded box in the graph on the left) shows those aspects of the plant’s niche. We can add further
axes to show the suitable ranges of other factors like humidity, light intensity and altitude, and so get a more detailed description of the niche (graph on right).
32
The population of most animals has been kept in check by the availability of food, disease,
climate, predators to name some of the limiting factors of the environment
Modification of the human environment has led to a population explosion.
The development of agricultural practice The industrial revolution Recycling
Medical advances Understanding diets Waste management
Improved quality of food
So the typical sigmoid population growth is not followed by human populations but rather the
exponential phase continues and no stationary stage is reached to stabilise the population.
The increase in population, or growth rate, depends on four factors:
Growth rate = (birth rate – death rate) + (immigration rate – emigration rate)
The equation shows that growth rate can increase by increasing the birth rate or decreasing
the death rate (ignoring migration). The staggering human population growth over the last
two centuries is entirely due to a massively decreased death rate caused by the
improvements in farming described earlier, and in medicine. The increased growth rate has
therefore happened at different times for different countries.
Factors affecting birth rates
Economic conditions – usually lower income = higher birth
Religion – some religions encourage big families and are against birth control
Social pressure/conditions – a large family can improve social standing
Birth control – pills and abortion can affect
Political factors – governments influence by taxation and education
Factors affecting death rates
Age profile – greater proportion of elderly the higher the death rate
Life expectancy – longer in MEDNs
Food supply – adequate and balanced diet reduce death rate
Water supply and sanitation
Medical care
Natural disasters
War
33
Demographic Transition Model: A model to show population changes in a country over time resulting
from changes in social and economic situation of the country.
Stage 1
High birth and death rates: Limited food causes starvation. Disease causes high but fluctuating death rate.
Young are very susceptible to disease and starvation so high infant mortality rate. Short life expectancy
means populations remain low and stable
Stage 2
More reliable food supply, improving nutrition, and improved living conditions and reduced disease
reduces death rates. Birth rates are high so population growth is rapid.
Stage 3
Significant fall in birth rate is linked to social change. The increase in industrialisation and urbanisation
means that families are less dependent on having children to contribute to the household. Birth control is
practised.
Stage 4
Stable population with low birth and death rates. Typically death rate is low and stable, birth rate is more
variable. Proportion of elderly increases. In some countries death rate now exceeds birth rate a population
declines (a possible 5th
stage to this model)
Most LEDNs are still in stages 2 and 3. Most MEDNs are in stage 4, and some have entered into the
possible 5 stage, where the total population is declining. The problem here is that how do they support an
increasingly older population that are dependent on a declining number who work. To help tackle these
problems immigrants are being encouraged from countries where the population is growing.
In the second and third stages the death rates fall before birth rate so the population
still grows. In final stage birth rate and death rate are low so the population is stable.
Developed countries in stage 4
Developing in stages 2 or 3 so pop growth is mainly here.
Social Conditions affecting population structure.
The growth of a population rarely follows the demographic transition model
exactly; there are many factors that interact and are in turn affected by
environmental factors. Three important factors affecting growth are
Food supply
Individual growth and health are food dependent. Lack of food increases
infant mortality due to malnourishment, and malnourished have less chance
of surviving infectious diseases. This also affects birth rate as fertility drops in
malnourished women. Food shortage can be affected by, drought, crop
diseases; other environmental factors (flood etc) there may also be
difficulties with distribution.
Sewage disposal
This is tied into the supply of safe drinking water and the spread of water
borne disease (cholera).
Drinking water
In UK it is taken from deep underground or from rivers or stored reservoirs.
Social Conditions and life expectancy
Human population growth in the past was limited by food supply, but
agriculture offered humans a degree of control over their food
production.
As populations grew and settled in towns water borne disease had a
significant effect due to poor sewage.
Many other diseases were controlled until the invention of the vaccination.
In modern developed countries fertility can be controlled.
34
The demographic transition model leads to a change in the age
structure of a population. These changes can be illustrated in
population pyramids or survival curves.
Pyramids it helps to group the bars as pre-reproductive (<15),
reproductive (15-44), post reproductive (>45)
The shape tells about the future growth of the population…
The wider the base the faster the population growth. A narrow base
suggests a falling population
Steep pyramid suggests a longer life expectancy
A pyramid with a wide base and with a narrow tip suggests high
infant mortality and short life expectancy
Survivor curves are created by tracking a group of individuals from birth until the last one dies. The age each one dies at is recorded. The percentage of the group surviving at each stage
is plotted. The life expectancy (mean life span) can be calculated by reading of the age at which 50% survive.
Type I: long life expectancy, low infant mortality expected in affluent countries
Type II: intermediate life expectancy and roughly constant death rate.
Type III: short life expectancy, most die young (shown in animals with low parental care and produce large number of off-spring to compensate) in human populations this is evident in
countries with poor health care, sanitation and nutrition.
A bowing curve to the right
demonstrates an improved ability
to survive suggesting improved
living conditions, medical care, and
technology. Although people talk
about quality of life in preference
to length, the fact remains that
length of life is the most objective
way to measure quality
35
36
The light-dependent reactions use light energy to split water and make ATP, oxygen and energetic
hydrogen atoms. This stage takes place within the thylakoid membranes of chloroplasts, and is
very much like the respiratory chain, only in reverse.
• The light-independent reactions don’t need light, but do need the products of the light-
dependent stage (ATP and H), so they stop in the absence of light. This stage takes place in the
stroma of the chloroplasts and involves the fixation of carbon dioxide and the synthesis of
glucose.
• Plants do not turn carbon dioxide into oxygen; they turn carbon dioxide into glucose, and water
into oxygen.
The chloroplast is adapted for its function.
Contains chlorophyll for light absorption;
Range of different pigments to absorb different
wavelengths;
Stacking / arrangement of grana/thylakoids maximises
light catchment; layering of membrane allows a lot of
pigment;
Stroma contains enzymes for photosynthesis; (Calvin
cycle)
Outer membrane keeps enzymes in chloroplast;
Starch grains / lipid droplets store products of
photosynthesis;
Ribosomes and DNA for enzyme/protein synthesis;
Shape of chloroplast gives large surface area for CO2,
absorption.
Disc shape provides large surface for light absorption;
Permeable membrane allows diffusion of gases / carbon
dioxide;
Membranes provide surface for attachment of electron /
hydrogen acceptors;
The absorption spectrum is the graph of absorbance of different wavelengths of light
by a pigment
The action spectrum shows the rate of photosynthesis at different wavelengths.
Note the peaks of absorption occur at 650-700nm (red light) and 400-450nm (blue
light). These absorption peaks correspond to the peaks in photosynthetic rate shown
in the action spectrum
Chlorophyll is a fairly small molecule (not a protein)
Chlorophyll and the other pigments are arranged in complexes with proteins, called
photosystems. Each photosystem contains some 200 chlorophyll molecules and 50
molecules of accessory pigments, together with several protein molecules (including
enzymes) and lipids.
These photosystems are located in the thylakoid membranes and they hold the light-
absorbing pigments in the best position to maximise the absorbance of photons of
light.
The chloroplasts of green plants have two kinds of photosystem called photosystem I
(PSI) and photosystem II (PSII). These absorb light at different wavelengths and have
slightly different jobs in the light dependent reactions of photosynthesis.
How the leaf is adapted for
photosynthesis
Large surface area to collect solar energy;
transparent nature of cuticle to allow light
penetration;
position of chlorophyll to trap light;
stomata to allow exchange of gases;
thin / max. surface area to volume ratio for
diffusion of gases;
spongy mesophyll / air spaces for carbon
dioxide store;
xylem for input of water;
phloem for removal of end products;
37
The light-dependent stage of photosynthesis.
Light absorbed by chlorophyll in photosystem (PSI/PSII)
electrons excited to a higher energy level
Electrons are emitted form chlorophyll (oxidised) picked up
by electron acceptor
Electrons pass down chain of carriers
energy released as electrons pass down the electron
transport chain
energy used in producing ATP from ADP and phosphate; (ADP
+ Pi+ energy (ATP)
A process called photophosphorylation
Photolysis of water
Provides electrons to replace those lost from PS II (stabilising
the chlorophyll/reducing it)
Provides the protons/H+
i
ons to reduce NADP
Reduced NADP formed by accepting electrons and H+;
The way in which ATP and reduced NADP are
produced in the light-dependent reaction In context
of ATP formation
light raises energy level of (excites) electrons
These pass through electron carriers;
energy is released as electrons pass down the
transport chain
energy is used to form ATP from ADP + P;
Reduced NADP is made by accepting
protons / H
+
ions;
And electrons;
From photolysis / water;
The role of electron transport chains in the light
dependent reactions
1. Electron transport chain accepts excited electrons;
2. From chlorophyll / photosystem;
3. Electrons lose energy along chain;
4. ATP produced;
5. From ADP and Pi;
6. Reduced NADP formed;
7. When electrons (from transport chain) and H
+
combine with NADP;
8. H
+
from photolysis;
PSII absorbs light, excites electrons to a higher energy level. This drives photolysis of water (2H2
O  O2
+ 4H+
+ 4e-
), the protons build up in the thylakoid lumen and the electrons replace those in the
chlorophyll.
Excited electrons pass along electron carriers releasing energy as they go which pumps protons form
stroma to lumen of thylakoid
Electrons are finally picked up by NADP
The protons are used to make ATP using the ATP synthase enzyme (photophosphorylation)
The H+ ions are then picked up by NADP forming reduced NAPD
38
Plants produce ATP in their chloroplasts during photosynthesis. They also produce ATP
during respiration. Explain why it is important for plants to produce ATP during
respiration in addition to during photosynthesis.
1. In the dark no ATP production in photosynthesis;
2. Some tissues unable to photosynthesise/produce ATP;
3. ATP cannot be moved from cell to cell/stored;
4. Plant uses more ATP than produced in photosynthesis;
5. ATP for active transport;
6. ATP for synthesis (of named substance);
In light independent reaction/Calvin cycle;
1. Carbon dioxide combines with ribulose bisphosphate/RuBP CO2 acceptor;
2. This reaction is catalysed by ribulose bisphosphate carboxylase (RuBISCo)
3. Produces two molecules of glycerate (3-)phosphate/GP;
4. GP is reduced to triose phosphate/TP;
5. Using reduced NADP;
6. Using energy from ATP;
7. Some TP is converted to hexose compounds/other organic substances
8. Some TP is used to regenerate ribulose bisphosphate;
9. This regeneration of RuBP requires ATP
10. 10 molecules of 3C/TP/GP form 6 molecules of 5C/RuBP;
Explain how ATP and reduced NADP are used in the light-independent reactions.
GP converted to triose phosphate (GALP)
this involves a reduction;
reduced NADP provides the reducing power
ATP supplies energy for this reaction;
ATP is also used to provide the phosphate
for production of RuBP;
39
40
The ‘Lollipop’ experiment was used by Melvin Calvin to
work out the details of the light independent reactions.
Single celled algae are grown in a solution of radioactive
hydrogencarbonate (14
C) which supplies radioactive
Carbon dioxide and will be incorporated into the
compounds.
At 5 second intervals samples of the algae are dropped
in to hot methanol (stops chemical reactions instantly,
through enzyme denaturation), the compounds are
separated (two way chromatography) out and those that
are radioactive are identified and the pathway
established by the time at which the substances appear.
The rapid action tap is essential because the reactions
occur quickly and the samples can be removed after a
precise time period.
Photosynthometer (Audus apparatus).
Set up to avoid air bubbles within and ensure it is air tight (air entering/leaving will alter volume of
gas making results unreliable.
Water bath keeps temperature constant, so change sin rate are only due to light. Temperature can
be adjusted to investigate temp effect.
Potassium hydrogencarbonate is used to produce excess CO2
for plant so it does not limit
Light source with adjustable intensity is used
The rate of photosynthesis by a plant or alga can be measured by recording the
amount of oxygen produced, or carbon dioxide used, in a given period of time.
But these measurements are also affected by respiration, which plants do all
the time, so the respiration rate must be measured separately.
The conditions at which the rates of photosynthesis and respiration are equal,
so there is no net change in oxygen or carbon dioxide concentration, is called
the compensation point. Many of the environmental factors that affect
photosynthesis also affect respiration.
Temperature influences enzyme.
Photosynthesis is more sensitive to
temperature with an optimum of about 30-
35°C, whereas respiration often has an
optimum nearer to 45°C. There is a
temperature compensation point around
40°C (A), above this temperature plants lose
mass as the rate of respiration is greater
than the rate of photosynthesis.
Carbon dioxide is the substrate for the enzyme rubisco in the light-independent
stages of photosynthesis, so the higher the carbon dioxide concentration the
faster the rate of the Calvin cycle. The rate of respiration is not affected by
carbon dioxide concentration, and the carbon dioxide compensation point is
usually very low, at about 50ppm (A). Normal carbon dioxide concentration in
the air is about 400ppm (B), whereas the optimum concentration for most plants
is nearer to 1000ppm, so carbon dioxide is often the limiting factor.
Light is the source of energy for the production of ATP and NADPH in the light-dependent stages of
photosynthesis, so the higher the light intensity the faster
the rate of photosynthesis. The rate of respiration is not affected by light intensity, and the light
compensation point is usually low. Shade plants are adapted to growing in low light conditions (such as
a forest floor), so have a very low light compensation point (A) and a low optimum intensity. Shade
plants make good house plants, since they are adapted to the low light intensities indoors. Sun plants
have a higher compensation point (B), and have a very high optimum near the light intensity of a bright
summer’s day (C).
Both photosynthesis and respiration are affected by
time of day: photosynthesis by changes in light and
respiration by changes in temperature. At night
respiration exceeds photosynthesis, while during the
day photosynthesis exceeds respiration, so there are
two compensation points each day (A and B). Over a
24-hour period the amount of photosynthesis is
greater than the amount of respiration, so plants gain
mass and have a net uptake of carbon dioxide.
41
42
43
The different stages of respiration take place in different parts of the cell. This
compartmentalisation allows the cell to keep the various metabolites separate, and to control the
stages more easily.
The energy released by respiration is in the form of ATP.
Stage 1 (glycolysis) is anaerobic respiration, this occurs in the cytoplasm
Stages 2 (link reaction occurs in the matrix) and 3 (oxidative phosphorylation, chemiosmosis,
electron transport, occurs on the cristae) are the aerobic stages and occur in the mitochondria
1. Glucose enters cells from the tissue fluid by facilitated diffusion using a specific glucose carrier.
This carrier can be controlled (gated) by hormones such as insulin, so that uptake of glucose can
be regulated.
2. Glucose is phosphorylated using 2 ATPs.
keeps glucose in the cell by effectively removing “pure” glucose, so glucose will always diffuse
down its concentration gradient from the tissue fluid into the cell (glucose phosphate no longer
fits the membrane carrier). It “activates” glucose for biosynthesis reactions.
3. The Hexose Bisphosphate splits into two triose phosphate (3 carbon) sugars.
4. The triose sugar is changed over several steps to form pyruvate, a 3-carbon compound. In
these steps some energy is released to form ATP (the only ATP formed in glycolysis), and a
hydrogen atom is also released. This hydrogen is later used by the respiratory chain to make
more ATP. The hydrogen atom is taken up and carried to the respiratory chain by the coenzyme
NAD, which becomes reduced NAD in the process. Pyruvate can also be turned back into glucose
by reversing glycolysis, and this is called gluconeogenesis.
5. In the absence of oxygen pyruvate is converted into lactate or ethanol in anaerobic respiration
6. In the presence of oxygen pyruvate enters the mitochondrial matrix. It is converted to a
compound called acetyl coA. Since this step links glycolysis and the Krebs cycle, (link reaction). In
this reaction pyruvate loses a CO2 and a hydrogen to form a 2-carbon acetyl compound, which is
temporarily attached to coenzyme A (or just coA), so the product is called acetyl coA. The
hydrogen is taken up by NAD again.
7. The acetyl CoA then enters the Krebs Cycle. The 2-carbon acetyl is transferred from acetyl coA
to the 4-carbon oxaloacetate to form the 6-carbon citrate. Citrate is then gradually broken down
in several steps to re-form oxaloacetate, producing carbon dioxide and hydrogen in the process.
Some ATP is also made directly in the Krebs cycle. As before, the CO2 diffuses out the cell and the
hydrogen is taken up by NAD, or by an alternative hydrogen carrier called FAD. These hydrogen
atoms are carried to the inner mitochondrial membrane for the final part of respiration.
The removal of hydrogen/dehydrogenation is done by enzymes/dehydrogenases.
The resulting H is accepted by NAD/which forms reduced NAD. This occurs in glycolysis and Krebs
cycle, (FAD is used as well in Krebs);
44
1. Reduced NAD releases its H and is oxidised to NAD, which returns to the Krebs cycle. Reduced FAD
attaches to a protein further along the respiratory chain. The H split into H ions and electron.
2. The electrons are passed along the chain of proteins in the inner mitochondrial membrane, releasing
its energy as it goes.
3. This energy is used to pump H ions into the intermemberane space, creating a proton gradient
between the inner membrane space and the matrix.
4. The H ions can only move down their electrochemical gradient through a special channel in the ATP
synthase enzyme, as they move down this gradient, they release energy that can be used to
phosphorylate ADP.
4 protons = 1 ATP
This is why reduced FAD yields less ATP, as it does not provide as much energy to pump H ions into the
intermeembrane space as reduced NAD does
3. Oxygen (terminal electron acceptor) combines with hydrogen and electrons to form water (O2 + H+ +
e- _ H2O). In absence of oxygen electron transport chain stops.
Aerobic respiration yields more ATP per molecule of glucose than anaerobic.
Explain.
Oxygen as terminal hydrogen/electron acceptor;
Operation of electron transport chain/ oxidative phosphorylation;
Thus pyruvate can enter the Krebs cycle;
Significance of ATP formed in glycolysis;
Explain why oxygen is needed for the production of ATP on the cristae of the
mitochondrion.
ATP formed as electrons pass along transport chain;
oxygen is terminal electron acceptor accepting electrons from electron
transport chain;
It also accepts H
+
forming H2O
Electrons cannot be passed along electron transport chain if no O2 to accept
them;
Describe how ATP is made in mitochondria
1. Substrate level phosphorylation in Krebs
2. Krebs cycle/link reaction produces reduced NAD and FAD;
3. Electrons released from reduced NAD/FAD
4. (Electrons) pass along carriers/through electron transport chain (redox
reactions)
5. Energy released; phosphorylates
6. ADP/ADP + Pi;
7. Protons move into intermembrane space;
8. ATP synthase;
Describe the roles of the coenzymes and carrier proteins in the synthesis
of ATP.
hydrogen attaches to NAD/FAD (reduction)
Electrons transferred from coenzyme to coenzyme on transport chain
series of redox reactions;
this releases energy to pump protons
H
+
/protons pumped into intermembrane space;
H
+
/ protons flow back through /enzyme; ATPase;
Energy used to synthesise ATP from ADP and Pi
45
If there is no oxygen (anaerobic conditions) then water cannot be made, electrons can‘t leave the respiratory chain, so NADH cannot unload any hydrogen to the respiratory chain. This
means that there is no NAD in the cell; it’s all in the form of NADH. Without NAD as a coenzyme, some of the enzymes of the Krebs cycle and glycolysis cannot work, so the whole of
respiration stops.
Anaerobic respiration circumvents this problem by adding an extra step to the end of glycolysis that regenerates NAD, so allowing glycolysis to continue and some ATP to be made.
Anaerobic respiration only makes 2 ATPs per glucose, but it’s better than nothing! There are two different kinds of anaerobic respiration:
In animals and bacteria the extra step converts
pyruvate to lactate (or lactic acid). This is a reduction,
so reduced NAD is used and NAD is regenerated, to be
used in glycolysis. The reaction is reversible, so the
energy remaining in the lactate molecule can be
retrieved when oxygen becomes available and the
lactate is oxidised via the rest of aerobic respiration.
Unfortunately the lactate is poisonous, causing
acidosis in muscles cells, which stops enzymes
working, possible affects the binding of calcium to
troponin in the muscle and causes muscle fatigue and
cramp. Anaerobic respiration in muscles cannot be
continued for very long.
In plants and fungi the extra steps converts
pyruvate to ethanol. This is also a reduction, so
NADH is used and NAD is regenerated, to be used
in glycolysis. Ethanol is a two-carbon compound
and carbon dioxide is also formed. This means the
reaction is irreversible, so the energy in the
ethanol cannot be retrieved by the cells.
Ethanolic anaerobic respiration is also known as
fermentation, and we make use of fermentation
in yeast to make ethanol in beer and wine.
Describe what happens to pyruvate in anaerobic conditions and explain
why anaerobic respiration is advantageous to human skeletal muscle.
Forms lactate
Use of reduced NAD / NADH;
Regenerates NAD;
NAD can be re-used to oxidise more respiratory substrate
allows glycolysis to continue;
Can still release energy/form ATP
when oxygen in short supply/when no oxygen;
Give two ways in which anaerobic respiration of glucose in yeast
is
Similar to anaerobic respiration of glucose in muscle cells
ATP formed/used;
pyruvate formed/reduced;
NAD/reduced NAD;
glycolysis involved/two stage process;
Different from anaerobic respiration of glucose in a muscle cells
Ethanol/alcohol formed by yeast, lactate (allow lactic acid)
by muscle cell; CO2 released by yeast but not by muscle cell;
46
Counting ATP
How much ATP do we get per molecule of glucose?
• Some ATP molecules are made directly by the enzymes in glycolysis or the
Krebs cycle. This is called substrate level phosphorylation (since ADP is being
phosphorylated to form ATP).
• Most of the ATP molecules are made by the ATP synthase enzyme in the
respiratory chain. Since this requires oxygen it is called oxidative
phosphorylation. Scientists don’t yet know exactly how many protons are
pumped in the respiratory chain, but the current estimates are:
10 protons pumped by NADH; 6 by FADH; and 4 protons needed by ATP
synthase to make one ATP molecule.
This means that each NADH can make 2.5 ATPs (10/4) and each FADH can
make 1.5 ATPs (6/4).
Previous estimates were 3 ATPs for NADH and 2 ATPs for FADH, and these
numbers still appear in most textbooks, although they are now probably
wrong.
Remember two ATP molecules were used in the activation of glucose at the
start of glycolysis, so this must be subtracted from the total
We had: (per glucose molecule)
10 reduced NAD’s (2 from glycolysis 2 from link 6 from kerbs)
2 reduced FAD’s (from Krebs)
2 ATP made by substrate level phosphorylation in the Krebs cycle
2 ATP made by substrate level phosphorylation in glycolysis (4 were made but we
invested 2 so it’s a net 2 ATP here)
Reduced NAD makes either, (depending on the books you read) 3 ATP per
reduced NAD or 2.5
Reduced FAD makes either, (depending on the books you read) 2 ATP per
reduced FAD or 1.5
So……………
10 × 3 = 30 10 × 2.5 = 25
2 × 2 = 4 2 × 1.5 = 3
2 ATP 2 ATP
2 ATP 2 ATP
Total = 38 Total = 32
47
48
Glycolysis: occurs in the cytoplasm
Glucose enters the cell through specific carriers; it is phosphorylated to prevent it leaving the cell this uses ATP to provide the Phosphate.
Glucose is quite stable and so does not react easily, thus it is activated by the investment of energy. It is phosphorylated using 2ATP molecules (one
has already been accounted for above); this forms an unstable hexose (6C) bisphosphate which then breaks down into two triose (3C) phosphates.
These triose sugars undergo a series of dehydrogenations (each one has hydrogen removed) and dephosphorylations, each losses two phosphate
groups (transferred to 2 ADPs, making 2 ATPs through substrate level phosphorylation..
Consequently for 1 molecule of glucose
2ATP are invested
2 pyruvate molecules are formed
4 ATP (generated by substrate level phosphoylation, enzyme catalysed transfer of phosphate from a molecule to ADP)
2 reduced NAD are made that are then transferred to the electron transport chain
Remember though, there is only a net gain of 2 ATP in glycolysis
(4 ATP generated – 2 ATP invested = 2 ATP left)
Link reaction (occurs in mitochondria)
Here pyruvate is actively taken into the mitochondrial matrix
Dehydrogenated: the hydrogen is picked up by NAD
Decarboxylated (CO2
removed) making a 2C acetyl compound that is temporarily attached to a coenzyme A (CoA), forming acetyl CoA which then
enters the krebs cycle.
Krebs cycle (occurs in matrix of mitochondria)
Acetyl group is transferred to a 4C compound, oxaloacetate and forms a 6C compound citrate. This is dehydrogenated (hydrogen picked up by NAD)
and decaroxylated to 5 carbon α ketoglutarate. This 5 carbon compound is dehyrgoenated (losing 3 hydrogen atoms, 2 are picked up by NAD and one
is picked up by FAD) and decarboxylated (producing carbon dioxide), oxaloacetate is regenerated.
1 turn produces
3 reduced NAD’s 1 reduced FAD 1 ATP (substrate level) 2 carbon dioxides
Remember there are two pyruvates, hence two acetyls so two turns, so double this for 1 glucose
Chemiosmosis:
Reduced NAD is transferred to NAD dehydrogenase located on the
cristae of the mitochondrial inner membrane, reduced FAD arrives a
second dehydrogenase enzyme complex on the cristae
The reduced NAD (and FAD) are oxidised, the hydrogen is removed
Each hydrogen atom is split into a hydrogen ion and electron
The electrons are passed down a series of electron carriers at
progressively lower energy levels.
As the electrons move they release energy that is used to power the
proton pumps in the cristae and they pump the protons (H+
) into the
intermembrane space
The protons can only move back into the matrix at special channel
proteins in the membrane that are associated with ATP synthase
As the protons move down their electrochemical gradient the energy
released is used to phosphoylate ADP producing ATP (ADP + Pi 
ATP)
49
How is the structure of the mitochondria related to its function?
Mitochondria have a double membrane: the outer membrane contains many protein channels called porins, which let almost
any small molecule through; while the inner membrane is more normal and is selectively permeable to solutes.
The inner membrane is highly folded into projections called cristae, giving a larger surface area.
The electron microscope reveals blobs on the inner membrane, called stalked particles. These blobs have now been identified
as enzyme complexes that synthesise ATP, and are more correctly called ATP synthase enzymes (more later).
The space inside the inner membrane is called the matrix, and is where the Krebs cycle takes place.
The matrix also contains DNA, tRNA and ribosomes, and some genes are replicated and expressed here.
Explain the advantage of mitochondria in muscle cells having more cristae.
(More cristae means a larger surface area for electron transport chain
more enzymes for ATP production/oxidative phosphorylation;
muscle cells use more ATP (than skin cells)(not just more respiration);
Q. ATP is sometimes described as an immediate
source of energy. Explain why.
(Energy release) only involves a single reaction/one-
step/
energy transfer direct to reaction requiring energy;
Q. why is it that the body converts chemical
energy in glucose, to chemical energy in ATP?
ATP is a more useful as an immediate energy for
metabolism than glucose because
Energy is available more rapidly because it is
released in single reaction
ATP releases its energy in small/manageable
quantities;
Q. Why is ATP a useful energy store?
1. Releases energy in small / manageable amounts
when hydrolysed
2. Hydrolysed in a one-step / single bond broken;
3. Immediate energy source/makes energy available
rapidly;
4. Phosphorylates/adds phosphate;
5. Makes (phosphorylated substances) more reactive /
lowers activation energy;
6. Reformed/made again using energy from other
reactions
7. Can be readily moved/stored/broken down when
needed;
8. Cannot pass out of cell;
Q. What is ATP used for?
The processes in a cell that require energy can be put
into three groups:
• Muscle contraction and other forms of movement,
such as cilia, flagella, cytoplasmic streaming, etc.
Each step of the muscle cross bridge cycle costs one
ATP molecule.
• Active transport. Each shape change in an active
transport protein pump costs one ATP molecule.
• Biosynthesis – building up large molecules from
smaller ones, e.g. protein synthesis, DNA replication,
starch synthesis, etc. Each monomer added to a
growing polymer chain costs one ATP molecule.
Since these processes use ATP, they all involve ATPase
enzymes. ATPases catalyse the hydrolysis of ATP to
ADP + Pi, and do work with the energy released.
Phagocytosis;
Synthesis of glycogen; Protein / enzyme; DNA /
RNA; Lipid / cholesterol;
Bile production;
Cell division
50
A species is defined as
Organisms that can breed together to produce fertile offspring,
Organisms in the same species are similar in morphology, behaviour and
biochemistry, and have the same ecological niche.
Organisms in the same species share a common ancestor.
Speciation
New species arise from an existing species where reproductively isolated
populations have resulted (thus, there is no gene flow between the populations).
This most commonly happens when the two populations become physically
separated (allopatric speciation)
If the speciation occurs when the organisms are occupying the same geographical
area but are reproductively isolated it is sympatric speciation. Common in plants
(flower at different times, polyploidy) less so in animals (but could arise due to
differences in reproductive organs, differences in mating ritual)
Each population experiences different environmental conditions, accumulates
different mutations and over a long period of time natural selection changes the
allelic frequencies of each population in different ways
This makes the organisms become so different they can no longer interbreed
Gene pool: all the alleles of all the genes in a population which result in variation.
Sympatric speciation
Copper-tolerant plants flower at a different time
from those which are not copper-tolerant.
Explain how this might eventually lead to the
production of a new species of plant.
1. Reproductively isolated due to different
flowering times
2. Different selection pressures for two
populations
3. Different features or plants are selected or
survive /different adaptations;
4. Populations become (genetically) different;
5. Unable to produce fertile offspring;
Explaining how geographical isolation can lead to the
formation of new species. (Allopatric speciation)
1. Populations are isolated by geographical barrier
(river, mountain, desert or ocean);
2. No gene flow between populations
3. Variation exists within the populations
4. Each population faces different selection
pressures due to different environments (climatic,
food, predators)
5. Mutation in one group (different from other
group)
6. Natural selection for specific alleles means
populations become adapted to local environment;
7. The best suited organisms survive and reproduce
pass on their alleles;
8. Change in allele frequencies over a long period of
time
9. Isolated populations become so different they can
no longer interbreed;
Explaining sympatric speciation
Original population living in one area 2 species
evolved in the same area;
Genetic variability exists in the population
Groups within the population becomes
reproductively isolated (flowering at different
times, different courtship behaviour)
Gene pools become increasingly different;
Until interbreeding does not produce fertile
offspring;
What is meant by reproductive isolation?
Organisms cannot interbreed/ breed or mate or reproduce with
another group
Due to incompatible gametes/ wrong courtship behaviour/
other valid reason
51
Darwin's theory of evolution based on natural
selection was based on four observations:
• Individuals within a species differ– there is variation.
• Offspring resemble their parents – characteristics are
inherited.
•More offspring are generally produced than survive
to maturity – most organisms die young from
predation, disease and competition. Those that survive
have better characteristics and thus reproduce and
pass on these genes
• Populations are usually fairly constant in size.
Summary of Natural Selection
1. There is genetic variation in the characteristics
within a population
2. Individuals with characteristics that make them less
well adapted to their environment will die young
from predation, disease or competition.
3. Individuals with characteristics that make them
well adapted to their environment will survive and
reproduce.
4. The allele frequency will change in each generation.
Differences between reproductive successes of individuals affect the
allele frequency in a population. It works like this
More organisms are produced than the environment can support
Populations remain a constant size (relatively)
Thus competition exists between members of a species to survive
In any population there is a gene pool (all the alleles of all the genes in
that)
Some organisms will have allele combinations that make them better
for competing thus they are more likely to survive and thus reproduce
and pass on their alleles.
Thus the advantageous alleles the parents had are more likely to be
passed on and the offspring are in turn more likely to survive as they
have advantageous alleles
Over generations the number of individuals with advantageous alleles
increases compared to the dwindling number of disadvantageous
alleles
So the allele frequency changes, advantageous alleles are more
common.
What is advantageous is dependent on the environment.
The Peppered Moth. These light-coloured moths are well camouflaged from bird predators against pale
lichen-covered bark of trees, while rare mutant dark moths are easily picked off. During the industrial
revolution in the 19th century, birch woods near industrial centres became black with pollution. In this
changed environment the black moths had a selective advantage and became the most common colour,
while the pale moths were easily predated and became rare. Kettlewell tested this by releasing dark and
light moths in polluted and unpolluted environments and observing selective predation. Since pollution has
cleared up in the 20th century the selection has revered again and pale moths are now favoured again over
dark ones.
Bacterial resistance to antibiotics. Antibiotics kill bacteria, but occasionally a chance mutant bacterium
appears that is resistant to an antibiotic. In an environment where the antibiotic is often present, this
mutant has an enormous selective advantage since all the normal (wild type) bacteria are killed leaving the
mutant cell free to reproduce and colonise the whole environment without any competition. Some farmers
routinely feed antibiotics to their animals to prevent infection, but this is a perfect environment for
resistant bacteria to thrive. The best solution is to stop using the antibiotic so that the resistant strain has
no selective advantage, and may die out.
Darwin explained the giraffe's long neck as follows:
1. In a population of animals there would be random genetic variation in neck length.
2. In an environment where there were trees and bushes, the longer-necked animals were slightly better
adapted as they could reach more leaves, and so competed well compared to their shorter-necked
relatives. These longer-necked animals lived longer, through more breeding seasons, and so had more
offspring.
3. The shorter-necked animals would be more likely to lose the competition for food, so would be poorly
nourished and would probably die young from predation or disease. They would have few, if any, offspring.
4. So in the next generation there were more long-neck alleles than short-neck alleles in the population. If
this continued over very many generations, then in time the frequency of long-neck alleles would increase
and so the average neck length would increase.
52
Directional Selection occurs when one extreme phonotype (e.g. tallest) is
favoured over the other extreme (e.g. shortest). This happens when the
environment changes in a particular way. "Environment" includes biotic as
well as abiotic factors, so organisms evolve in response to each other. e.g. if
predators run faster there is selective pressure for prey to run faster, or if one
tree species grows taller, there is selective pressure for other to grow tall.
Most environments do change (e.g. due to migration of new species, or
natural catastrophes, or climate change, or to sea level change, or continental
drift, etc.), so directional selection is common.
Stabilising (or Normalising) Selection. This occurs when the intermediate
phenotype is selected over extreme phenotypes, and tends to occur when the
environment doesn't change much. For example birds’ eggs and human babies
of intermediate birth weight are most likely to survive. The mean will not
change, the standard deviation will decrease as it selects against the extremes.
Disruptive (or Diverging) Selection. This occurs when both extremes of
phenotype are selected over intermediate types. For example in a population of
finches, birds with large and small beaks feed on large and small seeds
respectively and both do well, but birds with intermediate beaks have no
advantage, and are selected against.
Explain how selection results in an insecticide resistance.
Insecticide resistance already in population;
(resulting) from mutation;
resistant insects are not killed (by insecticide)/survive;
reproduce/breed;
passing on the relevant allele to the next generation/offspring;
resulting in increasing frequency of resistance allele in population
Explain what is meant by stabilising selection and describe where it
takes place.
1. Occurs in an unchanging environment; 1
2. (Initial range of values in which) mean is best adapted;
3. Selection against extremes / selection for the mean;
4. Mean/median/mode unaltered
5. Range/S.D is reduced;
6. Repeated over many generations;
7. Increasing proportion of populations becomes well adapted to
environment;
Explain how natural selection produces changes within a species.
Variation between members of population/species;
predation/disease/competition results in differential survival;
some have adaptations that favour survival;
survive to reproduce/have more offspring/ pass on their alleles/genes;
produces changes in frequency of alleles
Explain how resistance to an antibiotic could become widespread in a
bacterial population following a gene mutation conferring resistance in
just one bacterium.
1. Frequent use of antibiotic creates selection pressure
2. Bacteria with mutation/ resistance have advantage over others
3. (Survive to) reproduce more than other types
4. Pass on advantageous allele/ mutated allele in greater numbers
5. Frequency of (advantageous) allele increases over generations
Explain how natural selection favours the
evolution of bottom dwelling bacteria
containing photosynthetic pigment that
absorbs red and blue light most effectively
rather than green absorbed by those living
near the surface of the water
Little green light reaches bottom as absorbed by
surface dwellers
Red and blue not absorbed and so penetrate;
Variation in pigments of sediment dwellers;
Bacteria with chlorophyll at an advantage;
As chlorophyll absorbs red and blue;
(Survive to) reproduce in greater numbers;
Pass on advantageous alleles/genes in greater
numbers / increase in
frequency of advantageous alleles in
subsequent generations;
Increase in frequency/numbers of bacteria with
chlorophyll;
53
The sum of all the alleles of all the genes of all the individuals in a population is called the gene pool
The Hardy-Weinberg Principle
The frequencies of dominant and recessive alleles in a population remain constant over time, so long as five
key conditions about the population were met:
1. There are no mutations, so no new alleles are created.
2. There is no immigration /emigration, so no new alleles are introduced/ lost.
3. There is no selection, so no alleles are favoured or eliminated.
4. Mating is random, so alleles are mixed randomly.
5. The population is large, so there are no genetic bottlenecks.
These conditions mean that there is nothing to disturb the gene pool; the allele frequencies in the
population will remain constant from generation to generation.
Before this it was thought that dominant alleles would increase in frequency over time, and recessive alleles
would decrease in frequency, but this intuitive idea is wrong. Dominant alleles need not be common. For
example the dominant allele for Huntington’s disease is very rare in the population and almost everyone is
homozygous recessive.
The Hardy-Weinberg principle can be tested by measuring allele frequencies over time, and it is often found
that the frequencies do change. This means that the at least one of the five conditions is not true, and the
gene pool is not stable. In other words the population is evolving. So the Hardy-Weinberg principle provides
a means of detecting evolution, and quantifying the rate of evolutionary change.
If the gene pool is stable then we can use a simple equation to calculate the gene frequencies in a
population. There are three kinds of frequencies:
Phenotype frequencies are proportions of the different characteristics in the population (e.g. red or white).
These are the easiest, because we can see and count them in a population.
Genotype frequencies are the proportions of the three possible genotypes (BB, Bb and bb) in the
population. This isn’t so easy, because we can’t see the genotypes, but we can calculate them.
Allele frequencies are the proportions of the two alleles B and b in the population. Allele frequencies are
particularly interesting because evolution causes the allele frequencies to change.
The two equations you need are (p= frequency of dominant allele/ q = frequency of recessive allele)
1) p + q = 1 (use this when given allele frequencies)
2) p2
+ 2pq + q2
= 1 (use when given phenotype/genotype frequencies)
In a study of people, the frequency of the I
O
allele was found to be 0.55 and
that of the I
A
allele, 0.18. What was the frequency of the I
B
allele in this
population?
Sum of allele frequencies must be 1 (p + q = 1) so
0.55 + 0.18 + I
B
= 1
I
B
= 0.27
A population of 1000 cats has 840 black cats and 160 white cats. Black is
dominant and white is recessive. Calculate how many of the black cats were
homozygous and heterozygous.
We know that q2 = 0.16 (160/1000)
We know that p2 + 2pq = 0.84 (840/1000)
We can work out the frequency of the dominant and recessive alleles
q2 = 0.16
q = 0.4
p + q = 1
p = 1 – 0.4
p = 0.6
Now we can calculate the genotype frequencies
p2 so homozygous dominant black cats = 0.6 ×0.6 = 0.36
2pq, heterozygous cats = 2 × 0.6 × 0.4 = 0.48
q2, homozygous recessive white cats = 0.16
So: there were 360 homozygous black cats and 480 heterozygous making the
840 black cats.
In the flour beetle, the allele for red body colour (R) is dominant to the allele for
black body colour (r). A mixed culture of red beetles and black beetles was kept
in a container in the laboratory under optimal breeding conditions. After one
year, there were 149 red beetles and 84 black beetles in the container.
(a) Use the Hardy-Weinberg equation to calculate the expected percentage of
heterozygous red beetles in this population.
Total population = 84 + 149 = 233.
Black = recessive =q. 84 blacks means q2 = 0.36 (84/233), thus q = 0.6
P = 1 – 0.6 = 0.4
Heterozygotes =2 × 0.6 × 0.4 = 0.48 = 48%
54
Homogametic sex: the sex that produces gametes containing sex
chromosomes of the same type. Female gametes all have X chromosomes
Homologous chromosomes: a pair of chromosomes containing the same gene
sequences each derived from one parent
Homozygous (pure breed): possessing the same alleles of genes at one or
more loci on homologous chromosomes
Locus: the position on a chromosome of a gene or other chromosome marker
Multiple alleles: genes that have more than two different alleles
Phenotype: the features of an individual that result from the expression of the
genes and their interaction with the environment
Recessive allele: an allele whose effects only show when there are no
dominant alleles present. A recessive phenotype is always homozygous. The
allele not expressed in the heterozygous state
Sex chromosomes: the X and Y chromosomes in human beings which
determine the sex of an individual
Sex linkage: genes, other than those that determine sexual features, which
occupy a locus on one sex chromosome but not the other
Test-cross: cross fertilisation carried out between an unknown genotype
showing the dominant phenotype and an individual showing the recessive
phenotype.
Genetics definitions: you may wish to add more to this
Alleles: alternative forms of the same gene
Autosome: a chromosome not involved in sex determination (human genome has 22
pair’s autosomes and 1 pair of sex chromosomes)
Chromosomes: the self-replicating genetic structures of the cell containing the DNA
Co-dominant alleles: alleles whose effects both show in the phenotype of a heterozygote
(Remember incomplete dominance is where we get a blending of characteristics, breeding
a red and white flower gives pink flowers, co-dominance both characteristics are
expressed so we would get flowers with red and white spots)
Dominant allele: an allele whose effect always shows in the phenotype when it is present,
it is the allele expressed in the heterozygous state
Gene pool: all the alleles of all the genes in a population of organism, which results in
variation
Genotype: the alleles of a gene (genetic constitution) an individual inherits
Haploid: a nucleus with only a single set of chromosomes
Heterosomes: chromosomes involved in sex determination which are different in
appearance. In humans that Y chromosome determining male sex characteristics is much
shorter than the X.
Heterozygous: Possessing different alleles of genes at one or more loci on homologous
chromosomes
Heterogametic sex: the sex that produces gametes containing sex chromosomes of two
types. Males produce gametes with either an X or Y in them
55
Individuals can only have two copies of a gene and thus two alleles that may be the
same (homozygous [dominant or recessive]) or different (heterozygous).
However, there may be more than two alleles of a gene, like blood groups, which
have three alleles IA
, IB
and IO
.
IA
, IB
are codominant whilst IO
is recessive.
Thus there are 6 possible genotypes and 4 possible phenotypes shown in the table
across.
Monohybrid crosses: A simple breeding experiment involving a single characteristic
Test cross: you can see a phenotype but not the genotype. If a person shows the recessive trait, they must be homozygous for the characteristic, but showing a dominant trait
they could be homozygous or heterozygous. You can find out which by breeding the unknown with the homozygous recessive.
If all the results are dominant, then the parent is likely to be homozygous dominant. There may be some doubt as it is possible that the random nature of fertilisation has just
resulted in the dominant allele being passed on, so a large offspring number can help increase the certainty.
If the results are mixed then the parent must be heterozygous
How genotype controls phenotype
Genes are lengths of DNA that code for proteins. It is the proteins that control phenotype as enzymes, pumps and hormones and structural elements
Sex determination
X and Y chromosomes are non-homologous and are called Heterosomes, whilst the other
22 pairs are autosomes.
Males = XY Females = XX
Sex linked characteristics
The Y chromosomes is small, containing few genes and does little else than determine
sex. The X chromosomes is large and contains 1000s of genes. Females have 2 X
chromosomes whilst males only have 1 copy, so the inheritance of the genes on the X
chromosome is different for males and females, hence this inheritance is sex linked.
An example is colour-blindness where XR
for dominant, normal colour vision and Xr
represent colour blindness. See diagram on the right.
56
Co-dominance/Incomplete dominance
In most cases one allele is dominant over another and thus we get just two phenotypes. But in
some cases there are more phenotypes as neither allele is completely dominant over the other,
thus the heterozygote has a phenotype of its own.
With co-dominance, a cross between organisms with two different phenotypes produces
offspring with a third phenotype in which both of the parental traits appear together.
With incomplete dominance, a cross between organisms with two different phenotypes
produces offspring with a third phenotype that is a blending of the parental traits.
57
58
Propagation of the Action Potential
Depolarisation of axon membrane causes local currents to be set up
These currents cause a change in the permeability of the adjoining region as voltage gated Na
+
channels open
(in adjoining region)
Sodium ions enter adjoining region causing depolarisation
Repolarisation
Sodium channels voltage gates close (absolute refractory: no new action potential can be produced)
Potassium voltage gates open
Potassium ions leave down electrical/chemical gradient causing Repolarisation;
hyperpolarisation (more negative inside the axon than at rest) relative refractory: larger stimulus is required to
produce a new action potential
Sodium-potassium pump restores resting potential;
Resting Potential (-70mv, inside of the axon is negative in relation to the outside)
Caused by distribution of ions across membrane controlled by intrinsic protein channels and carriers
Sodium potassium pump actively transports sodium out of axon and potassium into the axon
Membrane is more permeable to potassium than sodium, sodium gates are closed
Potassium diffuses out of the axon
Negatively charged proteins are found inside the axon
Depolarisation
Change in the membrane potential. Inside of neurone becomes positive with respect to outside
Voltage Gated sodium channels open
Inflow of sodium ions down electrochemical gradient causes depolarisation
The ‘all or nothing’ nature of a nerve impulse
All action potentials are the same size and have a minimum threshold value for action potential to occur
Myelin insulates axon depolarisation so ions can only pass through (plasma membrane
of axon) at gaps in myelin sheath (nodes of Ranvier) impulse jumps from node to node (saltatory conduction). In
non myelinated neurones depolarisation occurs along the entire length of membrane. Thus energy demand is
lower in myelinated neurones as active transport of ions, for maintaining and restoring resting potential occurs
only at the nodes, so less ATP required, less respiration needed
59
Reflexes (purpose)
1. Automatic (adjustments to changes in environment)/ involuntary;
2. Reducing/avoiding damage to tissues / prevents injury/named injury
3. Role in homeostasis/example;
4. Posture/balance;
5. Finding/obtaining food/mate/suitable conditions;
6. Escape from predators;
Transmission at a
synapse
Presynaptic membrane
depolarises;
Calcium channels open;
Calcium ions enter;
Vesicles move to/fuse with
presynaptic membrane;
Release of transmitter by
exocytosis;
Diffusion across gap/cleft;
Binds to receptors in
postsynaptic membrane;
Sodium channels open and
sodium ions enter
postsynaptic membrane
G a n g l i o n c e l l s
B i p o l a r c e l l s
R o d c e l l
C o n e c e l l
A high degree of visual acuity:
Cone cells (responsible for acuity);
Each cone cell connected to an
individual neurone;
idea of light striking each individual cone
cell to generate a separate
action potential / impulse;
very small area of retina stimulated, so
very accurate vision;
Visual sensitivity in low light levels:
Rod cells (responsible for sensitivity);
Several rods connected to each bipolar
cell;
Additive effect of small amount of light
striking several rod cells;
creating a large enough depolarisation to
generate an action potential in the
ganglion cell
60
61
62
63
64
Chemical (ligand) gated: found on the postsynaptic membrane, attachment of a neurotransmitter
causes it to open. Some chemicals open sodium channels causing depolarisation (Excitatory) some
open potassium channels or chlorine channels causing hyperpolarisation.
Stretch mediated: Pacinian corpuscle
65
Describe the events which produce an action potential.
1 Stimulus to threshold / critical firing level;
2 Sodium channels/gates open;
3 Sodium ions enter;
4 Down electrical/chemical gradient;
5 Positive feedback;
6 Depolarisation;
7 Inside becomes positive / membrane potential reverses;
8 Potassium channels/gates open;
9 Potassium ions leave;
10 Down electrical/chemical gradient
11 Repolarisation;
12 Sodium channels/gates close;
13 Undershoot / hyperpolarisation;
14 Sodium-potassium pump restores resting potential;
Describe the events which allow transmission to take
place across the synapse (6)
Increased permeability of (presynaptic) membrane to
calcium ions;
Ca
2+
enter;
vesicles fuse with membrane;
exocytosis of / release of acetylcholine / neurotransmitter
diffuses across synaptic cleft;
binds to receptors on postsynaptic membrane / side
increased Na + permeability / opens sodium channels /
depolarises membrane
acetylcholine broken down by acetylcholinesterase;
Reflexes: rapid involuntary repsonses to a
stimulus.
Rapid:
Only involves 3 neurones: receptor, relay
and effector neurone;
myelination: saltatory conduction;
Few synapses;
chemical / synaptic transmission is slow OR
electrical / nervous transmission is fast;
Automatic
does not necessarily involve passage to
brain / only spinal cord;
same pathway used each time;
higher brain centres not involved / no
thinking;
How a resting potential is maintained in a
neurone.
Membrane less permeable to sodium ions
gated channels are closed / fewer channels;
Sodium ions actively transported out;
By sodium ion carrier / intrinsic proteins;
Higher concentration of sodium ions outside
the neurone;
Inside negative compared to outside / 3
sodium ions out for two potassium ions in
Negatively charged proteins / large anions
inside axon;
Explain the importance of reflex actions.
1. Automatic (adjustments to changes in
environment)/ involuntary;
2. Reducing/avoiding damage to tissues
3. Role in homeostasis/example;
4. Posture/balance;
5. Finding/obtaining food/mate/suitable
conditions;
6. Escape from predators;
When pressure is applied to a
Pacinian corpuscle, an impulse is
produced in its sensory neurone.
Explain how.
(Pressure) deforms and opens
(sodium) channels
Entry of sodium ions;
Causes depolarisation (generator
potential)
Ions diffuse downstream and when
threshold of nearby voltage gated
channels is reached they open and
sodium diffuses in causing
depolarisation
Describe how this action potential passes along
the neurone.propagation.
(Depolarisation of axon membrane causes) local
currents to be set up;
Change permeability (of adjoining region) to
Na+/
o
pen Na+
g
ates (in adjoining region);
sodium ions enter adjoining region;
adjoining region depolarises;
This process repeated along axon / self propagation;
Correct reference to/description of saltatory
conduction;
Why impulses along a non-myelinated
axon are slower than along a
myelinated axon.
Non-myelinated – next section of
membrane depolarised / whole
membrane;
myelinated – depolarisation / ion
movement only at nodes;
impulse jumps from node to node
/saltatory conduction
The ‘all or nothing’ principle
All action potentials are the
same size;
a minimum threshold value is
needed for action potential to
occur
Transmission of information may be
modified by summation.
Summation = addition of a number of
impulses converging on a single post
synaptic neurone;
allows integration of stimuli from a variety
of sources (spatial
summation);
allows weak background stimuli to be
filtered out before reaching the brain
(temporal summation)
Functions of the mitochondria in the
synaptic bulb.
Active transport of ions/ ionic pump;
(reject active transport of Ach)
Synthesis of acetylcholine /
neurotransmitter/ reform vacuole;
Reabsorption of acetylcholine, or acetyl +
choline (from cleft);
Movement of vesicles (to membrane);
Synthesis of relevant enzyme, e.g.
acetylcholinesterase.
Why transmission in
myleinated neurones uses
less energy.
Myelinated leads to
saltatory conduction
Active transport of ions is
used less only at nodes of
Ranvier;
Less respiration needed
less ATP needed;
For repolarisation of ion
balance;
66
Baroreceptors monitor the pressure of the blood
flowing into and out from the heart
Chemoreceptors monitor the pH of the blood flowing
in the heart and the brain
Rise in pressure stimulates heart to slow
Pressure receptors (baroreceptors) in aorta and
carotid sinus send impulses to cardio-inhibitory centre
in the medulla
Impulses are sent along the vagus nerves of the
parasympathetic nervous system to SAN;
The release of ACh decreases impulses from SAN
and this decreases impulses to AVN decreased
stimulation of AVN
How exercise causes heart rate to increase
Respiration increases
CO2 produced acidity of blood increases
Detected by chemoreceptors in aortic and carotid bodies and medulla
Impulses to cardio accelerator centre
More impulses along sympathetic nerves
Noradrenaline released at SAN increase heart rate
Higher pressure of blood in venous return (muscle contraction stronger)
Detected by pressure receptors in aorta and carotid artery
Impulses sent to the cardio acceleratory centre
More impulses via sympathetic nerves affecting the SAN
Changes in the heart rate are controlled by a region of the brain called the medulla. It
has 2 regions
CAC (linked to the SA node by sympathetic nervous system) – increases heart rate by
increasing sympathetic stimulation to the heart releasing noradrenaline at the AVN, SAN
and the cardiac fibres. It inhibits parasympathetic stimulation
CIC (linked to the SA node by the parasympathetic nervous system): decreases cardiac
output by inhibiting stimulation of the heart by the sympathetic system and increasing
the activity parasympathetic system, where the vagus nerve release ACH at the SAN
Mechanism of a heart beat
Cardiac muscle is myogenic
SAN sends out a wave of depolarisation across the atria
Atrial systole occurs
AVN relays the impulse to the ventricles
(Impulse is delayed to allow time for the ventricles to fill)
Impulse passes to the ventricles travelling down the Bundle of His and up the ventricular
walls along the purkyne fibres causing ventricular systole
67
Muscles
There are three types of muscle:
• Skeletal muscle (striated, voluntary)
This is always attached to the skeleton, and is under voluntary control via the motor
neurones of the somatic nervous system.
It can be subdivided into red (slow) muscle and white (fast) muscle. The striated
appearance is due to the overlap of thick (myosin) and thin (actin filaments).
• Cardiac Muscle
This is special type of red skeletal muscle. It looks and works much like skeletal muscle, but
is not attached to skeleton, and is not under voluntary control.
• Smooth Muscle
This is found in internal body organs such as the wall of the gut, the uterus, blood arteries
and arterioles.
It is under involuntary control via the autonomic nervous system or hormones.
Muscles contain about 1000 fibres running the whole length
of the muscle, joined together by tendons at the ends
Fibres are single muscle cells. They are made from the
fusion of many cells. They are multinucleate. They are
packed with mitochondria, which provide ATP for
contraction and uptake of calcium into the sarcoplasmic
reticulum. The sarcoplasm is packed with myofibrils,
bundles of filaments.
A myofibril is made of repeating dark and light bands.
There is a Z line in the middle of the light band and an
M line in the middle of the dark band. Under very high
resolution the myofibrils are shown to be made of
filaments, there are two types, thick (myosin) and thin
(actin)
Myosin: Thick filament. Each molecule has a tail with
two heads at the end. The tails meet at the M line of
the A band. The myosin heads contains ATPase, an
enzyme complex that hydrolyses ATP  ADP + Pi.
Actin: thin filament. Chains of globular proteins. 2
chains are twisted round each other. At point of twist,
myosin head binding site is located.
Actin is associated with two other proteins
1) Troponin: attached at regular intervals along the
chain, can bind calcium ions
2) Tropomyosin: lies in the grooves between the actin
chains, blocking the myosin binding site
Tropomyosin blocks the myosin binding site on the actin
filament when the muscle is at rest. When calcium is
released it binds to troponin and this causes the
tropomyosin to shift position exposing the binding site
for myosin.
68
Closer look at the myofibril banding pattern
I-Band/Light band/Isotropic band: light passes through easily.
Contains only actin filaments
Dark Z line running down it, where proteins anchor the actin filaments
Distance between Z lines = a sarcomere
A-band/Dark band/Anisotropic band:
Actin and myosin overlap
Darker M line down the centre, proteins anchor filaments
H-band, region in A band that is less dense as no overlap with actin here, only myosin
present.
Sarcomeres get shorter when the muscle contracts, so the whole muscle gets shorter. But
the dark band, which represents the thick filament, does not change in length. This shows
that the filaments don’t contract themselves, but instead they must slide past each other.
This sliding filament theory
The sarcomere shortens
The I bands shortens as actin moves between the myosin
The H band shortens or disappears as overlap between 2 filaments increases
The A band does not change myosin does not move
Energy for muscle contraction
Muscle contraction requires ATP; this can be sourced form a variety of places
1) ATP stores in the muscle last for around 2-3 seconds of activity, produced by aerobic
respiration
2) Regeneration of ATP from Creatine Phosphate/PC (without respiration). The hydrolysis of
PC releases inorganic phosphate and energy which can be used to phosphorylate ADP  ATP.
This is a coupled reaction as they occur together
PC  P + C + energy
ADP + P + energy  ATP
3) From anaerobic glycolysis. This produces lactic acid and some ATP. The build-up of lactic
acid means that this process is short lived. The possible reasons for this are…..
The change in pH (more acidic) affects the enzymes involved in glycolysis
The increases in acidity affect the binding of calcium to troponin.
69
Neuromuscular Junction
Nerve impulse depolarises the presynaptic membrane
Calcium channels opened and calcium ions enter the presynaptic
membrane
Synaptic vesicles move towards and fuse with, the presynaptic
membrane;
Release of transmitter substance (Ach skeletal muscles or noradrenaline
effcetors associated with the sympathetic nervous system) into
synaptic cleft
Diffusion of transmitter substance across cleft
Attachment to receptor sites on intrinsic protein molecules on post
synaptic membrane causes
Ion gated sodium channels to open and sodium ion influx down
concentration gradient
Causing depolarisation of post synaptic membrane/sarcolemma;
70
Muscle fibres
1) White/fast twitch: (principally releases energy by anaerobic
respiration)
Speed of response is more important than sustained contraction
Provide rapid and powerful contractions: hydrolyses ATP rapidly
(ATP from CP/ATP or Glycolysis)
Fewer mitochondria
Low density of capillaries
Low myoglobin concentration
Extensive sarcoplasmic reticulum: rapid release and uptake of
calcium
More myosin filaments
High concentration of anaerobic enzymes
CP store
Higher concentrations of ATPase than slow twitch so that ATP can
be hydrolysed rapidly.
Fatigue quickly and accumulate lactic acid
2) Red/slow twitch/tonic muscle fibres (principally releases energy
by aerobic respiration)
Slower, less powerful sustained contractions (endurance muscles)
Many mitochondria (release energy)
Dense capillary network (providing oxygen and glucose)
High myoglobin (oxygen holding component of muscle)
Glycogen store
Small diameter giving short diffusion pathway
High concentration of enzymes involved in aerobic respiration
High resistance to fatigue
Explain the advantage of having both fast and slow twitch fibres
Fast fibres make immediate contraction possible before the
blood supply adjusts
Most energy anaerobically generated;
fast fibres used in explosive locomotion;
slow fibres allow sustained contraction
Slow fibres used in maintaining posture/endurance events
Respire / release energy aerobically;
Or too much lactate would accumulate;
Slow twitch fibres adapted to aerobic metabolism;
As have many mitochondria; Site of Krebs’ cycle; And electron transport
chain; Much ATP formed; Also are resistant to fatigue;
71
The I band = actin only (z line is dark line in middle of I band where proteins hold actin in place
The A band = actin and myosin overlap. The H-zone is a lighter region within the A band where
only actin is present. There is a dark line, the m-line here where proteins hold myosin in place
Sarcomere = distance between z-line
In contraction: sarcomere gets smaller, H-zone gets smaller, I-band gets smaller but…..the A
band remains unchanged
Transmission across the neuromuscular junction
Nerve impulse depolarises the presynaptic membrane;
calcium channels opened and calcium ions enter the presynaptic membrane;
synaptic vesicles move towards and fuse with, the presynaptic membrane;
release of transmitter substance (Ach skeletal muscles or noradrenaline effcetors
associated with the sympathetic nervous system) into synaptic cleft
diffusion of transmitter substance across cleft
attachment to receptor sites on intrinsic protein molecules on post synaptic membrane
causes
ion gated sodium channels to open and sodium ion influx down concentration gradient;
causing depolarisation of post synaptic membrane/sarcolemma;
Describe role of ATP and Calcium in muscle contraction
Calcium ions bind to troponin;
Remove blocking action of tropomyosin and exposes actin binding sites;
Calcium activates myosin ATPase and ATP is hydrolysed allowing myosin to form a
cross-bridge
ATP is required to break the cross bridge and to remove calcium form the sarcoplasm
into the sarcoplasmic reticulum (active transport)
72
At rest the tropomyosin blocks the myosin binding site on the actin filament
At rest the myosin head ATPase is inactive and the myosin is in its low energy
configuration (the head bends back over the myosin tail.
The muscle is in a relaxed state
The depolarisation of the sarcolemma (an action potential) causes calcium to be
released from the sarcoplasmic reticulum. This causes some important
changes…..
Calcium binds to troponin and causes a conformational change in the troponin-
tropomyosin complex to expose the binding sites
Calcium activates the myosin head ATPase and hydrolyses ATP. This causes the
myosin to change into the high energy configuration where the myosin head is at
a right angle to its tail and an acto-myosin cross bridge forms. Note the ADP and
Pi remain attached
The ADP and Pi are released from the myosin head and it reverts to the low
energy configuration (power stroke) and pulls the actin filament across as it
goes.
The cross bridge is broken when a second ATP molecule attaches to the
myosin head
The ATP for muscle contraction comes from the following…
From ATP stored in muscle (2-3 secs worth)
Anaerobic glycolysis  leads to lactic acid
Aerobic respiration
Alactic system, phosphocreatine (PC)
Break down of PC releases energy and
inorganic P. The inorganic P is attached to
ADP using the energy released from PC
hydrolysis, this is a coupled reaction.
Lactic acid prevents muscle contraction
because
Affects enzymes involved in ATP
production
Affects the binding of calcium to protein
troponin
73
Plants can sense and respond to stimuli. Many of these responses are directional growth responses, called
tropisms. Tropisms can be positive (growing towards the stimulus) or negative (growing away from the
stimulus) and occur in response to a variety of stimuli:
From these experiments (1-3) the Darwins concluded that light is detected only at the shoot tip, and an
“influence” was transmitted from the tip down the shoot to cause bending further down. They had no
idea what this “influence” was.
Frits Went (4-6) showed that the “influence” was a chemical. He knew that seedlings with their tips cut
off would not grow, while seedlings with an intact tip would. So he cut off the tips off growing seedlings,
placed them on small blocks of agar for two hours, and then placed the agar blocks on top of cut
seedlings in the dark. Agar jelly allows chemicals to diffuse through but contains no living cells, and a
control experiment using agar blocks that had not been in contact with shoot tips did not promote
growth. Went concluded that a chemical substance had diffused from the shoot tip into the agar, and
that this substance stimulated growth further down the shoot. He called this substance auxin.
In the 1960s Winslow Briggs (7-9) used Went’s method (experiment 6) to assay the amount of auxin in
plant material. He found that the greater the amount of auxin, the greater the bending. In the
experiments below the numbers refer to the angle of bending and therefore to the amount of auxin.
These discoveries are summarised in the Cholodny-Went theory, which states that auxin is
synthesized in the coleoptile tip; asymmetric illumination is detected by the coleoptile tip and
this causes auxin to move into the darker side; auxin diffuses down the coleoptile; and the
higher auxin concentration on the darker side causes the coleoptile to bend toward the light
source. Although there is a lot of evidence supporting this theory, it is by no means certain
and some recent studies using radioactive tracers have found no difference in IAA
concentration on the dark and light sides of a shoot. An alternative mechanism is that IAA is
present on both sides but is somehow inhibited on the light side, so there is little growth.
How does auxin work?
In 1934 auxin was identified as a compound called indoleacetic acid, or IAA. It was the
first of a group of substances controlling plant growth responses called plant growth
regulators, or PGRs. PGRs are a bit like animal hormones, but the term hormones is not
used for plants because PGRs are not made in glands and do not travel in blood. IAA is
hydrophobic so it can diffuse through cell membranes and so move around the plant.
IAA stimulates growth by:
1. Binding to a receptor protein in the target cell membranes and activating a proton
pump.
2. This pump pumps protons (hydrogen ions) from the cytoplasm of these cells to their
cell walls.
3. The resulting decrease in pH activates an enzyme that breaks the bonds between
cellulose microfibrils.
4. This loosens the cell wall and so allows the cell to elongate under the internal turgor
pressure.
74
Explain how the body of a mammal may respond to a rise
in the environmental temperature.
Reducing body temp
Hot receptors in skin;
nervous impulse;
to hypothalamus;
blood temperature monitored;
heat loss centre involved;
vasodilation / dilation of arterioles;
more blood to surface / heat lost by radiation;
piloerector muscles relax;
hairs flatten on skin surface;
less insulation;
sweating initiated / increased;
panting / licking;
evaporation removes latent heat;
drop in metabolic rate / use less brown fat;
accept long term changes such as less fat deposition;
thinner fur;
migration;
accept one behavioural process;
Cross-channel swimmers experience a large decrease in
external temperature when they enter the water. Describe
the processes involved in thermoregulation in response to
this large decrease in external temperature. (7)
Raising body temp
1. hypothalamus (contains the thermoregulatory centre);
2.has receptors which detect temperature changes of blood;
3.receives impulses from receptors in skin;
4.nerve impulses transmitted (from hypothalamus / brain);
5.results in vasoconstriction / constriction of arterioles / dilation
of shunt vessels;
6.diversion of blood to core / specified organ / less blood to
skin;
7.muscular contraction /shivering generates heat via
respiration;
8.release of thyroxine / adrenaline;
9.increase in metabolic rate / respiration;
10.correct reference to negative feedback mechanisms;
Describe the role of insulin in the
control of blood glucose
concentration. (4)
increase in blood sugar leads to lower
blood sugar
(homeostatic principle)/ (more) insulin
secreted;
binds to (specific) receptors on
(liver/muscle) cells;
leads to more glucose
entering cells/carrier activity/
increased permeability to glucose;
glucose leaves the blood;
glucose entering cell converted to
glycogen;
Describe how a small amount of glucagon in the body could
cause a rapid increase in the concentration of glucose in the
blood plasma. (3)
Ref to cascade / amplification effect; 1
>1 molecule of cyclic AMP formed per glucagon (molecule);
each cyclic AMP activates >1 enzyme(molecule) ;
each enzyme causes breakdown of >1 glycogen (molecule);
each glycogen gives >1 glucose / glycogen is a polymer;
glucose diffuses into blood /
glucose moves high to low concentration;
12 (b) Explain how the hormone glucagon brings
about its changes in the body.
It acts on liver cells;
causing conversion of glycogen into glucose;
via action of an enzyme;
gluconeogenesis;
Negative feedback
An initial stimulus causes a
response that reduces the
magnitude of the initial
stimulus
Positive feedback
A stimulus causes a
response that intensifies the
initial input
75
Hormones…
Chemicals secreted from endocrine glands
Carried in the blood stream to their target organs
Target organs have specific receptors that compliment the shape of the hormone
2nd
Messenger Model/cascade effect of hormones
Hormone (1st messenger) does not enter the cell but attaches to a receptor on the cell membrane
Attachment starts a cascade system through the action of a second messenger cAMP
Example of cascade effect specific to glucagon
Attachment of 1 molecule of glucagon activates an enzyme adenylate cyclase
1 Active Adenylate cyclase converts many molecules of ATP  to many cAMP’s
Each molecule of cAMP activates more than one glycogen phosphorylase enzyme
Each glycogen phosphorylase enzyme catalyses the hydrolysis of more than one glycogen molecule
Each glycogen molecule is made up of many glucose monomers
In this process a small amount of a hormone (glucagon) causes a series of amplified steps that causes
a big response.
Hormones are….
Small molecules
Transported in the plasma
Effective in small amounts
76
Blood temperature monitored by
thermoreceptors in hypotahlamus
Environmental temperature
monitored by thermoreceptors in
skin send impulses to…
Environmental temperature
monitored by thermoreceptors in
skin send impulses to…
H
Y
P
O
T
H
A
L
A
M
U
S
Cooling Down
Thermoreceptors in skin detect rise in environmental temperature and send
impulses to the hypothalamus
Thermorecptors in the hypothalamus detect rise in blood temperature
Heat loss centre is stimulated (parasympathetic nerves mainly involved)
Impulses sent via parasympathetic nerves to the precapillary sphincters in
arterioles and they relax causing vasodilation allowing more blood to flow in the
capillaries in the surface of the skin causing more heat loss by radiation
Impulses along parasympathetic nerves cause erector pilli muscles to relax so
hairs lie flat reducing the layer of insulating air
Increased impulses along the sympathetic nerves causes an increase in
sweating. The high latent heat of vaporisation of water uses heat energy from the
body thus cooling the body down. Heat loss by the evaporation of water in sweat.
Metabolic rate decreases
Warming Up
Thermoreceptors in skin detect rise in environmental temperature and send
impulses to the hypothalamus
Thermorecptors in the hypothalamus detect rise in blood temperature
Heat gain centre is stimulated (mainly sympathetic nerves involved here)
2 responses- heat conservation and heat generation
Conservation
Vasoconstriction impulses sent along the sympathetic nerves cause pre
capillary sphincters in arterioles to contract and reduce blood flow in the
capillaries supplying the skin. Blood is diverted through the arteriovenous shunt
vessel, so less heat loss by radiation occurs.
Piloerection impulses along the sympathetic nerves to the erector pili muscles
cause them to contract and the hair stands up trapping a layer of insulating air
Trapped layer of air warms up and reduces the temperature gradient between the
blood and environment.
Reduced sweating, impulses via the parasympathetic nerves causes less
sweating
Generation
Shivering- increased muscle activity, increases respiration, releasing heat
energy that transfers to blood flowing through the organs.
Increased metabolism- due to increase in release of adrenaline from adrenal
glands and increased thyroxine from the thyroid glands.
Brown fat oxidation (infants and animals). Rich in mitochondria and
oxidation of fat releases heat energy. Brown fat is located at the back of the
neck and warms blood flowing to the brain
77
78
P l a s m a
g l u c o s e
c o n c e n t r a t i o n
N o f o o d
f r o m t h i s
p o i n t o n
K e y C h a n g e i n t h i s p e r i o d
d u e t o g l u c a g o n
C h a n g e i n t h i s p e r i o d
d u e t o i n s u l i n
T i m e
Describe how blood glucose concentration is controlled by
hormones in an individual who is not affected by diabetes.
Insulin / glucagon secreted by pancreas / islets of Langerhans;
Hormone receptors in membrane (of target cells);
(insulin stimulates) conversion of glucose to glycogen /
glycogenesis:
activates / involves enzymes;
stimulates uptake by cells;
conversion of glucose to lipid / protein;
glucagon stimulates conversion of glycogen to glucose;/
glycogenolysis;
glucagon stimulates conversion of lipid / protein to glucose /
gluconeogenesis;
G l u c a g o n
R e c e p t o r
C e l l s u r f a c e m e m b r a n e
A T P C y c l i c A M P
G l y c o g e n G l u c o s e
A c t i v e
e n z y m e
I n a c t i v e
e n z y m e
A d e n y l a t e
c y c l a s e
}
How the cascade effect works with hormones
Ref to cascade / amplification effect;
>1 molecule of cyclic AMP formed per glucagon (molecule);
each cyclic AMP activates >1 enzyme(molecule) ;
each enzyme causes breakdown of >1 glycogen (molecule);
each glycogen gives >1 glucose / glycogen is a polymer;
glucose diffuses into blood /
glucose moves high to low concentration;
Use evidence from the graph to explain the role of
negative feedback in the control of plasma glucose
concentration. (5)
1. Deviation of a value from norm initiates corrective
mechanisms;
2. Fluctuations in plasma glucose concentration
detected by hypothalmus/islet
cells in pancreas;
3. Initial decrease, no food given (in plasma glucose)
stimulates (increased)
secretion of glucagon;
4. Increases (in plasma glucose) stimulate (increased)
secretion of insulin;
5. Correct ref. to role of  and/or  cells as secretors;
6. Correct ref. to interconversion of glycogen / glucose;
7. Increased/decreased uptake of glucose by cells (as
appropriate)/correct
ref to change in membrane permeability;
79
Fasting blood glucose level: this is the amount of glucose in the blood after
fasting overnight (about 10hours). It tells us the amount of glucose required by the
cells to maintain resting metabolic rate
Diabetes is a condition in which there are higher than normal blood glucose levels in the body. Symptoms can be, excessive thirst, hunger and urination. Sweet smelling
breath (Ketosis: due to the high level of ketones form fat metabolism), glucose in the urine.
Type I- pancreas does not secrete enough insulin
Type II – liver no longer responds to insulin
Pancreas monitors and controls the BGL
The organ has both endocrine and exocrine properties
Endocrine secreting hormones into the blood vessels
Exocrine properties secreting enzymes into ducts
The endocrine tissue of the pancreas is called the Islets of Langerhans. this contains two types of
cells
Alpha cells
Secreting glucagon
Causes glycogenolysis (glycogen  glucose)
Through the action of glycogen phosphorylase
Beta cells
Secreting insulin
Causes glycogenesis (glucose  glycogen)
Through the action of glycogen synthase
Role of insulin
Binds to specific receptors on the membrane and opens channel proteins in the membrane
increasing the permeability of the cells (mainly in the liver and muscle) to glucose
Increases respiration so that more glucose is used
Causes the activation of enzymes involved in the conversion of glucose to glycogen (glycogenesis)
Causes the conversion of glucose into fat in adipose tissue
Role of glucagon
Only affects the liver cells
Acts through the cascade effect through a second messenger
Causes the activation of an enzyme (glycogen phosphorylase) that causes the hydrolysis of
glycogen to glucose. It also encourages the formation of glucose from non glucose substrates
(amino acids, fatty acids) in a process called gluconeogensis
Adrenaline (sometimes called epinephrine) causes increased glycogenolysis
80
1. FSH is secreted by the pituitary glands, and stimulates the development of a Graafian follicle in one of
the ovaries. This follicle contains a single ovum cell surrounded by other calls.
2. The follicle secretes oestrogen, which stimulates the uterus to rebuild the endometrium wall that has
been shed during menstruation. Oestrogen also affects the pituitary gland, initially inhibiting the release
of FSH. However, as the follicle gradually develops, the concentration of oestrogen in the blood rises,
and it starts to stimulate the release of FSH and LH by the pituitary gland.
3. The sudden surge of LH at about day 14 causes the fully developed follicle to burst, release the ovum
in the oviduct – ovulation. LH also stimulates the follicle to develop into a body called the corpus luteum,
which secretes progesterone.
4. Progesterone stimulates the uterus to complete the development of the endometrium wall, which is
now ready to receive an embryo. Progesterone also inhibits the release of LH and FSH by the pituitary
gland, which in turn stops the release of oestrogen and progesterone by the ovaries.
5. The corpus luteum degenerates over the next 10 days, due to prostaglandins produces by the ovary,
so less progesterone is secreted. When the concentration of progesterone drops low enough
menstruation is triggered. The inhibition of the pituitary gland is also removed, so FSH starts to be
released and the cycle starts again.
If an egg is fertilised and the embryo implants in the uterus, the embryo secretes a hormone called
human chorionic gonadotrophin (HCG). HCG stops the corpus luteum degenerating, so progesterone
continues to be produced and there is no menstruation. Progesterone also stops the pituitary releasing
FSH, so no more ova are matured during pregnancy. Pregnancy test kits test for the presence of small
amounts of HCG in the urine.
The menstrual cycle in humans is controlled by four hormones secreted by two
glands.
• The pituitary gland, below the hypothalamus in the brain, secretes the
hormones follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinising hormone (LH), which
target the ovaries.
• The ovaries are endocrine organs as well as creating and releasing ova. They
secrete the hormones oestrogen and progesterone, which target the pituitary
gland and the uterus.
The effects of these four hormones are shown in this diagram.
81
During the oestrous cycle in a mammal, one or more follicles mature.
Ovulation then takes place. Describe the part played by hormones in
controlling these events. (6)
FSH secreted by pituitary gland;
Stimulates growth of follicle;
Ovary/follicle cells produce oestrogen;
Negative feedback/inhibits secretion of FSH;
Oestrogen stimulates secretion of LH/LH from pituitary;
LH stimulating ovulation;
Second increase in FSH also associated with ovulation;
Explain how oral contraceptives containing progesterone
and oestrogen work. (5)
Oestrogen inhibits FSH;
prevents follicle developing;
progesterone inhibits LH;
also inhibits FSH;
inhibits ovulation;
FSH and LH bring about ovulation
Describe the role of hormones in controlling
the development of the changes associated
with puberty in girls. (6)
Production of FSH/LH/pituitary hormones;
Stimulate ovary/follicle development;
Producing oestrogen;
Oestrogen stimulating breast development;
Oestrogen stimulating pelvic girdle growth;
Androgen secretion;
Androgens responsible for growth spurt/pubic
hair development;
Growth hormone also involved;
Explain how the different components of nervous system are involved
in the cooling an animal down (6)
(b) Stimulus is increased blood temperature;
Increase in temperature results from exercise/respiration/metabolism;
Detected by receptors in hypothalamus;
Hypothalamus is coordinator;
In this case, the heat loss centre;
Effectors are muscles;
Of arteriole;
Response involves vasodilation;
Increased blood flow to capillaries;
Allowing heat loss by radiation/convection;
Correct reference to action potential/nerve impulse;
Describe how the body responds to a rise in core body
temperature. (5)
Temperature receptors stimulated in; (in skin disqualifies)
hypothalamus;
heat loss centre stimulated;
nerve impulses to sweat glands;
increase rate of / start sweat production;
nerve impulses to skin arterioles;
vasodilation (ref to vessels moving disqualifies)
Explain how the body of a mammal may respond
to a rise in the environmental temperature.
Hot receptors in skin;
nervous impulse;
to hypothalamus;
blood temperature monitored;
heat loss centre involved;
vasodilation / dilation of arterioles;
more blood to surface / heat lost by radiation;
piloerector muscles relax;
hairs flatten on skin surface;
less insulation;
sweating initiated / increased;
panting / licking;
evaporation removes latent heat;
drop in metabolic rate / use less brown fat;
accept long term changes such as less fat deposition;
thinner fur;
migration;
accept one behavioural process;Describe the important differences
between the nervous and hormonal
co–ordination systems found in a
mammal.(4)
Rapid / slow;
direct / broadcast;
short lived/ long term;
mainly electrical ; chemical;
delivery via nerves / blood vessels;
cause depolarisation of target cell
membrane /
receptors in membrane of target cell;
Explain how normal core body temperature is
maintained when a person moves into a cold room. (5)
1. Sensors in skin/hypothalmus detect reduced temperature;
2. heat gain centre activated/inhibition of heat loss centre;
3. vasoconstriction/constriction of arterioles in skin surface;
(R capillaried)
4. dilation of shunt vessels/constriction of – capillary
sphincter;
5. less blood to skin surface/capillaries
6. reduced heat loss by radiation;
7. incresed heat gain by increased metabolic rate/respiration/
movement/shivering;
8. decreased heat loss by putting on
clothes/huddling/reduced
sweating;
During exercise, much heat is generated. Describe the homeostatic
mechanisms that restore normal body temperature following vigorous
exercise.(5)
Receptors in hypothalamus detect increase in core temperature /
temperature of blood;
Heat loss centre stimulated;
Skin arteries / arterioles dilate / vasodilation;
Shunt vessels / pre-capillary sphincters constrict;
More blood flows to surface (capillaries);
Heat loss by radiation;
Heat loss by evaporation of sweat;
Reduced metabolic rate;
Remove clothing / seek cooler area / cold drink;
82
Use a gene probe to locate the desired gene
Remove using a restriction enzyme
Cuts at recognition sequence/restriction site
Typically a palindromic sequence
GAATTC
CTTAAG
Can produce sticky ends
Or blunt ends
Use reverse transcriptase on
mRNA from cell producing gene product
cDNA formed
Use nucleotides and DNA polymerase to make gene
Why It’s better to use mRNA
Than look for one gene among the many in
the nucleus
Large amounts of mRNA can be obtained
from the cell producing the protein
The introns are removed
Plasmid = vector
A carrier that transfers genetic material
from one organism to the next
Cut with the same restriction enzyme
Gene and plasmid anneal by H- bonds
between complementary base pairs
DNA ligase forms phosphate sugar bonds
in the covalent backbone
Getting the recombinant genetic material
into the bacteria
Heat shock:
Incubate, recombinant plasmids, with
bacteria and calcium ions at 00
C
Raise temperature to 420
C suddenly
Low success rate
Other methods
Electroporation: voltage across cell
membrane
Or use a virus, adapted to get genetic
material inside host cells
Gene markers
A marker gene is a gene used in molecular
biology to determine if a nucleic acid
sequence has been successfully inserted into
an organism's DNA
Selective: targets a feature that normally
protects the organism form harm, antibiotic
resistance genes
Screening
Changes organisms appearance (GFP) or
metabolism (enzyme marker)
Faster than using the selective markers
Replica plating
Use R- plasmid with resistance to 2
antibiotics
Insert desired gene within gene for
tetracycline resistance
Transformed bacteria have ampicillin
resistance not to tetracycline.
Grow on ampicillin plate
Those that grow have a plasmid (may
not be recombinant)
Create replica, tetracycline plate
Missing colonies have recombinant
plasmid
Fertility segment removed from the
plasmid to prevent conjugation
(transfer of genetic material between
organisms. Reduces the risk of other
organisms getting the gene
Remember this process has a low success rate. When trying to make recombinant plasmids there are several possible outcomes (recombinant plasmid,
reformed plasmid and rings of sample DNA . When trying to transform the bacteria there are three possible outcomes. So we must identify the bacteria that
have been transformed
83
Replica plating
Bacteria are spread on
ampicillin agar to get
separate colonies
Bacteria containing
plasmids will survive
Replica plate with
tetracycline produced
Colonies transferred using
nylon/felt material
Bacteria growing on
ampicillin but not
tetracycline have
recombinant plasmid
Ampicillin plate
Tetracycline plate
84
Isolation of a gene:
1) Restriction enzymes (restriction endonucleases):
The enzymes have very specific active sites that hydrolyse the phosphodiester bond in DNA backbone
These cut DNA at specific base sequences (recognition sequences)
They are produced naturally by bacteria (defence against viruses) and are named after the bacteria from which they are
sourced. There are 1000s of types with unique active sites and hence recognition sequences.
These recognition sequences are usually palindromic sequences, meaning that they read the same both ways, they are 4-8
base pairs long.
GAATTC
CTTAAG
Usually they make a staggered cut and produce sticky ends: short sections on unpaired bases (single stranded DNA)
Sometimes they cut straight across and make blunt ends
The resulting products are called restriction fragments
The resulting sticky ends can anneal with other sticky ends produced by the action of the same restriction enzyme
DNA ligase
Repairs the
DNA by joining
nucleotides and
reforming the
phosphodiester
bonds in
backbone
Reverse transcriptase
An enzyme produced by Retroviruses, who have their genetic
information as RNA. Reverse transcriptase converts RNA to DNA
It is used to generate DNA sequences for a gene.
Only certain genes are expressed in cells. So if we know what cell
expresses the gene we want (e.g. insulin) then we know these cells
will have the mRNA for the protein.
mRNA is extracted and mixed with reverse transcriptase forming
cDNA. The cDNA is heated with DNA nucleotides and polymerase.
Why use reverse transcriptase…….
1) The resulting DNA does not have the introns (genes with introns are too big to be incorporated into the bacterial
plasmids, plus bacteria cannot splice out the introns, so the cDNA can be expressed by bacteria
2) A large amount of mRNA can be acquired 3) Do not have to locate and cut the gene among the 1000s in the nucleus
4) It forms a stable copy of the gene, as DNA is less easily broken down than RNA
85
In Vivo gene cloning (in vivo: means using a whole living organism, not just part, here the plasmid and then bacteria are used to amplify the gene.)
We have seen that we can obtain a desired gene by using restriction enzyme to cut at specific palindromic recognition sites/restriction sequences or by using reverse transcriptase to make cDNA
from mRNA (removed from a cell that produces a the desired protein). We can determine the gene by gene sequencing or analysing the amino acids making up the protein and working out the
codons for these. Now we must use the gene. We can amplify Clone the gene) the amount of it using in vivo techniques or as discussed later, in vitro techniques (PCR). Using in vivo we can both
amplify the gene and have the gene expressed.
The diagram below shows how a gene can be incorporated into
a plasmid using restriction and ligase enzymes.
1. A restriction enzyme is used to cut the gene from the donor
DNA, with sticky ends.
2. The same restriction enzyme cuts the plasmid in the middle
of one of the marker genes (we’ll see why this is useful later).
But use of the same restriction enzyme produces
complimentary sticky ends
3. The gene and plasmid are mixed in a test tube and they
anneal because they were cut with the same restriction enzyme
and have the same sticky ends.
4. The fragments are joined covalently by DNA ligase to form a
hybrid vector/recombinant plasmid (in other words a mixture or
hybrid of bacterial and foreign DNA).
5. Several other products are also formed: some plasmids will
simply re-anneal with themselves to re-form the original
plasmid, and some DNA fragments will join together to form
chains or circles. These different products cannot easily be
separated, but it doesn’t matter, as the marker genes can be
used later to identify the correct hybrid vector.
Vectors: something that carries genetic material form one organism to another
Characteristics
The vector must be able to replicate once inside the host
It must have more than one recognition site for the restriction enzyme to cut
It should have some form of genetic marker to make it identifiable
Easily integrated into the host Easy to obtain and handle
Plasmids make good vectors because
They are big enough to hold the genes we want It is circular so is less likely to be broken down
It contains control sequences (transcription promoter) so the gene is replicated and expressed
They often contain marker genes in the form of antibiotic resistance that serve as recognition sites for the endonucleases
They are separate to the main DNA
The negative aspect of using plasmids as vectors is that relatively small genes must be inserted into them
Viral vectors
Advantages: They are adapted to gain entry to the host cells They are often host specific with regard to infection
They can integrate their DNA into that of the host
Disadvantages: But they can trigger an immune response
Uptake may be sporadic as some viruses (retro viruses) only infect dividing cells
The expression of the gene is not always guaranteed as it is not inserted into the chromosome.
Why clone a gene?
A particular gene can be isolated and its nucleotide sequence
determined
Control sequences of DNA can be identified & analyzed
Protein/enzyme/RNA function can be investigated
Mutations can be identified, e.g. gene defects related to
specific diseases
Organisms can be ‘engineered’ for specific purposes, e.g. insulin
production, insect resistance, etc.
Genetic fingerprinting
86
Advantages of in vivo
Very little risk of contamination as it is based around the annealing of
complementary sticky ends that must be produced using restriction
enzymes, unlikely any contaminating DNA will possess these.
Accuracy of copying is greater than that of PCR
It can be used to produce active proteins rather than just the gene itself, as
the bacteria will translate the gene that has been integrated into its
genome.
Disadvantages of in vivo
Slow process as the gene must be identified; removed, added to the
plasmid, then the bacteria must be transformed, identified and cultured
The success rate of transformation is very low
The success rate of recombination is very low
Large amounts of DNA needed
Needs pure intact DNA
Takes a few days to complete
Transformation: Transformation means inserting new DNA (usually a
recombinant plasmid) into a living cell (called a host cell), which is
thus genetically modified, or transformed. A transformed cell can
replicate and express the genes in the new DNA. DNA is a large
molecule that does not readily cross cell membranes, so the
membranes must be made permeable in some way. There are
different ways of doing this depending on the type of host cell. These
methods are outlined below
Heats shock: host cell and vector are incubated together in a solution
containing calcium ions and 00
C. The temperature is suddenly raised
to 400
C. This causes some cells to transform. It works well on bacteria
and animal cells.
Electroporation: high voltage pulse disrupts the membrane and
allows the vector to enter
Viruses: as mentioned above, mainly as their mechanism of infection
relies on getting to genes into a host cell. The viruses must be
genetically engineered so they can’t reproduce themselves and they
are non-toxic.
Micro-Injection. To transform individual cells, such as fertilised animal egg cells, the DNA is injected
directly into the nucleus using an incredibly fine micro-pipette.
Gene Gun. Tiny gold particles coated with DNA can be fired at plant cells using a compressed air gun.
The particles can penetrate the tough cell wall and deliver the DNA to the nucleus.
Plant Tumours. Plant cells are infected with a transformed bacterium, which inserts its plasmid into the
plant cells' chromosomal DNA. Whole new plants are grown from these cells by micropropagation.
Liposomes. Human cells in vivo can be transformed by DNA encased in liposomes, which fuse with the
cell membrane, delivering the DNA into the cell.
Viruses. Human cells in vivo can be infected by genetically-engineered viruses, which deliver the DNA
into host cells. The viruses must first be made it safe, so they can’t cause disease.
87
Marker Genes
Marker genes (or reporter genes) are used to find which cells
have actually taken up the hybrid vector
Selective markers: The R plasmid. This plasmid contains the genes for resistance to two antibiotics
Tetracycline
Ampicilin
The restriction enzyme cuts at the gene for tetracycline, The gene is inserted into this gene
The plasmid no longer carries the resistance to tetracycline but is still resistant to ampicillin
So all bacteria that took up a plasmid (irrespective of whether it is the original reformed plasmids or the recombinant) are resistant to ampicillin. The bacteria are grown on agar containing
ampicillin and any that grow have taken up some form of plasmid
A replica plate is made but this time it contains tetracycline.
So where the bacteria are no missing (didn’t grow on the replica) it means the plasmid they took up was the recombinant plasmid.
So replica plating can be used to identify transformed bacteria.
Marker genes and Replica plating
Bacteria are spread on ampicillin agar to get separate colonies Bacteria containing plasmids (recombinant or original reformed) will survive
Replica plate with tetracycline produced Colonies transferred using nylon/felt material
Bacteria growing on ampicillin but not tetracycline have recombinant plasmid
Identification of transformed cell using gene markers
Identification of the cell with the recombinant plasmid
Some key things to remember are this…………
Some plasmids will have re-joined without taking up the gene
we want
Some plasmids will now be recombinant
Some cells have not taken up any plasmid
Some have taken up foreign genetic material (DNA loop)
So the cells with the recombinant plasmid must be identified
using gene markers
The markers can be selective or screening markers.
Selective markers: protects the organism from a selective
agent that would normally kill it (antibiotics)
Screening marker: These markers will make the cell look or
behave (metabolically) different.
88
Why clone a gene?
A particular gene can be isolated and its nucleotide sequence
determined
Control sequences of DNA can be identified & analyzed
Protein/enzyme/RNA function can be investigated
Mutations can be identified, e.g. gene defects related to specific
diseases
Organisms can be ‘engineered’ for specific purposes, e.g. insulin
production, insect resistance, etc.
Genetic fingerprinting
Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR): (In vitro gene cloning)
The amplification of small quantities of DNA
This is basically DNA replication in a test tube
It requires some key materials
DNA polymerase: sourced form thermophilic bacteria, making it
very heat stable
Free nucleotides: that can form H-bonds with the template
strands
Primers: short sections of DNA that are complimentary to bases
at one of the ends of the DNA. They are crucial as DNA
polymerase can only add new nucleotides to an existing chain; it
also prevents the original strands from annealing (re-joining),
ensures only target sequences are copied, those that lie between
the primers
Three key stages involved
Separation of DNA at 95o
C: this is usually done by DNA helicase during in vivo replication. In this
process high temperature are used to break the H bonds between the bases.
Annealing of primers at 55o
C: the mixture is cooled to 55o
C and the primers attach to their
complementary bases. This provides the starting point for the DNA polymerase to begin copying the
DNA
Synthesis of DNA: the temperature is raised to 720
C. This is the optimum temperature for the DNA
polymerase; it begins to add free nucleotides to the primers. Heat stable DNA polymerase is used as
it can work at a higher temperature and so the reaction takes place faster
The whole cycle takes about 2 minutes meaning that a lot of DNA can be rapidly produced.
Advantages of in vitro
Small amounts of genetic material can be used and amplified
The amplification is rapid
Degraded (damaged/old DNA can be used)
Can be completed in a few hours
Disadvantages of in vitro
Any contamination is amplified
It takes time to make primers and DNA sequence must be known at least in
part
Increased frequency of copying error
Any copying errors will be copied at each subsequent cycle
DNA is not expressed
Advantages of in vitro
Small amounts of genetic material can be used and amplified
The amplification is rapid
Degraded (damaged/old DNA can be used)
Can be completed in a few hours
Disadvantages of in vitro
Any contamination is amplified
It takes time to make primers and DNA sequence must be known at least in part
Increased frequency of copying error
Any copying errors will be copied at each subsequent cycle
DNA is not expressed
Advantages of in vivo
Very little risk of contamination as it is based around the annealing of complementary sticky
ends that must be produced using restriction enzymes, unlikely any contaminating DNA will
possess these.
Accuracy of copying is greater than that of PCR
It can be used to produce active proteins rather than just the gene itself, as the bacteria will
translate the gene that has been integrated into its genome.
Disadvantages of in vivo
Slow process as the gene must be identified; removed, added to the plasmid, then the
bacteria must be transformed, identified and cultured
The success rate of transformation is very low
The success rate of recombination is very low
Large amounts of DNA needed
Needs pure intact DNA
Takes a few days to complete
Why clone a gene?
A particular gene can be isolated and its nucleotide sequence determined
Control sequences of DNA can be identified & analyzed
Protein/enzyme/RNA function can be investigated
Mutations can be identified, e.g. gene defects related to specific diseases
Organisms can be ‘engineered’ for specific purposes, e.g. insulin production, insect
resistance, etc.
89
90
Transcription (DNA  mRNA)
The start of each gene is marked by a promoter (sequence
of bases)
Section of DNA unzips (H-bonds break, DNA helicase)
Free RNA nucleotides line up to complementary bases on
the antisense strand
U replaces T in mRNA
RNA polymerase joins the nucleotides
Pre mRNA strand is formed
Pre mRNA is modified, introns removed, exons spliced by
enzymes
Mature mRNA leaves the nucleus
Compare replication and transcription
Alike
H bonds break/DNA unwinds/DNA unzips;
between (complementary) bases;
DNA acts as a template for complimentary base
complementary nucleotides/bases added/DNA acts as template;
same, correctly named, enzymes e.g. polymerase;
Different
Uracil replaces thymine
all copied in replication or only section copied in transcription
Only one strand is used as a template in transcription (antisense strand), both
strands are used in replication
RNA polymerase in transcription whereas DNA polymerase is sued in replication
mRNA is produced in transcription, DNA is produced in replication
91
Translation (protein synthesis)
mRNA moves into cytoplasm through nuclear pore to ribosome;
mRNA read in codons / triplets
anticodon of tRNA which is complimentary to the codon of mRNA matches up;
The tRNA carries specific amino acid;
ATP used in activation / joining amino acids;
amino acids join by peptide bonds;
In condensation recations
This requires energy
tRNA used repeatedly as it is released and collects another amino acid;
sequence of bases / codons determines sequence of amino acids the primary structure of the
protein
Transcription factors
Switch on the desired gene
These are activated from an inactive form
By hormones usually (oestrogen example)
Transcription factor attaches to promoter region by
gene to be transcribed
Transcription initiation complex forms
RNA polymerase can attach
Transcription (DNA  mRNA)
The start of each gene is marked by a promoter
(sequence of bases)
Section of DNA unzips (H-bonds break, DNA
helicase)
Free RNA nucleotides line up to complementary
bases on the antisense strand
U replaces T in mRNA
RNA polymerase joins the nucleotides
Pre mRNA strand is formed
Pre mRNA is modified, introns removed, exons
spliced
Mature mRNA leaves the nucleus
Translation (protein synthesis)
mRNA enters the ribosomes
Read as base triplets (codons)
tRNA with complementary anticodon
Carries specific amino acid
Peptide bonds form between adjacent amino acids
(condensation reaction)
ATP is required
92
siRNA: this is involved in post transcriptional regulation of
translation. siRNA is formed from the hydrolysis of longer pieces
of double stranded RNA. It is then split into single strands by an
endonuclease. The passenger strand is no longer required and the
guide strand is incorporated into the RNA Interference Specificity
Complex (RISC). This complex moves to a region on the mRNA
stand with a complementary base sequence and the mRNA is then
cleaved, thus preventing translation.
Mutation: change in the structure or quantity of genetic material. Occur naturally, but the frequency can be increased by mutagenic agents like:
X-rays, Benzene, Uranium, Gamma Rays, UV light, high energy radiation
The length of exposure and the size of the dose may influence whether mutations occur
DNA base sequence determines the mRNA sequence; this
determines the order of amino acids assembled at the
ribosomes. The primary structure determine how H-bonds
form between the amino acids during folding for the
secondary structure, further folding then ensues to form
the tertiary structure of the protein.
Silent mutations do not result in a change to the amino
acid sequence of a protein. They may occur in a non-
coding region (outside of a gene or within an intron), or
they may occur within an exon in a manner that does not
alter the final amino acid sequence. This happens when the
change is on the third base of a codon, due to the
degeneracy of the genetic code, most amino acids have
more than one codon, differing only in the third base. So
the genetic code is more likely to tolerate mutations in the
third base
This mutation alters the codon so that when it is
transcribed a different amino acid will be put in place. This
can have a big effect if the amino acid is crucial to the
bonding in folding of the protein or if it acts as a part of
the active site of an enzyme. However, if an amino acid
with similar properties is coded for, or the amino acid was
not involved in the folding of the chain or the functioning
of the enzyme, then it may not be a serious mutation.
With a nonsense mutation, the new nucleotide changes a codon that
specified an amino acid to one of the STOP codons (TAA, TAG,
or TGA). Therefore, translation of the messenger RNA
93
transcribed from this mutant gene will stop prematurely. The earlier in the gene that this occurs, the more truncated the protein product and the
more likely that it will be unable to function.
This is caused by addition or deletion of bases. Changes the way the codons are read (causes a frame shift) and as such changes the primary sequence of amino acids. This will affect
the folding of the protein and may result in a non-functioning protein. CFTR protein in cystic fibrosis is a result of deletion
94
95
Electrophoresis
Separates DNA (restriction fragments) due to differences in the length. Short fragments will travel further than long
fragments in a given time
It uses an aragose or polyacrylamide gel covered in a buffer solution
It works because an electric current is applied across the gel, and the nucleotides contain a negatively charged phosphate
group, so DNA moves toward the positive anode.
Visualising the DNA
Staining: using chemicals to stain the DNA blue or fluorescent
molecules so the DNA appears under UV light. These chemicals are
included in the gel and are picked up by the DNA as it diffuses through
the gel
Radiolabelling (autoradiography): DNA samples are radioactively
labelled with an isotope of phosphate (P32
). When the gel is
completed, photographic film is placed on top of the gel in the dark
for a few hours. The radiation exposes the film and the DNA shows up
as dark bands.
Restriction mapping
A restriction map is a diagram of a piece of DNA marked with the locations of sites where it is cut by restriction
enzymes.
A piece of DNA is cut with two different restriction enzymes, both on their own, and together. This gives three
different mixtures of restriction fragments, which are run on an electrophoresis gel (labelled E1, E2 and E1+E2 on the
gel below). The first lane on this gel contains a “DNA ladder” – a mixture of DNA fragments of known sizes – which is
used to calibrate the gel. By comparison with the ladder bands, the length of each restriction fragment can be
measured (marked in kilobases, kb on this diagram).
From this information alone we have to deduce the restriction map. Firstly, the fragment lengths in each lane add up
to 17, so we know the original DNA was 17kb long. There must be two recognition sites for restriction enzyme 1 (E1),
since it gave three bands, while there must be just one recognition site for restriction enzyme 2 (E2), since it gave two
bands. By a process of logic, we can construct the restriction map (on left) to account for the banding pattern.
1Kb = 1000 bases
How a genetic finger print is carried out and how it
can be used
99.9% of the DNA in humans is the same. The 0.1% ( over 100,00
base pairs) shows enough variation to distinguish individuals.
Differences occur in non-coding DNA due to mutations that can
accumulate in these regions as they do not affect function.
Makes use of regions of genetic material, called introns that contain
regions of repeating sequences
Satellites: any DNA with repetitive sequences
Tandem repeat: simple sequences of bases in DNA repeated without
break
Short tandem repeats/microsatellites: a tandem repeat with a
sequence <10bases
Minisatellite: tandem repeats with a sequence of 10-60 bases
Variable non tandem repeats/VNTRs): region of DNA with a
particular tandem repeat. Everyone has the same repeating
sequence in this region; the number of repeats varies from individual
These VNTRs are unique to an individual
These are inherited, but the combinations inherited are random, but
when compared against parent DNA there is some comparable
sequences.
The process
The DNA is extracted in a solvent of chloroform and phenol
The DNA is cut to fragments
Using restriction enzymes
Different sized fragments are separated by gel electrophoresis. Smaller fragments travel further
DNA double strands separated by alkali
DNA Transferred to nylon membrane (Southern Blotting,
described in line below) and fixed by UV light
Nylon membrane placed onto gel, towels on top of that,
weight to get good contact between membrane and gel.
Paper absorbes the alkali and draws up –ve DNA which sticks
to the +ve membrane
Radioactively/fluorescently labelled DNA probes are applied
and anneal with complementary base sequences.
96
Visualisation of the DNA is then done by, autoradiography
(when using radioactive probes) or UV light (when using
fluorescence)
97
Gene/DNA probes
Short single strands of DNA
They are radioactively/fluorescently labelled
Complimentary to at least part of the target gene
They will then hybridise with the restriction fragments
that have been separated by electrophoresis and
contain the complimentary sequences
Identification either by
Autoradiography or fluorescence
Southern Blot: used to detect a specific target
sequence in DNA. IN a gel the DNA is fragile and also it
continues to diffuse through the gel and this can blur
the bands. In a blot the DNA is fixed so the target gene
can be identified.
1. DNA is extracted and amplified by PCR
2. DNA is digested by restriction enzymes
3. Restriction fragments are separated using gel
electrophoresis
4. Gel is placed in an alkali (this separates the DNA breaking H-
bonds)
5. A nylon/nitrocellulose sheet is placed on top of the gel and
covered with paper towels and pressed down with a weight
to ensure a good contact
6. The alkali is drawn up by the towels and takes the DNA with
it. The negative DNA adheres to the positive nylon sheet
7. Nylon sheet is peeled off and treated with UV light to fix the
DNA
8. Sheet is placed in a bag of DNA probes that will anneal to
specific complimentary base sequences if present
9. The hybridised DNA must then be visualised by
autoradiography or fluorescence
Uses of southern blotting
Identify the few restriction fragments with complementary
sequences, out of the 100s of fragments produced
Identify genes in one species that are similar to those in
another for purpose of classification
Used in genetic finger prints
Screen for genetic diseases
98
tRNA vs mRNA
tRNA (carries amino acids with complementary anticodon to mRNA codon)
Clover shaped
Standard length
Has an amino acid binding site
Anticodon
tRNA has H bonds between complementary base pairs
Limited number of types (64)
mRNA (carries information from the Nucleus to the ribosome)
Linear
Variable length (depends on the length of gene)
Many different types (depends on the gene)
No H-bonding
No base pairs
DNA Vs RNA
Similarities:
Contain phosphate
Made up of nucleotides
Contains organic bases (A, C and G) (not T as it is replaced by U in RNA)
Pentose sugar
Differences
RNA single stranded
RNA has non-coding strands (introns) removed
Ribose sugar in RNA deoxyribose in DNA
U in ribose replaces the T
3 types of RNA, only one DNA
Smaller than DNA
Describe the features of a gene
Gene is a short (length) of DNA;
Gene is a sequence of bases/chain of nucleotides;
Triplet (base) code (codon)
On sense/coding strand;
Each triplet coding for amino acid;
Degenerate code, where most amino acids have more than
one codon. Of the 64 codons 1 is a start (methionine, which
is often removed) and 3 are stop codes
Non-overlapping where each base is part of one codon
Sequence of triplets/bases code for protein
Give ways in which the structure of the DNA
molecule enables it to carry out its functions.
Sugar – phosphate backbone gives strength;
Coiling gives compact shape;
Sequence of bases allows information to be
stored;
Long molecule / coiling stores large amount of
information;
Complementary base pairing enables
information to be replicated or transcribed;
Double helix protects weak hydrogen bonds /
double helix makes
molecule stable;
Many hydrogen bonds together give molecule
stability;
Prevents code being corrupted;
Hydrogen bonding allows chains to split easily
for replication / transcription
Explain how DNA replicates
Hydrogen bonds broken by DNA helicase
semi-conservative replication where both
strands used (as templates)
nucleotides line up to their
complementary base pairing , H-bond
DNA polymerase; joins the nucleotides
Describe the molecular structure of DNA
Associated with histone proteins
Double helix
Polymer of nucleotides;
composition of a nucleotide as pentose,
phosphate and base
4 bases named ATCG
sugar-phosphate ‘backbone’;
two (polynucleotide) strands running
antiparallel
specific base-pairing;
example e.g. A–T / C–G held by
hydrogen bonding;
Base sequencing (Sanger Method)
Used to determine the exact order
of bases in a gene.
Uses modified nucleotides; they
have an oxygen removed
(dideoxynucleotides) and can only
bond with one other nucleotide.
These bases act as terminators in
DNA synthesis
Four tubes are set up containing
Primers (labelled)
Normal nucleotides (A, T, C, G)
DNA polymerase
The DNA to be sequenced
Into tube 1, modified base
A is added
Into tube 2, modified base
T is added
Into tube 3, modified base
C is added
Into tube 4 modified base
G is added
As the binding of the nucleotides (normal or modified) is equally likely in all tubes chains of different lengths are created in each test-tube. But in each test tube all the
chains have the same last nucleotide. These chain fragments can be separated by gel electrophoresis. The negatively charged DNA is attracted to the positive terminal
on the gel. Shorter chains travel a further distance.
DNA to be sequenced: CTGACTTCGACAA
Primer attached TGTT (primer)
99
In tube 1 possible chains are
TTGTTGA
TTGTTGAA
TTGTTGAAGTCA
TTGTTGAAGTCAG
In tube 2 possible chains are…
TTGTCGAAGT
TTGTCGAAGTCAG
The base sequence for the gel shown on the right side of the page is as follows
(start from the bottom (shortest chain) and read up the page)
TCCTAAGTCCTCCGGATGGTACTTCTAGTTC
But this is the complementary bases for the original strand, so the actual
sequence for the desired gene is the complementary strand to this
AGGATTCAGGAGGCCTACCATGAAGATCAAG
100
101
GM Crops
Nitrogen fixing ability
Increased nutritional value
Longer shelf life (reduced softening)
Disease resistance
Pesticide resistance (produce toxin)
Herbicide resistance
Tolerance to extreme conditions
GM Bacteria
Produce antibiotics, bacteria will do this naturally but are
altered to do it faster and in greater quantities.
Produce useful hormones (insulin produced this way is more
effective than animal insulin, safer, no rejection and
preserves animal welfare
Enzymes for the food industry
GM Animals
Pharming/transgenic, to produce pharmaceuticals
Xenotransplantation, transfer organs or tissues form
animal to humans. Animals are engineered to reduce
rejection
Disease resistance
Growth hormones
Genetic engineering has made it possible to transfer genes from one
species to another. For example, a gene that gives resistance to
herbicide and another gene which gives resistance to insect attack
have been transferred into maize. Some people think that there will be
great advantages in growing maize with these genes. Others are
equally convinced that there are long-term dangers in growing crops of
this maize.
Evaluate both of these viewpoints.
Positive:
Fewer crops lost to insect damage
Fewer crops lost to diseases spread by insects;
Can spray herbicide with no loss to crop and this will reduce
competition from weeds increasing yield
Less use of insecticide required, which is better for the environment
and will not impact upon other food chains
Possibly cheaper food as farmer loss and input is not as high
Negative:
Gene transfer to non-crop species creation of “plague” weeds resistant
to the herbicide
Transfer of insecticide genes into non crop species may affect food
chains
Selects for the development of insects resistant to the pesticide
Encourage an excessive use of herbicides which may affect the
environment
New allergens created
A new variety of tomato has been produced by genetic engineering. This variety
contains a synthetic gene that blocks the action of a natural gene that would make the
fruit soften rapidly once ripe. It also contains a marker gene. The marker gene added by
the scientists makes this variety of tomato resistant to the antibiotic, kanamycin. It is
possible that this gene could be taken up by disease-producing bacteria in the human
gut. In humans, kanamycin is used to treat certain types of gut infections.
Using information from the passage, explain the advantages and disadvantages
of putting this new variety of tomato on the market.
advantages e.g.:
food stays firm for longer;
allowing shipment and reducing losses
longer shelf life;
greater profit for the producer and possibly cheaper food for the consumer
disadvantages e.g.
transfer of mutant gene to bacteria / gut bacteria might become resistant to kanamycin;
more difficult to treat gut infection;
consumer resistance to GM food;
long term effects unknown
Improving tolerance may mean growing crops in regions they normally wouldn’t grow,
may solve food shortage and malnourishment, but may affect the economy of countries
that relay on the export of these crops. The crop may become a pest affecting delicate
ecosystem.
Hormones from GM bacteria: Insulin is produced this way. Previously it was obtained from animals, but this meant animal welfare was poor, there was a risk of
passing on pathogens, risk of rejection and as it was from animals it was not as effective. Using insulin made form bacteria means that these issues are resolved and
also it can be produced in large quantities quickly and cheaply
GMO: produced in 3 ways: Alter the genes Delete/switch off a gene Add a foreign gene
102
Organism Modification
Long life
tomato
There are two well-known projects, both affecting the gene for the enzyme polygalactourinase (PG), a pectinase that softens fruits as they ripen. Tomatoes that make
less PG ripen more slowly and retain more flavour. The American “Flavr Savr”tomato used antisense technology to silence the gene, while the British Zeneca tomato
disrupted the gene. Both were successful and were on sale for a few years, but neither is produced any more.
Insect resistant
crops
Genes for various powerful protein toxins have been transferred from the bacterium Bacillus thuringiensis to crop plants including maize, rice and potatoes. These Bt
toxins are thousands of times more powerful than chemical insecticides, and since they are built-in to the crops, insecticide spraying (which is non-specific and damages
the environment) is unnecessary.
Virus resistant
crops
Gene for virus coat protein has been cloned and inserted into tobacco, potato and tomato plants. The coat protein seems to “immunise” the plants, which are much
more resistant to viral attack.
Herbicide
resistant crops
The gene for resistance to the herbicide BASTA has been transferred from Streptomyces bacteria to tomato, potato, corn, and wheat plants, making them resistant to
BASTA. Fields can safely be sprayed with this herbicide, which will kill all weeds, but not the crops. However, this means continued use of agrochemicals, so is
controversial.
Pest resistant
legumes
The gene for an enzyme that synthesises a chemical toxic to weevils has been transferred from Bacillus bacteria to The Rhizobium bacteria that live in the root nodules
of legume plants. These root nodules are now resistant to attack by weevils.
N fixing crops This is a huge project, which aims to transfer the 15-or-so genes required for nitrogen fixation from the nitrogen-fixing bacteria Rhizobium into cereals and other crop
plants. These crops would then be able to fix their own atmospheric nitrogen and would not need any fertiliser. However, the process is extremely complex, and the
project is nowhere near success.
Crop
improvement
Proteins in some crop plants, including wheat, are often deficient in essential amino acid (which is why vegetarians have to watch their diet so carefully), so the protein
genes are being altered to improve their composition for human consumption.
mastitis-resistant
cattle
The gene for the enzyme lactoferrin, which helps to resists the infection that causes the udder disease mastitis, has been introduced to Herman – the first transgenic
bull. Herman’s offspring inherit this gene, do not get mastitis and so produce more milk.
Tick resistant
sheep
The gene for the enzyme chitinase, which kills ticks by digesting their exoskeletons, has been transferred from plants to sheep. These sheep should be immune to tick
parasites, and may not need sheep dip.
Fast growing fish A number of fish species, including salmon, trout and carp, have been given a gene from another fish (the ocean pout) which activates the fish’s own growth hormone
gene so that they grow larger and more quickly. Salmon grow to 30 times their normal mass at 10 times the normal rate.
Environment
cleaning microbes
Genes for enzymes that digest many different hydrocarbons found in crude oil have been transferred to Pseudomonas bacteria so that they can clean up oil spills.
Benefits: Medicines and drugs can be produced safely in large quantities from microbes rather than from slaughtered animals. Benefit humans and can spare animal suffering as well.
Agricultural productivity can be improved while using less pesticides or fertilisers, so helping the environment. GM crops can grow on previously unsuitable soil or in unsuitable climates.
GM crops can improve the nutrition and health of millions of people by improving the nutritional quality of their staple crops.
Risks
• Genetic modification of an organism may have unforeseen genetic effects on that organism and its offspring. These genetic effects could include metabolic diseases or cancer, and would be
particularly important in vertebrate animals, which have a nervous system and so are capable of suffering. The research process may also harm animals.
• Genes transferred into GMOs could be transferred again into other organisms, by natural accidents. These natural accidents could include horizontal gene transmission in bacteria, cross-species
pollination in plants, and viral transfer. This could result in a weed being resistant to a herbicide, or a pathogenic bacterium being resistant to an antibiotic. To avoid transfer via crosspollination,
genes can now be inserted into chloroplast DNA, which is not found in pollen.
• A GMO may have an unforeseen effect on its food web, affecting other organisms. Many ecosystems are often delicately balanced, and a GMO could change that balance.
• GMOs may continue to reduce the genetic biodiversity already occurring due to selective breeding.
•. There could be unexpected and complicated social and economic consequences from using GMOs. For example if GM bananas could be grown in temperate countries, that would be disastrous
for the economies of those Caribbean countries who rely on banana exports.
• Developing GMOs is expensive, and the ownership of the technology remains with the large multi-national corporations. This means the benefits may not be available to farmers in third world
countries who need it most.
Evaluating Biotechnology: The whole point of creating GMOs is to benefit humans. Opposition is often based on ethical, moral or social grounds, such as harm to animals or the environment,
though there can also be more practical issues, such as distrust of large corporations.
103
The purpose of genetic modification is usually to benefit humans in many ways……
Increase crop yield by introducing herbicide resistance, pesticide production and disease resistance)
Improve nutritional value of crops
Develop crops that can grow in inhospitable environments
Making vaccines
Making medicine
GM Bacteria:
Modified to increase the rate of antibiotic production
Produce enzymes for use in industry
Lipases for cheese manufacture, proteases to tenderise meat/baby food) and amylases for brewing
Modified to produce hormones (insulin and growth hormones and sex hormones)
Bacteria can now produce human insulin for use in treating diabetes. This is better than using animal
insulin because…
Protects animal welfare, the insulin is more specific and thus effective, it can be produced in large
amounts, and the required amount, it is less likely to cause an immune response
GM crops
Modified in a variety of ways…
Tomatoes modified to prevent ripening allowing them to stay longer on the vine and still be
transported without damage and consequent loss of product
Herbicide resistance
Disease resistance
Pest resistant: gene added so that the plant can produce a toxin to kill the pest
GM animals
Modified in a variety of ways
Genes for resistance to diseases
Growth gene added for a rapid growth
Genes added so animals produce medically useful proteins in their milk
GM crops Benefits:
Less crop damage/loss by insects, increase yield, reduce consumer costs
Less competition from weeds as herbicide can be used, increase yield reduces
consumer costs
Pesticide production means less use of pesticide spraying, protects environment
as many pesticides are broad spectrum and affect non target species, affecting
food chains.
Improve nutrition in countries that can grow limited crops and that have limited
food
GM crops Concerns:
New allergens being produced
Selection for pesticide resistant insects leading to increased cost of developing
new pesticides in future and possible surges in some insect populations
Transfer of added genes to non-crop species, cross species pollination, producing
super weeds (resistant to herbicides) and affecting natural wildlife and food
chains
GM crops can be made infertile, but then farmers need to buy new seeds every
year, so cost goes up for consumers
Disrupt economy of some countries that relay on exporting produce that does
not grow in certain countries. If they can now grow the crop themselves this may
affect the economy.
Herbicide resistance encourages excessive use by farmers which then affects the
environment
Transfer of genes into gut micro flora and how this may affect bacteria,
increasing resistance???
GM animal’s benefits
Rapid growth means quick turn over for farmer maximising profits, cheaper food
for consumer
Initially expensive to modify animal, but with embryo cloning cheap source of
medical proteins and a large supply
GM animal’s concerns
Animal welfare neglected as animals grow rapidly they suffer with heart,
breathing and joint issues
Risks to the organism and it’s offspring such as metabolic disorders and cancer
Research harms animals initially
104
Gene therapy: the insertion of gene into the cells and tissues of individuals to treat genetic disorders.
Types of Gene Therapy
It is important to appreciate the different between somatic cell therapy and germ-line therapy.
• Somatic cell therapy means genetically altering specific body (or somatic) cells in order to treat the disease. This therapy may treat the disease in the patient, but any genetic changes will not be
passed on the offspring of the patient.
• Germ-line therapy means genetically altering those cells (sperm cells, sperm precursor cells, ova, ova precursor cells, zygotes or early embryos) that will pass their genes down the “germ-line” to
future generations. Alterations to any of these cells will affect every cell in the resulting human, and in all his or her descendants.
Treatment using gene therapy
Gene replacement: a healthy gene replaces a defective gene
Gene supplementation: copies of the healthy gene are added alongside the defective gene. The added dominant genes mask the effect of the recessive allele.
Problems of Gene Therapy
• Most gene therapy attempted so far has had only a short-lived effect. Problems with
integrating the therapeutic DNA into the host cell, and of replicating new DNA when
the host cell divides, have meant that patients have to repeat the gene therapy
treatment at intervals.
• Therapeutic DNA and modified host cells are recognised as non-self by the immune
system and so destroyed in a primary immune response. Subsequent repeated
treatments stimulate a greater secondary immune response, which can be harmful to
the patient.
• There is a chance that the therapeutic DNA is integrated in the host genome in the
middle of another gene, for example in a tumour suppressor gene.
• Viruses are the most successful vectors in gene therapy but they also present a
variety of potential problems to the patient including toxicity, immune and
inflammatory responses and recovery of pathogenicity.
•Multigene disorders are probably impossible to treat effectively using gene therapy.
Liposome aerosols may not be fine enough the reach the bronchioles
Few of the delivered genes are expressed
The uptake of the therapeutic gene is low
Cystic fibrosis: This is caused by a recessive mutant allele, where three bases, AAA are missing (a
mutation resulting from deletion). The normal gene (the cystic fibrosis trans-membrane conductance
regulator) CFTR produces a protein of some 1480 amino acids. The deletion results in the absence of a
single amino acid, but as such the protein cannot perform its function of transporting chloride ions out
of cells across the membrane. Water will normally follow as a result (osmosis) and epithelial
membranes are kept moist. In CF sufferers, the protein is either not made or does not function. The
epithelial membranes are dry and thus the mucus is sticky and thick. The symptoms include…………….
Mucus congestion in the lungs leading to risk of chest infection (cilia can’t shift the mucus)
Breathing difficulties and less gas exchange
Thick mucus in pancreatic ducts preventing enzymes form reaching the small intestine (duodenum)
and fibrosis cysts form.
Thick mucus in the sperm ducts of a male, possibly leading to infertility.
Parents can be genetically screened to see if they carry the gene.
The correct gene (the therapeutic DNA) needs to be introduced into human cells, where it can be
expressed. Some of the most common methods are:
• Liposomes. The therapeutic DNA is encased in a lipid vesicle called a liposome. The liposome
membrane then fuses with the cell membrane, delivering the therapeutic DNA into the cell.
• Viruses. Normal viral infection depends on the virus delivering its own DNA into host cells, where it
can be expressed to make new virus particles. So genetically-modified viruses can be used to deliver
human genes by the same method. The virus must first be genetically engineered to make it safe, so
that it can’t reproduce itself or make toxins.
• Stem cells. In some cases stem cells can be removed from the patient (e.g. from bone marrow),
genetically modified in vitro with the therapeutic DNA, then the stem cells injected back into the
patient. This method is safer and avoids immune rejection, but only works for some tissues.
SCID (severe combined immunodeficiency): sufferers cannot make ADA (adenosine deaminase) that
breaks down toxins in white blood cells.
105
106
Totipotent: stem cells that can differentiate into any type of cell (embryos <32 cells)
Pluripotent: stem cells that can differentiate into nearly all cells (5 day old embryo)
Multipotent: stem cells that develop into a related family of cells. Adult stem cell, these are
used to repair and replace damaged tissue

More Related Content

PPTX
Aqa a2 biology unit 4
PPTX
Insects biodiversity
PPTX
BIOLOGY FORM 4 CHAPTER 8 - DYNAMIC ECOSYSTEM PART 3
PPTX
Aqa a2 biology unit 4 complete
PPTX
Ecosystem in ecology
PDF
IB Eco system Chapter
PPTX
Organism and Its Environment
PPT
3 Organisms And Environment
Aqa a2 biology unit 4
Insects biodiversity
BIOLOGY FORM 4 CHAPTER 8 - DYNAMIC ECOSYSTEM PART 3
Aqa a2 biology unit 4 complete
Ecosystem in ecology
IB Eco system Chapter
Organism and Its Environment
3 Organisms And Environment

What's hot (18)

PPTX
Global patterns of insect diiversity, distribution and evolutionary distinctness
PPT
C ecology & conservation syllabus statements
PPT
HEE Chapter 5
PDF
DOC
Organisms and Environment - Part I
PPTX
DP Biology Option C.1 Species and Communities
PPT
Diversity & Evolution - Organisms and their environment
DOCX
BiologyExchange.co.uk Shared Resource
PPTX
Intrinsic and extrinsic factors affecting insect community
PPT
Principles of ecology
PPTX
Ecosystem-components and interactions
PPT
Lecture 1 introduction & populations
PPT
Terrestrial Ecology Notes1
PPT
Dynamic ecosystem
PPTX
Organisms and their environment
PDF
Unit 1 ecosystem
PDF
Ib ess exam notes
PDF
Unit 4 revision notes
Global patterns of insect diiversity, distribution and evolutionary distinctness
C ecology & conservation syllabus statements
HEE Chapter 5
Organisms and Environment - Part I
DP Biology Option C.1 Species and Communities
Diversity & Evolution - Organisms and their environment
BiologyExchange.co.uk Shared Resource
Intrinsic and extrinsic factors affecting insect community
Principles of ecology
Ecosystem-components and interactions
Lecture 1 introduction & populations
Terrestrial Ecology Notes1
Dynamic ecosystem
Organisms and their environment
Unit 1 ecosystem
Ib ess exam notes
Unit 4 revision notes
Ad

Similar to Summary diagrams for a2 (20)

PPTX
1.All Ecological terms & Terminology .pptx
PPTX
1.Ecologic al Terms all about the hop.pptx
PPT
Chapter 1 bio 300
PPT
Dynamic ecosystems - Population Sampling
PDF
AQA Biology Unit 4 Revision Notes
PPT
Presentation G 1
PPTX
AQA Unit 4 A2 Biology
PPT
Ecology PowerPoint
DOCX
Cape biology uni 2 -_ecosystems_population_ecology_and_practical_methods_of_e...
DOCX
Key terms
PPTX
25 ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT igcsebiologyedexcell4-140916213357-phpapp02 [A...
PPTX
2.5-Investigating-ecosystems_Resource 2.pptx
PPTX
2.5-Investigating-ecosystems_Techniques 4.pptx
PPTX
IBSL Biology: Option G
PPTX
Ecology and mans influence
PDF
Biogeography
PPTX
Igcse biology edexcel 4.1 4.17
PPT
14850851.ppt
PPTX
Ecology chpter 9 10
PPT
6626907 83-population-ecology
1.All Ecological terms & Terminology .pptx
1.Ecologic al Terms all about the hop.pptx
Chapter 1 bio 300
Dynamic ecosystems - Population Sampling
AQA Biology Unit 4 Revision Notes
Presentation G 1
AQA Unit 4 A2 Biology
Ecology PowerPoint
Cape biology uni 2 -_ecosystems_population_ecology_and_practical_methods_of_e...
Key terms
25 ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT igcsebiologyedexcell4-140916213357-phpapp02 [A...
2.5-Investigating-ecosystems_Resource 2.pptx
2.5-Investigating-ecosystems_Techniques 4.pptx
IBSL Biology: Option G
Ecology and mans influence
Biogeography
Igcse biology edexcel 4.1 4.17
14850851.ppt
Ecology chpter 9 10
6626907 83-population-ecology
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
PPTX
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
PDF
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
PDF
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
PDF
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
PDF
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
PDF
Business Ethics Teaching Materials for college
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PPTX
Week 4 Term 3 Study Techniques revisited.pptx
PDF
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
PPTX
Renaissance Architecture: A Journey from Faith to Humanism
PDF
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
PPTX
Introduction to Child Health Nursing – Unit I | Child Health Nursing I | B.Sc...
PPTX
school management -TNTEU- B.Ed., Semester II Unit 1.pptx
PDF
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
PPTX
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
PDF
Mark Klimek Lecture Notes_240423 revision books _173037.pdf
PDF
Insiders guide to clinical Medicine.pdf
PDF
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
PDF
Supply Chain Operations Speaking Notes -ICLT Program
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
STATICS OF THE RIGID BODIES Hibbelers.pdf
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
FourierSeries-QuestionsWithAnswers(Part-A).pdf
Chapter 2 Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth.pdf
Business Ethics Teaching Materials for college
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
Week 4 Term 3 Study Techniques revisited.pptx
2.FourierTransform-ShortQuestionswithAnswers.pdf
Renaissance Architecture: A Journey from Faith to Humanism
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
Introduction to Child Health Nursing – Unit I | Child Health Nursing I | B.Sc...
school management -TNTEU- B.Ed., Semester II Unit 1.pptx
Microbial disease of the cardiovascular and lymphatic systems
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
Mark Klimek Lecture Notes_240423 revision books _173037.pdf
Insiders guide to clinical Medicine.pdf
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
Supply Chain Operations Speaking Notes -ICLT Program

Summary diagrams for a2

  • 1. 1
  • 2. 2 Abiotic factors: the non-living/physical components of the environment (temperature, light, soil pH) Light intensity: affects plants only Carbon dioxide concentration: affects plant populations only Mineral ions: affects plants only Water availability: affects both plants and animals Temperature: affects both plants and animals Abundance: counting the number of organisms in the sample. Usually the abundance of each species is recorded. If we divide abundance by size of the sampling area we get the density (number/m2 ) Autotroph: an organism that can trap an inorganic carbon source using energy from light or chemicals Biomes: parts of the atmosphere that have very different environmental conditions to each other. Biosphere: the parts of the earth that support life. Then organisms of the biosphere depend on one another and the earth’s physical environment which consists of the…. Biotic Factors: A living factor that affects a population or a process (predation, competition, parasitism, disease) Carrying capacity: The highest population that can be maintained for an indefinite period of time by a particular environment Climax community: the final community in succession Community: all the populations of different species that live and interact together in the same area at the same time Competitive exclusion principle: when two species are competing for limited resources the one using the resources most effectively will eliminate the other. Two species can’t occupy same niche indefinitely when resources are limiting Consumers: an organism that obtains energy by eating other living things Decomposers: live in the soil (generally) and feed on detritus, dead, decaying organic matter. There are two groups, the detritivores and the saprobionts/saprophytes. Detritivores: organisms that feed on dead or decaying organic matter Ecosystems: an area within which the organisms interact with each other and their physical environment Detritus: dead or decaying matter Ecology: the study of interrelationships between organisms and their environment. The environment includes both abiotic and biotic factors Ecosystems: An ecosystem is a self-supporting system made up of all the interacting biotic and abiotic features in a specific area. Ecological niche: the position an organism fills in its environment, comprising its habitat, the resources it uses and the time at which it occurs there Environmental resistance: conditions that reduce the growth rate of a population Food webs: a diagram showing all the feeding relationships in a single ecosystem or community Gross primary production: the rate at which chemical energy is stored in plants Habitat: the place where an organism is found Inorganic fertiliser: a fertiliser containing inorganic ions such as, nitrate, ammonium, potassium and phosphate ions. Intraspecific competition: between members of the same species Interspecific competition: between members of different species Limiting factor: the one factor of many that affect a process, that is nearest its lowest value and hence is rate-limiting. Microhabitats: an area within a habitat that has specific conditions Net primary production: the energy that remains after the energy used in respiration has been subtracted from the gross primary production Organic fertiliser: a fertiliser containing organic substances such as, urea. Omnivores: animals that regularly feed at both primary and higher trophic level. Pioneers species: species which are first to colonise cleared or disturbed ground. Primary succession: succession that occurs on previously uninhabited ground Population: a group of organisms of the same species that live together in the same area at the same time Producers: an organism that uses solar energy in photosynthesis to produce carbohydrates Pyramid of numbers: A diagram that shows the number of organisms at each trophic level in an ecosystem/food chain at a given moment irrespective of size. Pyramid of biomass: A diagram that shows the total biomass at each trophic level in an ecosystem/food chain, at a given moment, irrespective of the numbers Pyramid of energy: A diagram that shows the energy transferred to each trophic level of an ecosystem/food chain in a period of time irrespective of the numbers and biomass. Richness: number of different species found in the sample Saprophytes/saprobionts: microorganisms (fungi and bacteria0 that feed through extracellular digestion, secreting enzymes onto organic matter and absorbing the soluble products into their body to use in respiration (releases carbon dioxide to the environment again for use in photosynthesis) or to use in assimilation building new cells (biomass) Secondary succession: succession that occurs on in a place where there was some vegetation already present and the area has been disturbed by natural disaster or by deforestation etc. Succession: the process by which a community changes over time, a directional process where organisms affect the environment making it less suitable for themselves and more suitable for the next dominating species. Food chains: A very simple diagram showing how energy flows through an ecosystem Trophic level: the position in a food chain at which an organism feeds
  • 3. 3 Random sampling: to get a representative sample of the whole area. Area is divided into a grid using measuring tapes; random numbers are generated (from tables, calculator, computer) and used as co-ordinated to place quadrats. There should be a large number of samples to be representative, allow for anomalies, and improve reliability and to allow statistical analysis. One should aim to sample 2% of the total area. Systematic sampling: used when you wish to investigate an environmental gradient (change across a habitat). Commonly this uses a transect. In the line transect the organisms touching the string are recorded. In a belt transect quadrats are placed at along the transect (it can be continuous, or interrupted, where quadrats are placed at regular intervals). Measuring Abiotic factors: usually requires digital equipment, temperature probe, pH probe, light meter. These give quick, calibrated, quantitative accurate data and can be used to record data at regular intervals or continuously across a time period Abiotic factors: water/air temperature, pH, turbidity (suspended solids), oxygen levels (air and water), mineral levels in soil and water, soil depth, texture, wind speed and direction, humidity Quadrats vary in size 10cm, 50cm, 100cm sides are common, and they may be subdivided into 25 or 100 squares. To find the best size quadrat nesting is used. Different sized quadrats are used and the number of species counted. From the species area graph the most appropriate size quadrat can be identified that is likely to catch all species but not waste effort. Quadrats are used to get quantitative data like… Density: number of individuals of each species in quadrat divided by area of quadrat Species frequency: record the number of quadrats within which the species was found e.g. 12 out of 40 had a species so, frequency was 30% % cover: useful when difficult to identify individual plants. Estimate to nearest 5%, the % area of the quadrat covered by a particular species, easier when quadrat is subdivided, this is subjective though. Abundance scale: ACFOR, Abundant, Common, Frequent, Occasional, rare. Not quantitative, but can be made semi quantitative by making each point (ACFOR) correspond to a % cover range
  • 4. 4 Sampling animals is made more difficult by the fact they move. So traps need to be used Sweep nets in long grass and crops to catch insects, standardise the sweeping time height to allow comparisons Beating trays: used to get invertebrates from trees. Tree is hit with a stick and invertebrates fall into a tray Pitfall traps: smooth sided cup buried in ground, a raised cover keeps out predators and rain. Used to catch invertebrates Longworth traps: To catch small mammals: prepared with dry bedding and food; placed randomly in the area. Animals enter and trigger the door to close, they are safe from predators Capture – Mark – Recapture: the problem with counting animals is getting a good estimate of the total number in the area; they move quickly, they cover larger area and they try to remain hidden. So the capture, release, recapture method is used 1 Capture a sample of animals using one of the trapping techniques described above. The larger the sample the better the estimate works. 2 Count all the animals in this sample (S1) and mark (using one of methods below) then so that they can be recognised later. Typical marks include: a spot of paint for invertebrates, leg-rings for birds, a shaved patch of hair for mammals, small metal disks for fish, etc. Larger animals can also be “marked” by collecting a small blood sample and making a DNA fingerprint. Ensure marking is not harmful to animals, or prevents reintegration to the population or that it will wash off, or that it makes them more susceptible to predators. 3 Release all the animals where they were caught and give them time to mix with the rest of the population (typically one day). 4 Capture a second sample of animals using the same trapping technique. 5 Count the animals in the second sample (S2), and the number of marked (i.e. recaptured) animals in the second sample (R). 6 Calculate the population estimate (N, the Lincoln-Petersen Index) using the formula: Assumptions Marking does not affect their survival Capture of marked and unmarked animals is random Marks are not lost Animals mix with population again randomly and completely There are no massive changes in population size between sampling s1 and s2 due to reproduction or migration/immigration, population thus remains stable between samples Animals are not trap happy or trap shy Limitations Animals must be captured which can harm them or alter behaviour steps taken to minimise this. Marks can be lost Marking could affect interaction with population after capture ‘Catchability’ of animals can vary with season, time of day, life stage, but assumes equal ‘catachability’. Immigration/emigration/migration/birth and death issues can be overcome by having a small delay between sampling N = population n1 = number first caught and marked n2 = number caught in second sample m = number in second sample that had markings Marking techniques: A spot of paint for invertebrates, leg-rings for birds, a shaved patch of hair for mammals, small metal disks for fish, etc. Larger animals can also be “marked” by collecting a small blood sample and making a DNA fingerprint. One new solution is to mark with an ultra-violet marking pen which can’t be seen undernormal sunlight, but can be seen under ultra-violet light.
  • 5. 5 Succession: The change in a community over time due to changing environmental (abiotic) and biotic factors conditions. This change in plant life is often quite predictable until a stable climax community is reached. Primary succession: when succession begins on an area that has not been inhabited previously (a slow process) Secondary succession: occurs on previously inhabited areas (farm land left to re-grow, forest areas devastated by fires or floods). It is faster as the soil is already in place. The key idea is that each species of plant changes its environment to make it more suitable for new species to colonise. Consequently, these initial species are often out-competed as the new species are usually more sophisticated and bigger. As the succession proceeds the habitat becomes less harsh and abiotic factors less hostile. Daily temperature fluctuations decrease due to shade, water holding capacity of the soil improves due to an increase in organic matter, nitrates in the soil increase, roots help hold soil together minimising erosion, As the plant life becomes more diverse the animal community becomes more diverse as there are more food sources, more niches, habitats. The climax community supports a complex food web. Early colonisers, pioneer species are fast growing plants, with shallow roots and wind-dispersed seeds being replaced by taller, slower growing plants with deep roots and animal dispersed seeds. The change occurs in stages called seral stages. The initial habitat is very harsh…. Extreme pH High winds Lack of minerals Lack of water Temperature fluctuations High salinity Pioneers are organisms adapted to cope with these extremes Lichen, algae and mosses The action of pioneers and successive species alters, pH, builds a simple soil, add minerals to this soil by death and decomposition, improve water holding capacity Lichen: fungus and algae mutualistic relationship. They are excellent pioneers because Fungus: can make minerals available form rock (acidic secretions) and decomposition of organic matter. They prevent desiccation of algae and anchorage to the rock Algae are photosynthetic providing sugars for the fungus. Describe and explain how succession occurs: Colonisation of area by pioneer species; these organisms changes the environment; this enables new species to colonise; Repetition of this process results in the environment becoming less hostile, biodiversity increases, providing food, habitat, nesting sites and niches, Eventually a climax community is reached (Human activities: ploughing, harvesting, animal grazing, burning, may prevent the development of the climax community and result in an artificial or Plagioclimax community)
  • 6. 6 Bare rock Pioneer community Legumes and horse tails Grasses and ferns Small trees and shrubs Climax community Barren land develops: Fire, flood, deforestation, glaciers retreating, volcanic eruption, silt and mud deposition. Hostile (abiotic factors): pH, salinity, wind speed, nutrient levels, temperature fluctuations, water availability Chemical and physical weathering allows slow soil formation Pioneers must have adaptations to tolerate harsh abiotic factors: xerophytes, fast seed germination, low nutrient requirements, able to fix nitrogen, produce lots of seeds or spores (germinate fast and can tolerate acid soils, waterlogged soils) Lichen good pioneers mosses grow on top. They trap debris and increase organic matter through death and decay of themselves and detritivores forming a simple soil. Some free living nitrogen fixing bacteria may be present in soil. Nitrogen fixing bacteria (Rhizobium) found in root nodule of these plants and can fix atmospheric nitrogen allowing these plants to grow in a simple soil with lower nutrient levels. Their activity and death increases soil depth and nutrient quality. Increase in organic matter (humus) improves water holding capacity of soil and root growth aerates the soil and secretions change soil pH. Previous species (pioneers) have improved soil depth, quality (nutrients, pH, oxygen levels) and water holding capacity. Taller plants shelter soil reduce diurnal temperature variation and desiccation Pioneers can not compete and die out. Animal diversity and nesting increases Biodiversity increases rapidly due to hunting mating and nesting sites these birds bring in seeds. More niches are available, greater variety of habitats and food sources. Biodiversity may be greatest here before the dominant species of the climax community takes over and out competes many species. Nutrient cycling, light, temperature water availability of soil changes dramatically. Leaf litter may alter the soil pH significantly Interspecific competition leads to a reduction in biodiversity. Number of species and their populations will stabilise limited by…. Nutrient availability, light, number of producers, disease killing weak member sof species, predation, intra and inter specific competition. This is the most stable community with more complex food webs and a change in one species does affect others as greatly as other food sources exist. Succession: early pioneer species change the habitat making it more suitable for those that replace them in next stage. As it progresses biodiversity increases, as nesting sites, breeding sites, habitats, food sources are more varied and stable as abiotic factors are less harsh.
  • 7. 7
  • 8. 8 So why conserve a forest ecosystem. Trees available as a sustainable resource; Maintain habitats / niches / shelter; Maintain diversity / avoid loss of species / protect endangered species. Maintain stability (of ecosystem); Maintain food chains / webs / supply of food; Reduced loss of soil / erosion; Reduced flooding; Act as carbon sink / maintainO2and C02 balance reduce greenhouse effect Reduce global warming; Source of medicines; Examples of sustainable management and reasons to preserve the indigenous species of a habitat…. 1. Protection of habitat: maintains food sources, nesting sites 2. Legal measures like e.g. quotas, hunting bans: prevents populations falling to dangerously low numbers 3. Capture/culling of non-native species: these can often replace/kill off indigenous species 4. Captive breeding: to boost numbers of populations and ensure members of species are together at most fertile time 5. Surrogacy / artificial insemination / genetic manipulation techniques; 6. There may be cultural and aesthetic reasons for conservation and a link to tourism and the economic benefits to economy. 7. Possible undiscovered benefits where some genes may provide medicinal products or characteristics for biotechnology. 8. Maintaining genetic diversity for future breeding programmes. 9. Avoid damage to food webs and it helps control local pests. 10. Ethical reasons, taking into consideration other organisms have occupied the earth longer than man and should be respected One key area of controversy is deforestation. This is essential for building material, paper, farmland, urbanisation, fuel. However, it leads to many problems 1. Soil erosion/ mud slides / flooding / leaching of minerals – trees no longer protect soil from rain / from wind / roots no longer hold soil; 2. Increased CO2 (in air) OR “greenhouse effect” – trees remove CO2 in photosynthesise, the large scale felling of trees and subsequent decay or burning releases CO2. 3. Less diversity– loss of food / loss of habitat / niches 4. Changed rainfall patterns / drought – less transpiration from trees; 5. Loss of pharmaceuticals / ‘medicines’ / timber / ‘wood’; Conservation: the concept of preservation/maintenance of biodiversity, through sustainable management of resources to maintain forests and the habitats/niches and food they supply that ultimately maintains biodiversity. Biodiveristy includes…genetic diversity (variety of alleles), species diversity (variety os species) and habitat diversity (variety of habitats) So the aims of conservationa are to: 1) maintain diversity 2) maintain organisms’ habitats Effective conservation does nto eman leaving the environment untouched, which would lead to a small range of climax communities, instead it requires active inetervaention to manage succession and maiantain a wide range of plagioclimaxes (false climax communities), some techniques for this intervaention Thinning of woodland to ensure light reaches the ground encouraging shrubs and wildflowers to grow. Hedgerows maintained in farmland, providing ecological corridors for animals to move between areas, nesting sites, food sources, habitats for insects that may be natural predators of crop pests Grazing by animals, maintains grassland but prevents growth of tress and shrubs Periodic burning to remove saplings and allow fire resistant heather to thrive Cutting back reeds that dominate and dry out fenland, pump water into the fenland to keep it waterlogged
  • 9. 9 Decay/decomposition/rotting/putrefaction: is the breakdown of detritus by organisms collectively known as decomposers. There are two groups of decomposers 1) Saprobionts (previously called saprophytes): these are microbes (bacteria and fungi) 2) Detritivores: small invertebrates that eat detritus Saprotrophs/ saprobionts Use saprobiotic nutrition, extracellular digestion They secrete digestive enzymes Absorb the soluble products Use these in aerobic respiration Release carbon dioxide Some of the bacteria have cellulose to break down plant fibres. Herbivores depend on these in their guts. Other enzymes like deaminase help with the ammonification process in N cycle. In terrestrial environments the main saprobionts are fungi. Fungi are composed of long thin hyphae that grow throughout the soil giving a large SA:VOL . In aquatic environments the main saprobionts are bacteria Detritivores: Use holozoic nutrition Ingest food, digest it in a gut, absorb soluble products and egest waste. They speed up digestion by helping the activity of saprobionts by…… Increase surface area of detritus for saprobionts Tunnelling activity: aerate soil, provides oxygen for saprobionts to respire aerobically Excrete useful minerals (urea) which saprobionts can metabolise (iii) Explain the role of bacteria in making carbon in dead plant remains available to plants. (4) decomposers/ saprotrophs; release enzymes and digest detritus/extracellular digetsion absorb products of digestion/ suitable e.g. that relates to these are respired and CO2 released; CO2 diffuses in through the stomata used by plants in photosynthesis/ enters leaves; What is the importance of decomposers to the producers? (1) Supply of inorganic molecules / e.g. CO2 / nitrate / phosphate / minerals;
  • 10. 10 Describe how the carbohydrates in the dead leaves in the beech wood would be recycled by the activity of detritivores and microorganisms and the carbon dioxide made available for plants. (7) Detritivores break leaves into small pieces / increase surface area; Deposit faeces; Increases rate of microbial action; Bacterial fungi decompose / break down leaves or organic matter; Secretion of enzymes for digestion; Absorption of sugars; Respiration by detritivores/ microorganisms; Release of carbon dioxide; Carbon dioxide used in photosynthesis; The level of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere (0.04%) remained constant for millions of years Most carbon dioxide removed in photosynthesis is balanced by respiration Some was diverted for longer periods of time in carbon sinks Fossilisation Biomass (trees and animals) Dissolved in oceans Incorporated in carbonate based rocks The balance has been skewed due to the industrial revolution and changes to meet human population increases as outlined below Combustion of fossil fuels for electricity and heating Deforestation for farm land, communication networks, housing, shops Increased acidity rain from combustion led to chemical weathering Rising global temperatures led to less carbon dioxide dissolved in the oceans Less trees means less carbon dioxide fixation in photosynthesis The levels of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere fluctuate as rates of respiration and photosynthesis vary. Daily variations: Lowest carbon dioxide in the day when photosynthesis is taking place Highest at night when only respiration is taking place in both animals and plants Seasonal variation: Lowest CO2 in summer when days are warmer (enzymes), brighter (light intensity), longer Highest CO2 in winter when days are cooler (enzymes), shorter, lower light intensity and tress lose their leaves less photosynthesis. Also increased combustion of fossil fuels to cope with cold winter The concentrations of carbon dioxide in the air at different heights above ground in a forest changes over a period of 24 hours. Use your knowledge of photosynthesis to describe these changes and explain why they occur. 1. High concentration of carbon dioxide linked with night/darkness; 2. No photosynthesis in dark/night / light required for photosynthesis/light-dependent reaction; 3. (In dark) plants (and other organisms) respire; 4. In light net uptake of carbon dioxide by plants/plants use more carbon dioxide than they produce/ rate of photosynthesis greater than rate of respiration; 5. Decrease in carbon dioxide concentration with height; 6. At ground level fewer leaves/less photosynthesising tissue/more animals/less light The carbon dioxide concentration was monitored at ground level in the centre of a small roundabout. The measurements were made on a summer day. Describe and explain how you would expect the concentration of carbon dioxide to fluctuate over the period of 24 hours. (5) 1Higher carbon dioxide concentration at night/during darkness; 2Photosynthesis only takes place during light; 3Photosynthesis removes carbon dioxide and respiration adds carbon dioxide; 4Respiration taking place throughout 24 hours; 5Quantitative consideration such as that in plants overall photosynthetic rate greater than respiration rate; 6Human effect such as additional carbon dioxide from heavy daytime traffic/street lighting could prolong photosynthesis; Carbon source: ecosystem releasing more CO2 than it accumulates as biomass. Carbon neutral ecosystems fix and release equal amounts of carbon over time Carbon sink is an ecosystem accumulating more carbon biomass than it releases, occurs when decay is prevented, peat bogs too acidic, ocean is cold and anaerobic, growing forests as trees grow and live long lives.
  • 11. 11 High frequency/shortwave solar radiation pass easily through the earth’s atmosphere Some solar radiation is reflected by clouds Greenhouse gases: CO2 (69.6%), CH4 (12.4%), N2 O (15.8%) Earth surface absorbs the solar radiation and heats up emitting long wave/low frequency infrared radiation Infrared radiation does not pass easily through the greenhouse gases and is absorbed and re-emitted. This was how earth stayed at ambient temperature Crops Higher/lower rainfall or higher/lower temperature may result in failing crops/plant life causing a change in the distribution of plant life and hence animals dependent on them. There may be changes in the type of crop that can be grown, no longer possible, now possible. Higher night temperature will affect the ability of some crops to set fruit or seed giving lower yields and less seeds for next planting. Warmer/shorter winters and warmer longer summers may allow pests to survive longer or appear in greater numbers than before, causing extensive crop damage, thus increase expenditure on pesticides. Melting polar ice caps cause loss of fertile low lying land (Nile delta). May lead to destruction of forests to provide farm land and as consequence this only adds to the issues. Rising sea levels due to melting of ice shelves and glaciers and thermal expansion of the ocean means salt water is extending further up rivers making soil salinity increase affect water availability for crops and irrigation difficult. Selects for xerophytes and changes biodiversity of the animals feeding. Animal Migratory birds are not travelling as far south as they would normally and are migrating north earlier. This means that food sources may mot be ready yet, plants with day length dependent flowering are not yet in bloom and as a consequence seeds, fruit and insects may not yet be abundant. As air temperature rises the Alpine snow line is rising. Animals that live on or above the snow line are forced to move with it and are forced in to smaller areas. This increases competition. Those that can not move up (higher altitudes less oxygen) also face extinction. Disruption of niches available within a community. Each organism is adapted to a particular niche and, as these change so does the species distribution. A niche is the place or function of an organism in an ecosystem. Organisms compete for a niche. If there is a niche for a flying organism that can feed on nectar, and carry pollen this can be filled by a bird, insect or mammal. Global warming forces migration and thus they compete for the niche and may displace indigenous species. Loss of glaciers and ice melting earlier affects hunting of Arctic animals; they must take longer riskier swims. Water As ocean temperatures increase less carbon dioxide can dissolve in them so this furthers the problem Increased evaporation leads to increased cloud cover, more solar energy reflected and the temperature could decrease. Others Ice albedo effect reduced. (albedo is a measure of how strongly an object reflects light). Ice reflects almost all the suns energy that hits it (important in maintaining global climate). As polar ice melts more energy is absorbed by the earth. Positive feedback loop. Increased extreme weather events Alteration to the timing of seasons Advantages Growing in regions that had previously been too dry of cold Growing seasons are prolonged so greater yields Higher carbon dioxide and temperature faster photosynthesis (limiting factors) Causes of greenhouse effect: combustion of fossil fuel, deforestation (reducing photosynthesis, decay/burning of trees releases carbon dioxide), agriculture (methanogenic bacteria in rice fields and ruminant intetsines) has led to mass increase in cattle rearing and rice fields to meet food demands, landfill sites have these bacteria too.
  • 12. 12
  • 13. 13 Dead/waste (urine) organic matter Ammonia NH3 Ammonium Compounds NH4 + Nitrites NO2 - Nitrates NO3 - Ammonification by Decomposers: saprobionts with extracellular digestion secreting proteases to form amino acids and then deaminase enzymes (removes amino group) ultimately leading to ammonium ions Water Nitrosomonas Nitrobacter Nitrogen Fixation: reduction of atmospheric nitrogen by free living soil bacteria (azobacter/clostridium) to ammonium ions, this is then passed through nitrification. Symbiotic organisms (Rhizobium) found in leguminous plants using an enzyme system Nitrogenase. This provides the plant directly with ammonium compounds, so nitrification does not follow, plant can assimilate ammonium compounds more easily than nitrates, but cannot absorb them in the soil, hence need for nitrate formation Bacteria get carbohydrates from the plant Bacteria that fix nitrogen are called Diazotrophs N2 + 6H  2NH3 (requires nitrogenase enzyme and 15 ATP molecules) Active uptake and assimilation Denitrification: occurs where there is a lack of oxygen in the soil leading to more anaerobic denitrifying bacteria, pseudomonas and thiobacillus Nitrification: Oxidation of ammonium compounds by these two different strains of nitrifying bacteria. These bacteria are chemoautotrophs: they gain their energy by the chemical oxidation (chemo) of ammonium compounds and use carbon dioxide to synthesise organic compounds. Autotroph means they do not depend on preformed organic material. This oxidation reaction is exothermic, releasing energy which bacteria use to make ATP instead of respiration. Mineralised nitrogen: Nitrogen as inorganic ions/nitrate/ammonia / nitrite Excretory nitrogen: Nitrogen in waste products of metabolism/urea/uric acid /ammonia Organic compounds containing nitrogen: Protein/amino acid/nucleic acid/ATP / urea;
  • 14. 14 Substances found in fallen leaves contain the elements carbon and nitrogen. Explain how the activities of decomposers and nitrifying bacteria recycle the substances in fallen leaves for re- use by the trees. (7) A question asking about making carbon available and N available again for the trees, so answer both parts…. Carbon available because…… (Decomposers/saprobionts): Secrete enzymes (extracellular digestion) These enzymes hydrolyse organic matter; the soluble products are absorbed by named process e.g. diffusion/active transport; these products are used in respiration Releases carbon dioxide; Carbon dioxide used in photosynthesis; N available again because saprobionts release ammonia from organic material; Through action of proteases and deaminase enzymes (Nitrifying bacteria):convert Ammonia nitrate; Via nitrite An oxidation reaction Nitrates absorbed and used in synthesis of amino acids/protein/nucleic acids/other correct organic –N; Sources of ammonium compounds: 1) Decomposers (mainly saprobionts) convert (nitrogen in organic compounds) into ammonia/ammonium; 2) Nitrogen fixing bacteria: Convert nitrogen (gas) into ammonium; adding usable nitrogen to an ecosystem. This is a reduction process. This can be done by free living soil bacteria, the ammonium compounds must undergo nitrification then as plants cannot absorb the ammonium but can absorb nitrates. In N fixing bacteria associated with root nodules the plant uses the ammonium compounds directly. Nitrification: (Ammonium)  nitrite; then Nitrite  nitrate; by nitrifying bacteria (Nitrosomonas / Nitrobacter respectively) this is an oxidation reaction
  • 15. 15 The law of diminishing returns: the increased application of fertiliser does not increase yield and so becomes uneconomic Eutrophication: the main cause is leaching of fertiliser from farms and sewage form houses and factories. Nitrate and phosphate concentration are the biggest limiting factors to grow of aquatic plants. Algae grow fastest, and this results in the algal bloom. Farming practices disrupt natural mineral cycles. Minerals taken from the soil by plants directly and animals indirectly are not returned. So the soil depletes of minerals. Plant growth is limited by mineral levels, particularly, NPK. So the problem can be tackled by… N fixing crops: crop rotation that includes leguminous crops one year of 4. The clover is then ploughed back into the soil. Clover will add humus to soil, nitrates (needed for protein synthesis), it is cheap, releases it minerals slowly causing less run-off and pollution. Inorganic fertilisers: soluble artificial fertilisers containing NPK. Organic fertilisers: natural fertilisers, animal manure, composted veg, sewage sludge. The also contain NPK, but in organic matter, urea, proteins, lipids and organic acids. These minerals must be released by decomposition. A combination of both the types of fertiliser maximises productivity. Considerations needed as beyond a certain point addition of fertilisers will have no further increase on growth so is an unnecessary expense. A Balance between increase in yield and profit against cost of buying and applying fertiliser. Fertilisers often contain Nitrogen/ Phosphates/ Potassium: 1) N = protein synthesis 2) Phosphates = help production of DNA, RNA, NADP and ATP 3) Potassium = Proteins synthesis, chlorophyll production (magnesium important here too) Explaining eutrophication Increased phosphate/nitrates causes algal bloom; algae (cover surface and) block out light; Plants (under surface) unable to photosynthesise; They die, and algae die (due to minerals now depleting) Algae are too numerous to be eaten by their consumers they accumulate Sudden increase in detritus (plant & alage) Increase in (aerobic) bacteria (decomposers); Bacteria use up oxygen in water; (high BOD) In respiration; Other aerobic organisms die, Anaerobes thrive releasing H2 S, CH4 , NH4
  • 16. 16 Agricultural ecosystem Agricultural ecosystems are comprised largely of domesticated animals and plants used to produce food for man. There are considerable energy losses at each trophic level of a food chain. Humans are often third or even fourth in the chain. This means the energy we receive from our food is only a small proportion of the total energy available from the sun. Agriculture tries to ensure as much of this energy as possible is transferred to humans (effectively it channels energy away from other food chains and into the human food chain) this increase the productivity of the human food chain. Productivity Productivity is the rate at which something is produced. Plants are producers as they produce chemical energy from light energy in photosynthesis. The rate at which the plants assimilate this chemical energy is called gross productivity (measured for a given year and expressed as KJm-2 year-1 . Some of this chemical energy is used by the plant in respiration, so the remaining chemical energy is the net productivity and this is available to the next organism in the food chain (not all of this energy passes to the organism due to, indigestible and inedible parts) Net productivity = gross productivity – respiratory losses Net productivity is affected by two main factors 1) The efficiency of the crop carrying out photosynthesis, maximised by reducing the effects of limiting factors, carbon dioxide, light, temperature, water, minerals. 2) Area of the ground covered by leaves (photosynthetic organs) The two major differences in this system are 1) Energy input: naturally the sun is the only source of energy input. The additional energy input in the agricultural ecosystem is required for preventing the development of the climax community and also maximising the growth, Energy is required in ploughing, sowing crops, removing weeds, suppressing pests and disease, housing and feeding animals and transport etc. 2) Productivity: Natural ecosystems have a low productivity. The additional energy input to agricultural systems is used to reduce the impact of limiting factors. Energy used to exclude other species reduces competition and the ground is almost completely covered by the crop. The application of fertilisers and pesticides and disease prevention help increase productivity.
  • 17. 17 Explain how farming practices increase the productivity of agricultural crops. 1. use of Fertilisers contain minerals NPK (added to soil); 2. Nitrate for proteins and phosphate/phosphorus for ATP/DNA; 3. Pesticides/biological control prevents damage/consumption of crop; 4. Weed killers/herbicides remove competition; 5. Selective breeding / genetic modification (of crops); 6. Glass/greenhouses enhance temp/CO2/ light limiting factors 7. Ploughing aerates soil to improves drainage; 8. Ploughing aeration of soil allows nitrification/decreases denitrification; 9. Benefit of crop rotation in terms of soil nutrients/fertility/pest reduction; 10. Irrigation/watering to remove limiting factor; 11. Protection of crops from birds/pests/frost by covers/netting etc.; Describe and explain the effects of monoculture on the environment. Removal off hedgerows; since small fields impracticable for large machines; so soil more exposed to wind; resultant increase in soil erosion (once); so reduction in diversity; since smaller variety of niches/habitats; since smaller variety of producers/plants also, deeper rooted plants removed; resultant increased soil erosion (once); increased risk of large-scale crop failure/increased disease/increased number of pest; since large numbers of same crop species grown close to each other; increased use of fertilisers result in eutrophication/damage to soil structure; reduction of gene pool increases susceptibility to disease Pests spread more rapidly Productivity: the amount of biomass produced by that ecosystem in a year measured either as Biomass: Kgm-2 y-1 Energy: MJm-2 y-1 Gross Primary Productivity (GPP) = amount of energy fixed by producers in photosynthesis and stored as chemical energy in glucose Gross Secondary Productivity (GSP) = amount of energy absorbed by secondary consumers But energy losses as heat from respiration, indigestible parts of food, uneaten parts of food etc. means not all energy is available to the next level in the food chain, so…… Net Primary productivity (NPP) and Net Secondary Productivity (NSP) is the amount of energy accumulated in producer or consumer biomass and available to the next trophic level Net productivity = Gross Productivity – losses due to respiration and heat. NPP gives us an indication of how good the ecosystem is at fixing solar energy Productivity is of interest to farmers who wish to maximise the NPP (arable farms) NSP (pastoral farms). So intensive methods are employed to improve productivity, such as….. Genetic engineering Selective breeding Fertilisers Pest control Factory farming herbicides Large fields Monoculture Mechanisation Some increase gross productivity (fertilisers) while some decrease respiratory loses (factory farming) The cost of sheds, heating, machinery, producing fertilisers demand energy and are costly, so the gains must outweigh the cost Factory farming/intensive rearing of livestock: increasing NSP Animals are kept indoors for part or all of the year, usually at very high density. The barn is kept warm by the collective body heat of so many animals in close proximity, and in very cold conditions buildings can be heated (though this costs the farmer). Less energy is lost as respiratory heat, so increasing NPP. In addition, animals can’t move much, so they don’t expend energy in muscle contraction. More of the food they eat is converted to useful biomass rather than being lost in respiration. Animals are given specialised, high-energy food, high nutritive value so animals grow quickly and can be sold sooner. The food is low in plant fibres (cellulose), so it is easy to digest and less energy is wasted in egested faeces. The food also contains mineral and vitamin supplements that the animals would normally obtain from fresh food and exposure to sunlight. The dense packing of animals makes it easy for pathogens to spread from host to host so animals are given antibiotics to mitigate the effect of infectious disease. Antibiotics also increase growth rate by killing intestinal bacteria. Animals are selectively bred to be fast-growing (see unit 2), and they are slaughtered before growth stops in adulthood, so more energy is transferred to biomass thus, the farmer doesn’t waste any food, and earns profit early. These methods are costly. Intensive farming depends on high levels of inputs to achieve high productivity. But the gains in productivity should exceed the. Factory farms produce large amounts of animal waste, which often pollute surrounding water ways. Factory farming also raises many ethical questions about the welfare of the animals.
  • 18. 18 Explain how the use of pesticides can result in resistant strains of insect pests. 1. Variation/variety in pest population; 2. Due to mutation; 3. Allele for resistance; 4. Reference to selection; 5. Pests with resistance (survive and) breed / differential reproductive success; 6. Increase in frequency of allele; The same idea could lead to herbicide resistant weeds Pests are any organisms that damages farmers crops Pests: they reduce the yield in a variety of ways They include: weeds, fungi, animals Weeds: compete for, light, minerals, water carbon dioxide. They are usually fast growing compared to the crops establishing roots and shoots quickly and out- competing the crop. Insects reduce yields by….. Feeding on the organ of the plant that forms the crop Feeding on the leaves and reducing surface area for photosynthesis Feed on the roots and affect mineral uptake Feed on sugars in the phloem Spread disease Control can be cultural, chemical or biological. Modern practices try to combine all three in integrated pest management Pesticides: These include herbicides, insecticides, fungicides and bactericides. Characteristics of pesticide: selective toxicity, kill specific target, thus they need to be narrow spectrum (more expensive). Broad spectrum pesticides may kill pollinating insects and useful predators of the pest. Biodegradable: broken down by decomposers. Persistent pesticides may accumulate in the food chain (bioaccumulation). Particularly if fat soluble, not excreted form the body like water soluble chemicals. Chemically stable to have shelf life. Insecticides: can be contact, remaining on the surface of the crop and only killing insects that come in contact with it. Systemic insecticides are absorbed and transported through the crop and kill any insects that feed on the crop Easy to apply, and applied in a way to minimise damage to surrounding environment Cultural control Practices that reduce pest problems without using chemicals or biological agents. Provide suitable habitats close to crop for natural predators of the pest Weeding: removal of weeds and diseased crops Crop rotation: breaks the life cycle of host specific pests Intercropping: planting two crops in the same field rye grass and wheat encourages ladybirds to feed on aphids on wheat. Tilling: ploughing to turn soil burying weeds and expose insects to predatory birds Insect barriers: sticky bands on fruit trees to catch crawling insects Beetle banks: strips of uncultivated land around and within fields. This allows invertebrates to thrive that may predate a pest. Regularly monitor the crops for early signs of pest problems Principles of Biological control: controlling pests using other living organisms (predators, pathogen or parasites). Examples: The scale insect destroyed citrus trees, controlled by the ladybird beetle, ladybirds controlling aphids on wheat The control organism can be a predator/parasite or pathogen Specific to the pest The population of the control organism varies with that of the pest, both should eventually become low The control reduces the size of the pest population below the economic threshold, to a point where it no longer causes significant economic loss However, it does not eradicate (kill all) the pest The control species must be carefully selected/screened to……. Target only the pest species To ensure it too does not become a pest Survive in its new habitat to establish and maintain its population Can reproduce It is active during the growing season and when pest is a problem Ensure it does not carry disease Ensure that a new pest will not take over that niche Trials should be carried out in quarantine before being brought to farm Herbicides Weeds are plants growing where they are not wanted; they compete for resources and can harbour pests and disease that affect the crop. Crop seeds are treated with fungicides before sowing Advantages of biological control If well screened it will only target pest Self-perpetuating population (one application needed) No chemical residue left on the crop Pest won’t become resistant to control agent Cheaper (saves cost of repeated chemical use) Continuous control Disadvantages of biological control Doesn’t eradicate the pests Expense or setting up due to research May becomes a pest itself if no natural predators (must be well screened) Slow acting compared to chemicals Subject to environmental factors Possible effects on non-target species Can’t be used in stored grain or dead bodies will accumulate in produce Another Sterile males of the pest could be introduced to reduce success of reproduction Pheromones could be used attracting the pest to devices that destroy them
  • 19. 19 Integrated Pest Management (IPM) Brings together all forms of pest management, aim to reduce effect of pesticides on the environment without compromising the maximisation of crop yields. There are 4 stages Identify pests and population density at which they cause economic harm (economic threshold) only act when population exceeds threshold Use suitable cultural methods to avoid population reaching threshold If population exceeds threshold use biological control to reduce it If biological control fails to reduce population use chemical control at low and controlled levels and at times of year to minimise impact on the environment Evaluate the effectiveness of each stage before proceeding to next Benefits If one method fails others are still partially effective Reduced amount of pesticide needed Increase yield Reduced chances of resistant species developing Less impact on food webs Fewer chemicals used Long term effect rather than the initial improvement seen by chemical methods alone, but loss in effectiveness over time and the need to reapply chemicals Biological control Farming aims to maximise yield and minimise expenditure and impact on environment. Essential to meet the growing needs of the human population. It uses many practices Selective breeding (pg27): for fast growing animals, high yielding crops, reduce allele frequency, genetic diversity Factory farming (pg52): restricted movement and warm holding sheds (more biomass less energy waste), specialised diets high in protein and fat and carbohydrates, low in cellulose so high digestibility. Antibiotics in food, reduce spread of disease, kills gut bacteria increasing growth rate. Monoculture (pg52): growing one crop that grows most effectively in the area. Reduce labour, more than one crop per year, but demands a lot of fertiliser. Requires, hedgerow removal to make more space for growing and to operate machinery. This reduces diversity due to loss of habitat and food sources, possibly lead to increased pest issues as predators of pest may have lived in hedgerows Pesticides (pg53): weeds and animal pests are controlled using chemicals, but these may affect the environment. Resistance may develop. Look to use IPM, takes the best of cultural, biological and chemical control to maximise yield minimise environmental damage Genetic engineering: inserting genes into crops making them herbicide resistance (this may encourage excess use of herbicides), genes into crops to make toxins to insects, may mutate and harm humans, may lead to resistant insects developing. Transfer of gene to non-crop species producing resistant weeds or disrupting food chains Fertilisers (pg51): organic, inorganic or a combination. Good and bad points discussed on page 51. Steps to selecting the Biological agent The search for agent in pests country of origin, in areas with a similar climate to the planned area of release: more likely to find suitable control agent, and it will be more likely to survive. Study the effect of the parasite on other organisms in the lab: see how it affects native species, as it may compete for food/habitat or prey on them. Release of large numbers of agent: Increase the chances of successful introduction to increase chances of reducing pest numbers below economic threshold The stable coexistence of pest and parasite at: means one application should be enough, means pest population should stay below threshold, if pest dies out so will agent, reapplication would be needed
  • 20. 20 Biomass is measured in Kg/m2 or g/m2 of in marine ecosystems Kg/m3 The dry biomass is measured as water content varies and water contains no energy. But this requires killing the organisms, thus only a sample is used and this may not be representative of the population. Sample is randomly selected, dried in oven at 800 C evaporates water, does not burn organic matter until the mass is constant. Weigh a few individuals and get an average, then multiply the number of them by this value. Only measures the number organisms present at that time, so seasonal variation is not accounted for and this means that inverted pyramids may exist in marine ecosystems, when the mass of phytoplankton is less than that of zooplankton feeding on it. Across the year the mass of phytoplankton must be greater than the mass of the zooplankton Inverted pyramids are possible when the producer’s reproduction rate is faster than the rate of consumption (quickly eaten and so don’t reach a high biomass, but reproduce quickly to sustain the consumer) and has a short life unlike the consumers. If we compared the biomass of the phytoplankton against the increase in biomass of the zooplankton, the biomass of the phytoplankton would be greater Limitations of pyramids of biomass Does not show biomass can vary at each trophic level over time Variability in abiotic factors in an area may make comparisons between ecosystems difficult Samples required and must be large enough and random to represent the population Biomass may not be equivalent to energy, as 1g of fat has twice the energy as 1g of carbohydrate. Seasonal variations may not be accounted for Food Chains/webs: illustrate the relationship between members of a community in an ecosystem. Eacvh stage int eh food chain is called a trophic level, the arrows represent the flow of energy and matter. Food chains start with producers (plants, algae, plankton and photosynthetic bacteria) Pyramids of numbers: shows the number of organisms at each trophic level. The width of the bars can represent numbers using a linear or logarithmic scale. Usually numbers decrease as we move up the chain and the size of the organisms increase But…........... There is no account of the size of the organisms: 1 large tree is treated the same as tiny aphids. The numbers of 1 species may be too large to represent on the same scale as another species The transfer of matter and energy in an ecosystem can be displayed using ecological pyramids. There are three kinds. Pyramids of energy: represent the flow of energy into each trophi c level over a period of time. The units are usually KJm-2 yr-1 . They are never inverted. Allows comparison of productivity in an area No inverted pyramids
  • 21. 21 Energy enters the food chain in the form of light energy. The light can either be absorbed, reflected of transmitted. Only that which is absorbed by the chlorophyll can be converted into chemical energy (glucose and its derivatives). As little as 1% of the solar energy reaching the earth is fixed into biomass of the producer Very little light energy is used by the plant because….. Wrong wavelength Misses chloroplasts and is transmitted Reflected Energy losses due to inefficiency of photosynthesis Some is used to evaporate water Other factors can limit the effectiveness of photosynthesis (temp/CO2) Only a small percentage of the light energy absorbed by the chlorophyll is stored as biomass because………… Energy is lost as heat in respiration and other metabolic processes Photosynthesis is inefficient (energy lost as electrons are passed on) CO2 and Temperature are limiting factors The total quantity of energy that plants in a community convert into organic matter is called the gross production. Plants use 20-25% of this energy in respiration leaving little to be stored. So, the stored energy is called the net production Net production = gross production – respiratory losses
  • 22. 22 Consumers take in concentrated chemical energy in the form of organic molecules that constitutes the biomass of producers or consumers they eat. A lot of biomass is not absorbed by the consumer (bones, hair, cellulose, teeth, roots of plants etc.) and the energy in this biomass is passed onto the decomposers. Much of the energy that is absorbed is lost as heat in various metabolic reactions, particularly respiration and friction in movement. The heat losses are bigger in warm blooded animals and very active animals. Not all the chemical energy in the biomass of the organisms being consumed is passed to the next trophic level because….. Not all of the organisms are eaten by those at the next stage Not the entire organism is eaten (roots, woody material, teeth, bones, claws etc) Energy is lost in excretory products (urine) Not all of the food is digested: plant material is much more difficult to digest than meat, due to the cellulose and lignin, consequently the efficiency of the energy transfer from producer to primary consumer is 10% whereas from primary consumer to secondary consumer it may be as high as 15-20%. Energy lost in respiration (heat and movement): this uses biological molecules as a fuel source to release energy and produce ATP. The process releases some energy as heat which escapes to the surroundings. The ATP is used in many processes, active transport, anabolic processes, cell division, muscle contraction, when use energy is eventually lost as heat. Energy lost in maintaining body temperature: this is higher in mammals and birds (homeothemrs, warm blooded, endotherms) than cold blooded animals, it is higher again in smaller organisms as they have a larger surface area to volume ratio. Consequently food chains are rarely more than 4 trophic levels because…… Energy losses occur at each stage, as excreted products, egested indigestible parts, parts that are uneaten, heat from respiration and movement. There is not enough energy left to sustain a large enough breeding population at a higher trophic level. It may be possible to find 6 and 7 trophic levels; this may be a result of…. Aquatic food chains, where the organisms are cold blooded and so energy losses at each stage are slightly lower with regards maintaining body temp Animals may feed at lower trophic levels in different food chains There is a very large density of producers (larger producer biomass) and so the collective % of light energy absorbed may be greater thus allowing more trophic levels C = P + R + U + F The energy used in the production of new tissue. P = C – R – U - F
  • 23. 23 Energy losses……. Sun  producer: energy lost that is reflected, the wrong wavelength, does not fall on chlorophyll, factors like temperature and carbon dioxide limit the rate of photosynthesis Trophic level  trophic level Parts of the organism are not eaten (roots, bones, teeth, fur), Parts of the organism are indigestible (particularly plant material cellulose, lignin) energy lost in faeces Some energy is lost in excretory materials (urine) Energy is used in respiration to drive, active transport, synthesis, cell division, muscle contraction and none of these processes are 100% efficient, so all respiratory energy is eventually lost as heat. Energy transfer from producer to primary consumer is about 5-10% of the net primary productivity. This is lower than primary consumer to secondary consumer (10-20%) because…. Much plant material is indigestible lignin and cellulose) A lot of the plant biomass may not be consumed by an individual herbivore Animal material is more digestible and has a higher energy value. Carnivores may be highly specialised for feeding on their prey. But still much less than 100% efficient because….. Animal tissue is not eaten or digested (bones, teeth fur) The energy is the waste (faeces and urine) and uneaten parts and dead organisms is absorbed by decomposers, used in the growth of these organisms and in respiration and the energy is eventually lost as heat In some cases it may become fossilised and the energy is released in combustion The efficiency of energy transfer differs at different stages as the energy is transferred through the ecosystem….. Some light energy is reflected, the wrong wavelength of does not fall on chlorophyll. Photosynthesis has a low efficiency (2%), there are losses in excretion and uneaten biomass, energy loss as heat, there is a lower efficiency of energy transfer between producer and herbivore than primary consumer and secondary consumer, meat is more digestible, they efficiency of transfer is lower in warm blooded animals and older animals that are no longer growing
  • 24. 24 Productivity: the amount of biomass produced by that ecosystem in a year measured either as Biomass: Kgm-2 y-1 or Energy: KJm-2 y-1 Gross Primary Productivity (GPP) = amount of energy fixed by producers in photosynthesis and stored as chemical energy in glucose Gross Secondary Productivity (GSP) = amount of energy absorbed by secondary consumers But energy losses as heat from respiration, indigestible parts of food, uneaten parts of food etc. means not all energy is available to the next level in the food chain, so…… Net Primary productivity (NPP) and Net Secondary Productivity (NSP) is the amount of energy accumulated in producer or consumer biomass and available to the next trophic level Net productivity = Gross Productivity – losses due to respiration and heat. Only a small percentage of light energy is converted into chemical energy (GPP). It is low because… Some light is the wrong wavelength Some light is reflected Some light does not fall on the chlorophyll Inefficiency of photosynthesis CO2, temperature, nutrients can be limiting factors Of the GPP only a small percentage is available for transfer along the food chain (NPP) due to energy lost as heat in respiration Agricultural systems aim to increase GPP… Irrigation Fertilisers (add minerals NPK to soil) Pest control: cultural, biological, chemical or integrated Herbicides (reduce competition) Selective breeding for high yielding crops/ GM crops Monoculutre: growing one crop, the best crop for area year on year (environmental consequences to consider) Glass/greenhouses enhance temp/CO2/ light limiting factors Ploughing aerates soil to improve drainage and aeration of soil allows nitrification/decreases denitrification; Protection of crops from birds/pests/frost by covers/netting Energy losses occur at each stage of the food chain Producer  consumer  consumer………. because………. Energy lost in parts of the organism not consumed (roots, bones, fur, teeth) Energy lost in parts of the organism not digested (particularly cellulose/lignin) Energy is lost in excretory products like urine Energy lost as heat form respiration Active and warm blooded animals these losses are greater, small mammals the losses can be greater due to the large surface area to volume ratio and extent of heat loss Agricultural practices, intensive rearing of animals (factory farming), looks to minimise these losses and increase NSP…….. Slaughtered when still growing so more energy transferred to biomass Fed on controlled diet so higher proportion of (digested) food absorbed (high protein low plant diet) Movement restricted so less energy used Kept inside heated shed so less heat loss Genetically selected for high productivity/rapid growth In most communities the biomass at each trophic level is less than that above because………not all the organisms are eaten by those Loss of energy at each stage in the food chain by respiration and/or movement and/or excretion, uneaten material Less energy to be passed on Explain why a food chain rarely contains more than four trophic levels. Energy losses (at each trophic level) In……. excretion / egestion / movement /respiration /as heat So (too) little left to sustain a large enough breeding population at higher trophic levels Food chains can be 6-7 trophic levels when…. It’s an aquatic food chain, cold blooded animals Animals are feeding at a number of trophic levels There is a large density of producers, so GPP and hence NPP increases
  • 25. 25 Eutrophication: Nitrates and Phosphates leached from farm land Algal Bloom blocks light penetrating the water Death of aquatic plants below surface death of algae as nutrients deplete Increase in the numbers of saprobionts Respiration of decomposers uses up oxygen in water Aerobic organisms die Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD): a high BOD indicates a high level of organic matter in waterways. The more bacteria, the more O2 they will use and so a high BOD results Fertilisers: used to replace minerals in the soil. IN agricultural practices nutrient cycles are disrupted, minerals are removed from the soil, but not replaced by decay. Two types: organic and Inorganic Combination of both is most effective, using the slow release of organic minerals in early stages and applying faster acting more readily available organic minerals at key stages in growth Law of diminishing returns: the increased application of fertiliser does not increase yield and so is uneconomic. Nitrogen needed for: Protein/amino acid/nucleic acid/ATP / urea; Potassium needed for: Protein synthesis, chlorophyll production Phosphates needed for: production of DNA, RNA, NADP and ATP Nitrogen cycle: Ammonification: release of inorganic nitrogen form organic nitrogen (proteins/amino acids). Saprobiotic organisms; secrete enzymes which hydrolyse organic compounds; releasing ammonia; Nitrification: oxidation of ammonium ions into nitrite and then nitrate by nitrifying bacteria Nitrogen fixing: reduction of nitrogen to ammonia by nitrogen fixing bacteria in soil (nitrification follows) or in mutualistic relationship with plants (legumes) (plants use ammonia directly) Denitrification: Conversion of nitrate to nitrogen; bacteria use nitrate for respiration; occurs in waterlogged (anaerobic conditions), by denitrifying bacteria Nitrates are absorbed by the plant roots used in amino acid/protein synthesis. Farmers growing legumes because: Clover contain N fixing bacteria; when clover decays it adds nitrogen compounds to soil; less fertiliser needed; Carbon Cycle How organic carbon is made available as CO2 by detritivores and saprobionts: Detritivores break leaves into small pieces increase surface area; increase rate of microbial activity. Add useful products of excretion (increase nitrogen); tunnelling aerates soil increases oxygen. Saprobionts decompose organic matter; Secreting enzymes for digestion (extracellular digestion); Absorption of products (sugars); Respiration by detritivores and saprobionts; Release of carbon dioxide; Carbon dioxide used in photosynthesis; Differences in how detritivores and saprobionts obtain nutrients: Decomposers secrete enzymes onto organic matter extracellular breakdown; Detritivores ingest organic matter and digest it in a gut
  • 26. 26 Why??????? Higher productivity in agriculture: Remove issues of limiting factors: greenhouses can control tmepertaure, light internisty, carbon dioxide levels, irrigation ensures water is readily avilible, use of fertilisers means that minerals are readily avilible, management of pests reduces competition for resources form ‘weeds’ and minimises crop damage form animal pests. Selecetive breeding for high yielding crops or fast growing animals and genetic engineering of crops for tolerance or pest resistance. Factory farming of animals, reduces energy losses by restricting movement, warm holding sheds, high energy and highly digestible foods, growth hormones, antibiotics Lower species diversity in agriculture: Removal of hedgerwos removes habitats for animals and food sources, growing one type or limited types of crops reduces biodiversity Lower genetic diversity: Selective breeding for certain charcateristics reduces the gene pool (risk associated with this, susceptibility, variation maximises chances of survival) Limited natural recycling and high input of fertilisers: Minerals are removed form the soil by crops and are not returned (decomposed) in that area. Soild depletes of minerals. Fertilisers used to replace lost minerals and to maximise yield. Organic inorganic, or combination of both, consider problems of eutrophication. Competition controlled naturally and artificially Pest control, cultural, biological, chemical and integrated management.
  • 27. 27
  • 28. 28 The predator prey relationship The population sizes of the predator and prey are interdependent. An increase in the prey population means more food and delayed increase in the predator population follows. The increased number of predators kills more prey, so prey numbers fall Lack of food means predators numbers fall Key notes Predator population changes always lags behind the prey Predator number is always lower than the prey (due to energy loss in a food chain). Although the predator prey relationships are a significant contributor to the fluctuations they are not the only reasons as disease, arrival of new predators and climatic factors may also act. The changes in population are not always as severe as shown in many illustrations; this is because organisms usually have a number of food sources. The experiment shows that both food and predation affect hare population. Food availability has more of an effect. The combined effect is more effective than either separately. This graph is drawn from data on the fur trading for both species. However, this assumes that the numbers of fur traded is representative of the relative size of the populations. The population of the snowshoe hare fluctuated in a series of peaks and troughs. Each peak and trough is repeated roughly every ten years. The population of the lynx cycles in ten yearly peaks and troughs similar to that of the hare. The peaks in the lynx population typically occur after that of the hare The hare increases when lynx population is low as more survive. This increases food availability for the lynx so fewer starve and subsequently their population increases (rear more young), this increases predation on the hares so their population declines reducing food for the lynx so they decline in numbers.
  • 29. 29 A population = the number of organisms of a particular species living in a habitat. This number is determined by a variety of interacting factors, abiotic (environmental, physical, non-living) and biotic (living factors) Lag phase: small numbers initially and the time needed to breed and for young to reach breeding age Exponential phase = rapidly increasing numbers in the population Stationary phase: carrying capacity is reached and the population remains relatively constant. Slight fluctuations in the population now affected by, food, predation, competition A 4th phase (decline phase) of the population curve may exist (usually not in a natural environment) in certain circumstances and here there is a decline in the population due to depleting resources for numerous possible reasons Human influence (hunting, deforestation, urbanisation) Or in bacterial growth when nutrients run out No population will grow indefinitely as the availability of resources and competition for these will limit growth. The factors that limit growth….Are called Environmental resistance and can be density-dependent or density-independent Temperature: Plant growth, Cold blood animals and Warm blooded animals are affected, when it is cold they expend more energy keeping warm, this will slow growth and slow reproduction Light: Light affects photosynthesis. pH: enzyme activity is affected by this Water/humidity: low water availability limits diversity, only xerophytes growing, limits the food sources and habitat and thus animals that can flourish. Abiotic factors Climatic: temperature, light, humidity, wind speed, rainfall Edaphic (soil): pH, mineral and moisture content Topographic: altitude Human factors: pollution Catastrophes: floods, fires, and earthquake These factors can vary within a habitat creating microclimates and microhabitats. These factors tend to be density-independent factors: the size of their impact is independent/is not related to the size of the population. Low light will limit plant growth regardless of the size of the plant population. A drop in temperature could kill many organisms whether the population is large or small These factors can often be seasonal Interspecific competition: competition for resources between members of different species usually having evolved slightly different ecological niches. When species which occupy a similar niche are brought in close contact one will usually out-compete the other (competitive exclusion principle), this will be the best adapted. Animals may find this situation arising due to deforestation and climate change forcing animals to migrate. Having a more varied diet helps maximise chances of survival Competitive exclusion principle: when two species are competing for limited resources the one using the resources most effectively will eliminate the other. Thus two species cannot occupy the same niche indefinitely when the resources are limiting Intraspecific competition: competition for resources between members of the same species, this is most intense as members have the same niche competing for exactly the same resources. This has a stabilising effect on a population, if population gets too big intraspecific competition increases and the population falls again. This is the driving force behind natural selection, as variants that are best competitors will survive and pass on their genes Biotic factors Food Competitors Predators Parasites Pathogens Biotic factors are usually density-dependent factors: the size of the effect depends upon the size of the population. Competition is greater if the population is greater. Higher population would mean transmission of disease is more rapid and more likely. If a population is high animals are more easily targeted by predators.
  • 30. 30 An example of interspecific competition P. Caudatum grows slowly at first then accelerating exponentially from around day 4 to day 8. The growth rate then slows reaching a maximum around 12 days; this max population is sustained until day 20. When P. Caudatum is grown with P. Aurelia the population grows faster initially, reaching its maximum much earlier. The maximum population is much reduced (<half) and is not maintained for the 20 days, it reaches zero. This suggests that the P. Caudatum is unable to compete effectively and thus the population starves. P. aurelia‘s growth is slowed when P. Caudatum is present as availability of food is reduced due to competition. On both occasions P. aurelia reaches the maximum, as it out-competes the P. caudatum, which dies out making food available for growth A second example of interspecific competition The graph for Scotland shows evidence that changes in the red squirrel population are due to competition from the grey squirrel because, the fall in the red is mirrored by the increase in grey after 1985 In Wales between 1970 and 75 both populations fall, this could be a result of, lack of food, adverse weather, increase in squirrel predators, disease One suggestion for the competitive advantage of grey over red is that grey squirrels will forage in the trees like the red, but are more willing to forage on the forest floor increasing chance of finding food.
  • 31. 31 A niche is the role the organism has within the habitat. The niche includes abiotic and biotic factors that the organism needs. Organisms are well adapted to their niche. Species with a narrow niche are called specialists. Many specialists can co-exist in a habitat as they are not competing for the same resources, this can give a high biodiversity Species with abroad niches are called generalists, and generalists in the same habitat will compete meaning that only a few will exist, giving a low biodiversity. Only species X would be found in section 1 Temperature and pH conditions where it is suitable for both X and Y to co-exist are found in section 3 The section where it would be too high a temperature for X and too low a pH for Y is section 2 Competition between X and Y would be found in section 3 No population of either X or Y would be found in section 4 because, the pH is too high for X and the temperature is too low for Y The abiotic factors that comprise an organism’s niche can be shown on a graph. For example, if a particular plant can only grow in a temperature range of 10–17°C and a soil pH of 6–7.5, then these ranges can be plotted on two axes of a graph, and where they intersect (the shaded box in the graph on the left) shows those aspects of the plant’s niche. We can add further axes to show the suitable ranges of other factors like humidity, light intensity and altitude, and so get a more detailed description of the niche (graph on right).
  • 32. 32 The population of most animals has been kept in check by the availability of food, disease, climate, predators to name some of the limiting factors of the environment Modification of the human environment has led to a population explosion. The development of agricultural practice The industrial revolution Recycling Medical advances Understanding diets Waste management Improved quality of food So the typical sigmoid population growth is not followed by human populations but rather the exponential phase continues and no stationary stage is reached to stabilise the population. The increase in population, or growth rate, depends on four factors: Growth rate = (birth rate – death rate) + (immigration rate – emigration rate) The equation shows that growth rate can increase by increasing the birth rate or decreasing the death rate (ignoring migration). The staggering human population growth over the last two centuries is entirely due to a massively decreased death rate caused by the improvements in farming described earlier, and in medicine. The increased growth rate has therefore happened at different times for different countries. Factors affecting birth rates Economic conditions – usually lower income = higher birth Religion – some religions encourage big families and are against birth control Social pressure/conditions – a large family can improve social standing Birth control – pills and abortion can affect Political factors – governments influence by taxation and education Factors affecting death rates Age profile – greater proportion of elderly the higher the death rate Life expectancy – longer in MEDNs Food supply – adequate and balanced diet reduce death rate Water supply and sanitation Medical care Natural disasters War
  • 33. 33 Demographic Transition Model: A model to show population changes in a country over time resulting from changes in social and economic situation of the country. Stage 1 High birth and death rates: Limited food causes starvation. Disease causes high but fluctuating death rate. Young are very susceptible to disease and starvation so high infant mortality rate. Short life expectancy means populations remain low and stable Stage 2 More reliable food supply, improving nutrition, and improved living conditions and reduced disease reduces death rates. Birth rates are high so population growth is rapid. Stage 3 Significant fall in birth rate is linked to social change. The increase in industrialisation and urbanisation means that families are less dependent on having children to contribute to the household. Birth control is practised. Stage 4 Stable population with low birth and death rates. Typically death rate is low and stable, birth rate is more variable. Proportion of elderly increases. In some countries death rate now exceeds birth rate a population declines (a possible 5th stage to this model) Most LEDNs are still in stages 2 and 3. Most MEDNs are in stage 4, and some have entered into the possible 5 stage, where the total population is declining. The problem here is that how do they support an increasingly older population that are dependent on a declining number who work. To help tackle these problems immigrants are being encouraged from countries where the population is growing. In the second and third stages the death rates fall before birth rate so the population still grows. In final stage birth rate and death rate are low so the population is stable. Developed countries in stage 4 Developing in stages 2 or 3 so pop growth is mainly here. Social Conditions affecting population structure. The growth of a population rarely follows the demographic transition model exactly; there are many factors that interact and are in turn affected by environmental factors. Three important factors affecting growth are Food supply Individual growth and health are food dependent. Lack of food increases infant mortality due to malnourishment, and malnourished have less chance of surviving infectious diseases. This also affects birth rate as fertility drops in malnourished women. Food shortage can be affected by, drought, crop diseases; other environmental factors (flood etc) there may also be difficulties with distribution. Sewage disposal This is tied into the supply of safe drinking water and the spread of water borne disease (cholera). Drinking water In UK it is taken from deep underground or from rivers or stored reservoirs. Social Conditions and life expectancy Human population growth in the past was limited by food supply, but agriculture offered humans a degree of control over their food production. As populations grew and settled in towns water borne disease had a significant effect due to poor sewage. Many other diseases were controlled until the invention of the vaccination. In modern developed countries fertility can be controlled.
  • 34. 34 The demographic transition model leads to a change in the age structure of a population. These changes can be illustrated in population pyramids or survival curves. Pyramids it helps to group the bars as pre-reproductive (<15), reproductive (15-44), post reproductive (>45) The shape tells about the future growth of the population… The wider the base the faster the population growth. A narrow base suggests a falling population Steep pyramid suggests a longer life expectancy A pyramid with a wide base and with a narrow tip suggests high infant mortality and short life expectancy Survivor curves are created by tracking a group of individuals from birth until the last one dies. The age each one dies at is recorded. The percentage of the group surviving at each stage is plotted. The life expectancy (mean life span) can be calculated by reading of the age at which 50% survive. Type I: long life expectancy, low infant mortality expected in affluent countries Type II: intermediate life expectancy and roughly constant death rate. Type III: short life expectancy, most die young (shown in animals with low parental care and produce large number of off-spring to compensate) in human populations this is evident in countries with poor health care, sanitation and nutrition. A bowing curve to the right demonstrates an improved ability to survive suggesting improved living conditions, medical care, and technology. Although people talk about quality of life in preference to length, the fact remains that length of life is the most objective way to measure quality
  • 35. 35
  • 36. 36 The light-dependent reactions use light energy to split water and make ATP, oxygen and energetic hydrogen atoms. This stage takes place within the thylakoid membranes of chloroplasts, and is very much like the respiratory chain, only in reverse. • The light-independent reactions don’t need light, but do need the products of the light- dependent stage (ATP and H), so they stop in the absence of light. This stage takes place in the stroma of the chloroplasts and involves the fixation of carbon dioxide and the synthesis of glucose. • Plants do not turn carbon dioxide into oxygen; they turn carbon dioxide into glucose, and water into oxygen. The chloroplast is adapted for its function. Contains chlorophyll for light absorption; Range of different pigments to absorb different wavelengths; Stacking / arrangement of grana/thylakoids maximises light catchment; layering of membrane allows a lot of pigment; Stroma contains enzymes for photosynthesis; (Calvin cycle) Outer membrane keeps enzymes in chloroplast; Starch grains / lipid droplets store products of photosynthesis; Ribosomes and DNA for enzyme/protein synthesis; Shape of chloroplast gives large surface area for CO2, absorption. Disc shape provides large surface for light absorption; Permeable membrane allows diffusion of gases / carbon dioxide; Membranes provide surface for attachment of electron / hydrogen acceptors; The absorption spectrum is the graph of absorbance of different wavelengths of light by a pigment The action spectrum shows the rate of photosynthesis at different wavelengths. Note the peaks of absorption occur at 650-700nm (red light) and 400-450nm (blue light). These absorption peaks correspond to the peaks in photosynthetic rate shown in the action spectrum Chlorophyll is a fairly small molecule (not a protein) Chlorophyll and the other pigments are arranged in complexes with proteins, called photosystems. Each photosystem contains some 200 chlorophyll molecules and 50 molecules of accessory pigments, together with several protein molecules (including enzymes) and lipids. These photosystems are located in the thylakoid membranes and they hold the light- absorbing pigments in the best position to maximise the absorbance of photons of light. The chloroplasts of green plants have two kinds of photosystem called photosystem I (PSI) and photosystem II (PSII). These absorb light at different wavelengths and have slightly different jobs in the light dependent reactions of photosynthesis. How the leaf is adapted for photosynthesis Large surface area to collect solar energy; transparent nature of cuticle to allow light penetration; position of chlorophyll to trap light; stomata to allow exchange of gases; thin / max. surface area to volume ratio for diffusion of gases; spongy mesophyll / air spaces for carbon dioxide store; xylem for input of water; phloem for removal of end products;
  • 37. 37 The light-dependent stage of photosynthesis. Light absorbed by chlorophyll in photosystem (PSI/PSII) electrons excited to a higher energy level Electrons are emitted form chlorophyll (oxidised) picked up by electron acceptor Electrons pass down chain of carriers energy released as electrons pass down the electron transport chain energy used in producing ATP from ADP and phosphate; (ADP + Pi+ energy (ATP) A process called photophosphorylation Photolysis of water Provides electrons to replace those lost from PS II (stabilising the chlorophyll/reducing it) Provides the protons/H+ i ons to reduce NADP Reduced NADP formed by accepting electrons and H+; The way in which ATP and reduced NADP are produced in the light-dependent reaction In context of ATP formation light raises energy level of (excites) electrons These pass through electron carriers; energy is released as electrons pass down the transport chain energy is used to form ATP from ADP + P; Reduced NADP is made by accepting protons / H + ions; And electrons; From photolysis / water; The role of electron transport chains in the light dependent reactions 1. Electron transport chain accepts excited electrons; 2. From chlorophyll / photosystem; 3. Electrons lose energy along chain; 4. ATP produced; 5. From ADP and Pi; 6. Reduced NADP formed; 7. When electrons (from transport chain) and H + combine with NADP; 8. H + from photolysis; PSII absorbs light, excites electrons to a higher energy level. This drives photolysis of water (2H2 O  O2 + 4H+ + 4e- ), the protons build up in the thylakoid lumen and the electrons replace those in the chlorophyll. Excited electrons pass along electron carriers releasing energy as they go which pumps protons form stroma to lumen of thylakoid Electrons are finally picked up by NADP The protons are used to make ATP using the ATP synthase enzyme (photophosphorylation) The H+ ions are then picked up by NADP forming reduced NAPD
  • 38. 38 Plants produce ATP in their chloroplasts during photosynthesis. They also produce ATP during respiration. Explain why it is important for plants to produce ATP during respiration in addition to during photosynthesis. 1. In the dark no ATP production in photosynthesis; 2. Some tissues unable to photosynthesise/produce ATP; 3. ATP cannot be moved from cell to cell/stored; 4. Plant uses more ATP than produced in photosynthesis; 5. ATP for active transport; 6. ATP for synthesis (of named substance); In light independent reaction/Calvin cycle; 1. Carbon dioxide combines with ribulose bisphosphate/RuBP CO2 acceptor; 2. This reaction is catalysed by ribulose bisphosphate carboxylase (RuBISCo) 3. Produces two molecules of glycerate (3-)phosphate/GP; 4. GP is reduced to triose phosphate/TP; 5. Using reduced NADP; 6. Using energy from ATP; 7. Some TP is converted to hexose compounds/other organic substances 8. Some TP is used to regenerate ribulose bisphosphate; 9. This regeneration of RuBP requires ATP 10. 10 molecules of 3C/TP/GP form 6 molecules of 5C/RuBP; Explain how ATP and reduced NADP are used in the light-independent reactions. GP converted to triose phosphate (GALP) this involves a reduction; reduced NADP provides the reducing power ATP supplies energy for this reaction; ATP is also used to provide the phosphate for production of RuBP;
  • 39. 39
  • 40. 40 The ‘Lollipop’ experiment was used by Melvin Calvin to work out the details of the light independent reactions. Single celled algae are grown in a solution of radioactive hydrogencarbonate (14 C) which supplies radioactive Carbon dioxide and will be incorporated into the compounds. At 5 second intervals samples of the algae are dropped in to hot methanol (stops chemical reactions instantly, through enzyme denaturation), the compounds are separated (two way chromatography) out and those that are radioactive are identified and the pathway established by the time at which the substances appear. The rapid action tap is essential because the reactions occur quickly and the samples can be removed after a precise time period. Photosynthometer (Audus apparatus). Set up to avoid air bubbles within and ensure it is air tight (air entering/leaving will alter volume of gas making results unreliable. Water bath keeps temperature constant, so change sin rate are only due to light. Temperature can be adjusted to investigate temp effect. Potassium hydrogencarbonate is used to produce excess CO2 for plant so it does not limit Light source with adjustable intensity is used The rate of photosynthesis by a plant or alga can be measured by recording the amount of oxygen produced, or carbon dioxide used, in a given period of time. But these measurements are also affected by respiration, which plants do all the time, so the respiration rate must be measured separately. The conditions at which the rates of photosynthesis and respiration are equal, so there is no net change in oxygen or carbon dioxide concentration, is called the compensation point. Many of the environmental factors that affect photosynthesis also affect respiration. Temperature influences enzyme. Photosynthesis is more sensitive to temperature with an optimum of about 30- 35°C, whereas respiration often has an optimum nearer to 45°C. There is a temperature compensation point around 40°C (A), above this temperature plants lose mass as the rate of respiration is greater than the rate of photosynthesis. Carbon dioxide is the substrate for the enzyme rubisco in the light-independent stages of photosynthesis, so the higher the carbon dioxide concentration the faster the rate of the Calvin cycle. The rate of respiration is not affected by carbon dioxide concentration, and the carbon dioxide compensation point is usually very low, at about 50ppm (A). Normal carbon dioxide concentration in the air is about 400ppm (B), whereas the optimum concentration for most plants is nearer to 1000ppm, so carbon dioxide is often the limiting factor. Light is the source of energy for the production of ATP and NADPH in the light-dependent stages of photosynthesis, so the higher the light intensity the faster the rate of photosynthesis. The rate of respiration is not affected by light intensity, and the light compensation point is usually low. Shade plants are adapted to growing in low light conditions (such as a forest floor), so have a very low light compensation point (A) and a low optimum intensity. Shade plants make good house plants, since they are adapted to the low light intensities indoors. Sun plants have a higher compensation point (B), and have a very high optimum near the light intensity of a bright summer’s day (C). Both photosynthesis and respiration are affected by time of day: photosynthesis by changes in light and respiration by changes in temperature. At night respiration exceeds photosynthesis, while during the day photosynthesis exceeds respiration, so there are two compensation points each day (A and B). Over a 24-hour period the amount of photosynthesis is greater than the amount of respiration, so plants gain mass and have a net uptake of carbon dioxide.
  • 41. 41
  • 42. 42
  • 43. 43 The different stages of respiration take place in different parts of the cell. This compartmentalisation allows the cell to keep the various metabolites separate, and to control the stages more easily. The energy released by respiration is in the form of ATP. Stage 1 (glycolysis) is anaerobic respiration, this occurs in the cytoplasm Stages 2 (link reaction occurs in the matrix) and 3 (oxidative phosphorylation, chemiosmosis, electron transport, occurs on the cristae) are the aerobic stages and occur in the mitochondria 1. Glucose enters cells from the tissue fluid by facilitated diffusion using a specific glucose carrier. This carrier can be controlled (gated) by hormones such as insulin, so that uptake of glucose can be regulated. 2. Glucose is phosphorylated using 2 ATPs. keeps glucose in the cell by effectively removing “pure” glucose, so glucose will always diffuse down its concentration gradient from the tissue fluid into the cell (glucose phosphate no longer fits the membrane carrier). It “activates” glucose for biosynthesis reactions. 3. The Hexose Bisphosphate splits into two triose phosphate (3 carbon) sugars. 4. The triose sugar is changed over several steps to form pyruvate, a 3-carbon compound. In these steps some energy is released to form ATP (the only ATP formed in glycolysis), and a hydrogen atom is also released. This hydrogen is later used by the respiratory chain to make more ATP. The hydrogen atom is taken up and carried to the respiratory chain by the coenzyme NAD, which becomes reduced NAD in the process. Pyruvate can also be turned back into glucose by reversing glycolysis, and this is called gluconeogenesis. 5. In the absence of oxygen pyruvate is converted into lactate or ethanol in anaerobic respiration 6. In the presence of oxygen pyruvate enters the mitochondrial matrix. It is converted to a compound called acetyl coA. Since this step links glycolysis and the Krebs cycle, (link reaction). In this reaction pyruvate loses a CO2 and a hydrogen to form a 2-carbon acetyl compound, which is temporarily attached to coenzyme A (or just coA), so the product is called acetyl coA. The hydrogen is taken up by NAD again. 7. The acetyl CoA then enters the Krebs Cycle. The 2-carbon acetyl is transferred from acetyl coA to the 4-carbon oxaloacetate to form the 6-carbon citrate. Citrate is then gradually broken down in several steps to re-form oxaloacetate, producing carbon dioxide and hydrogen in the process. Some ATP is also made directly in the Krebs cycle. As before, the CO2 diffuses out the cell and the hydrogen is taken up by NAD, or by an alternative hydrogen carrier called FAD. These hydrogen atoms are carried to the inner mitochondrial membrane for the final part of respiration. The removal of hydrogen/dehydrogenation is done by enzymes/dehydrogenases. The resulting H is accepted by NAD/which forms reduced NAD. This occurs in glycolysis and Krebs cycle, (FAD is used as well in Krebs);
  • 44. 44 1. Reduced NAD releases its H and is oxidised to NAD, which returns to the Krebs cycle. Reduced FAD attaches to a protein further along the respiratory chain. The H split into H ions and electron. 2. The electrons are passed along the chain of proteins in the inner mitochondrial membrane, releasing its energy as it goes. 3. This energy is used to pump H ions into the intermemberane space, creating a proton gradient between the inner membrane space and the matrix. 4. The H ions can only move down their electrochemical gradient through a special channel in the ATP synthase enzyme, as they move down this gradient, they release energy that can be used to phosphorylate ADP. 4 protons = 1 ATP This is why reduced FAD yields less ATP, as it does not provide as much energy to pump H ions into the intermeembrane space as reduced NAD does 3. Oxygen (terminal electron acceptor) combines with hydrogen and electrons to form water (O2 + H+ + e- _ H2O). In absence of oxygen electron transport chain stops. Aerobic respiration yields more ATP per molecule of glucose than anaerobic. Explain. Oxygen as terminal hydrogen/electron acceptor; Operation of electron transport chain/ oxidative phosphorylation; Thus pyruvate can enter the Krebs cycle; Significance of ATP formed in glycolysis; Explain why oxygen is needed for the production of ATP on the cristae of the mitochondrion. ATP formed as electrons pass along transport chain; oxygen is terminal electron acceptor accepting electrons from electron transport chain; It also accepts H + forming H2O Electrons cannot be passed along electron transport chain if no O2 to accept them; Describe how ATP is made in mitochondria 1. Substrate level phosphorylation in Krebs 2. Krebs cycle/link reaction produces reduced NAD and FAD; 3. Electrons released from reduced NAD/FAD 4. (Electrons) pass along carriers/through electron transport chain (redox reactions) 5. Energy released; phosphorylates 6. ADP/ADP + Pi; 7. Protons move into intermembrane space; 8. ATP synthase; Describe the roles of the coenzymes and carrier proteins in the synthesis of ATP. hydrogen attaches to NAD/FAD (reduction) Electrons transferred from coenzyme to coenzyme on transport chain series of redox reactions; this releases energy to pump protons H + /protons pumped into intermembrane space; H + / protons flow back through /enzyme; ATPase; Energy used to synthesise ATP from ADP and Pi
  • 45. 45 If there is no oxygen (anaerobic conditions) then water cannot be made, electrons can‘t leave the respiratory chain, so NADH cannot unload any hydrogen to the respiratory chain. This means that there is no NAD in the cell; it’s all in the form of NADH. Without NAD as a coenzyme, some of the enzymes of the Krebs cycle and glycolysis cannot work, so the whole of respiration stops. Anaerobic respiration circumvents this problem by adding an extra step to the end of glycolysis that regenerates NAD, so allowing glycolysis to continue and some ATP to be made. Anaerobic respiration only makes 2 ATPs per glucose, but it’s better than nothing! There are two different kinds of anaerobic respiration: In animals and bacteria the extra step converts pyruvate to lactate (or lactic acid). This is a reduction, so reduced NAD is used and NAD is regenerated, to be used in glycolysis. The reaction is reversible, so the energy remaining in the lactate molecule can be retrieved when oxygen becomes available and the lactate is oxidised via the rest of aerobic respiration. Unfortunately the lactate is poisonous, causing acidosis in muscles cells, which stops enzymes working, possible affects the binding of calcium to troponin in the muscle and causes muscle fatigue and cramp. Anaerobic respiration in muscles cannot be continued for very long. In plants and fungi the extra steps converts pyruvate to ethanol. This is also a reduction, so NADH is used and NAD is regenerated, to be used in glycolysis. Ethanol is a two-carbon compound and carbon dioxide is also formed. This means the reaction is irreversible, so the energy in the ethanol cannot be retrieved by the cells. Ethanolic anaerobic respiration is also known as fermentation, and we make use of fermentation in yeast to make ethanol in beer and wine. Describe what happens to pyruvate in anaerobic conditions and explain why anaerobic respiration is advantageous to human skeletal muscle. Forms lactate Use of reduced NAD / NADH; Regenerates NAD; NAD can be re-used to oxidise more respiratory substrate allows glycolysis to continue; Can still release energy/form ATP when oxygen in short supply/when no oxygen; Give two ways in which anaerobic respiration of glucose in yeast is Similar to anaerobic respiration of glucose in muscle cells ATP formed/used; pyruvate formed/reduced; NAD/reduced NAD; glycolysis involved/two stage process; Different from anaerobic respiration of glucose in a muscle cells Ethanol/alcohol formed by yeast, lactate (allow lactic acid) by muscle cell; CO2 released by yeast but not by muscle cell;
  • 46. 46 Counting ATP How much ATP do we get per molecule of glucose? • Some ATP molecules are made directly by the enzymes in glycolysis or the Krebs cycle. This is called substrate level phosphorylation (since ADP is being phosphorylated to form ATP). • Most of the ATP molecules are made by the ATP synthase enzyme in the respiratory chain. Since this requires oxygen it is called oxidative phosphorylation. Scientists don’t yet know exactly how many protons are pumped in the respiratory chain, but the current estimates are: 10 protons pumped by NADH; 6 by FADH; and 4 protons needed by ATP synthase to make one ATP molecule. This means that each NADH can make 2.5 ATPs (10/4) and each FADH can make 1.5 ATPs (6/4). Previous estimates were 3 ATPs for NADH and 2 ATPs for FADH, and these numbers still appear in most textbooks, although they are now probably wrong. Remember two ATP molecules were used in the activation of glucose at the start of glycolysis, so this must be subtracted from the total We had: (per glucose molecule) 10 reduced NAD’s (2 from glycolysis 2 from link 6 from kerbs) 2 reduced FAD’s (from Krebs) 2 ATP made by substrate level phosphorylation in the Krebs cycle 2 ATP made by substrate level phosphorylation in glycolysis (4 were made but we invested 2 so it’s a net 2 ATP here) Reduced NAD makes either, (depending on the books you read) 3 ATP per reduced NAD or 2.5 Reduced FAD makes either, (depending on the books you read) 2 ATP per reduced FAD or 1.5 So…………… 10 × 3 = 30 10 × 2.5 = 25 2 × 2 = 4 2 × 1.5 = 3 2 ATP 2 ATP 2 ATP 2 ATP Total = 38 Total = 32
  • 47. 47
  • 48. 48 Glycolysis: occurs in the cytoplasm Glucose enters the cell through specific carriers; it is phosphorylated to prevent it leaving the cell this uses ATP to provide the Phosphate. Glucose is quite stable and so does not react easily, thus it is activated by the investment of energy. It is phosphorylated using 2ATP molecules (one has already been accounted for above); this forms an unstable hexose (6C) bisphosphate which then breaks down into two triose (3C) phosphates. These triose sugars undergo a series of dehydrogenations (each one has hydrogen removed) and dephosphorylations, each losses two phosphate groups (transferred to 2 ADPs, making 2 ATPs through substrate level phosphorylation.. Consequently for 1 molecule of glucose 2ATP are invested 2 pyruvate molecules are formed 4 ATP (generated by substrate level phosphoylation, enzyme catalysed transfer of phosphate from a molecule to ADP) 2 reduced NAD are made that are then transferred to the electron transport chain Remember though, there is only a net gain of 2 ATP in glycolysis (4 ATP generated – 2 ATP invested = 2 ATP left) Link reaction (occurs in mitochondria) Here pyruvate is actively taken into the mitochondrial matrix Dehydrogenated: the hydrogen is picked up by NAD Decarboxylated (CO2 removed) making a 2C acetyl compound that is temporarily attached to a coenzyme A (CoA), forming acetyl CoA which then enters the krebs cycle. Krebs cycle (occurs in matrix of mitochondria) Acetyl group is transferred to a 4C compound, oxaloacetate and forms a 6C compound citrate. This is dehydrogenated (hydrogen picked up by NAD) and decaroxylated to 5 carbon α ketoglutarate. This 5 carbon compound is dehyrgoenated (losing 3 hydrogen atoms, 2 are picked up by NAD and one is picked up by FAD) and decarboxylated (producing carbon dioxide), oxaloacetate is regenerated. 1 turn produces 3 reduced NAD’s 1 reduced FAD 1 ATP (substrate level) 2 carbon dioxides Remember there are two pyruvates, hence two acetyls so two turns, so double this for 1 glucose Chemiosmosis: Reduced NAD is transferred to NAD dehydrogenase located on the cristae of the mitochondrial inner membrane, reduced FAD arrives a second dehydrogenase enzyme complex on the cristae The reduced NAD (and FAD) are oxidised, the hydrogen is removed Each hydrogen atom is split into a hydrogen ion and electron The electrons are passed down a series of electron carriers at progressively lower energy levels. As the electrons move they release energy that is used to power the proton pumps in the cristae and they pump the protons (H+ ) into the intermembrane space The protons can only move back into the matrix at special channel proteins in the membrane that are associated with ATP synthase As the protons move down their electrochemical gradient the energy released is used to phosphoylate ADP producing ATP (ADP + Pi  ATP)
  • 49. 49 How is the structure of the mitochondria related to its function? Mitochondria have a double membrane: the outer membrane contains many protein channels called porins, which let almost any small molecule through; while the inner membrane is more normal and is selectively permeable to solutes. The inner membrane is highly folded into projections called cristae, giving a larger surface area. The electron microscope reveals blobs on the inner membrane, called stalked particles. These blobs have now been identified as enzyme complexes that synthesise ATP, and are more correctly called ATP synthase enzymes (more later). The space inside the inner membrane is called the matrix, and is where the Krebs cycle takes place. The matrix also contains DNA, tRNA and ribosomes, and some genes are replicated and expressed here. Explain the advantage of mitochondria in muscle cells having more cristae. (More cristae means a larger surface area for electron transport chain more enzymes for ATP production/oxidative phosphorylation; muscle cells use more ATP (than skin cells)(not just more respiration); Q. ATP is sometimes described as an immediate source of energy. Explain why. (Energy release) only involves a single reaction/one- step/ energy transfer direct to reaction requiring energy; Q. why is it that the body converts chemical energy in glucose, to chemical energy in ATP? ATP is a more useful as an immediate energy for metabolism than glucose because Energy is available more rapidly because it is released in single reaction ATP releases its energy in small/manageable quantities; Q. Why is ATP a useful energy store? 1. Releases energy in small / manageable amounts when hydrolysed 2. Hydrolysed in a one-step / single bond broken; 3. Immediate energy source/makes energy available rapidly; 4. Phosphorylates/adds phosphate; 5. Makes (phosphorylated substances) more reactive / lowers activation energy; 6. Reformed/made again using energy from other reactions 7. Can be readily moved/stored/broken down when needed; 8. Cannot pass out of cell; Q. What is ATP used for? The processes in a cell that require energy can be put into three groups: • Muscle contraction and other forms of movement, such as cilia, flagella, cytoplasmic streaming, etc. Each step of the muscle cross bridge cycle costs one ATP molecule. • Active transport. Each shape change in an active transport protein pump costs one ATP molecule. • Biosynthesis – building up large molecules from smaller ones, e.g. protein synthesis, DNA replication, starch synthesis, etc. Each monomer added to a growing polymer chain costs one ATP molecule. Since these processes use ATP, they all involve ATPase enzymes. ATPases catalyse the hydrolysis of ATP to ADP + Pi, and do work with the energy released. Phagocytosis; Synthesis of glycogen; Protein / enzyme; DNA / RNA; Lipid / cholesterol; Bile production; Cell division
  • 50. 50 A species is defined as Organisms that can breed together to produce fertile offspring, Organisms in the same species are similar in morphology, behaviour and biochemistry, and have the same ecological niche. Organisms in the same species share a common ancestor. Speciation New species arise from an existing species where reproductively isolated populations have resulted (thus, there is no gene flow between the populations). This most commonly happens when the two populations become physically separated (allopatric speciation) If the speciation occurs when the organisms are occupying the same geographical area but are reproductively isolated it is sympatric speciation. Common in plants (flower at different times, polyploidy) less so in animals (but could arise due to differences in reproductive organs, differences in mating ritual) Each population experiences different environmental conditions, accumulates different mutations and over a long period of time natural selection changes the allelic frequencies of each population in different ways This makes the organisms become so different they can no longer interbreed Gene pool: all the alleles of all the genes in a population which result in variation. Sympatric speciation Copper-tolerant plants flower at a different time from those which are not copper-tolerant. Explain how this might eventually lead to the production of a new species of plant. 1. Reproductively isolated due to different flowering times 2. Different selection pressures for two populations 3. Different features or plants are selected or survive /different adaptations; 4. Populations become (genetically) different; 5. Unable to produce fertile offspring; Explaining how geographical isolation can lead to the formation of new species. (Allopatric speciation) 1. Populations are isolated by geographical barrier (river, mountain, desert or ocean); 2. No gene flow between populations 3. Variation exists within the populations 4. Each population faces different selection pressures due to different environments (climatic, food, predators) 5. Mutation in one group (different from other group) 6. Natural selection for specific alleles means populations become adapted to local environment; 7. The best suited organisms survive and reproduce pass on their alleles; 8. Change in allele frequencies over a long period of time 9. Isolated populations become so different they can no longer interbreed; Explaining sympatric speciation Original population living in one area 2 species evolved in the same area; Genetic variability exists in the population Groups within the population becomes reproductively isolated (flowering at different times, different courtship behaviour) Gene pools become increasingly different; Until interbreeding does not produce fertile offspring; What is meant by reproductive isolation? Organisms cannot interbreed/ breed or mate or reproduce with another group Due to incompatible gametes/ wrong courtship behaviour/ other valid reason
  • 51. 51 Darwin's theory of evolution based on natural selection was based on four observations: • Individuals within a species differ– there is variation. • Offspring resemble their parents – characteristics are inherited. •More offspring are generally produced than survive to maturity – most organisms die young from predation, disease and competition. Those that survive have better characteristics and thus reproduce and pass on these genes • Populations are usually fairly constant in size. Summary of Natural Selection 1. There is genetic variation in the characteristics within a population 2. Individuals with characteristics that make them less well adapted to their environment will die young from predation, disease or competition. 3. Individuals with characteristics that make them well adapted to their environment will survive and reproduce. 4. The allele frequency will change in each generation. Differences between reproductive successes of individuals affect the allele frequency in a population. It works like this More organisms are produced than the environment can support Populations remain a constant size (relatively) Thus competition exists between members of a species to survive In any population there is a gene pool (all the alleles of all the genes in that) Some organisms will have allele combinations that make them better for competing thus they are more likely to survive and thus reproduce and pass on their alleles. Thus the advantageous alleles the parents had are more likely to be passed on and the offspring are in turn more likely to survive as they have advantageous alleles Over generations the number of individuals with advantageous alleles increases compared to the dwindling number of disadvantageous alleles So the allele frequency changes, advantageous alleles are more common. What is advantageous is dependent on the environment. The Peppered Moth. These light-coloured moths are well camouflaged from bird predators against pale lichen-covered bark of trees, while rare mutant dark moths are easily picked off. During the industrial revolution in the 19th century, birch woods near industrial centres became black with pollution. In this changed environment the black moths had a selective advantage and became the most common colour, while the pale moths were easily predated and became rare. Kettlewell tested this by releasing dark and light moths in polluted and unpolluted environments and observing selective predation. Since pollution has cleared up in the 20th century the selection has revered again and pale moths are now favoured again over dark ones. Bacterial resistance to antibiotics. Antibiotics kill bacteria, but occasionally a chance mutant bacterium appears that is resistant to an antibiotic. In an environment where the antibiotic is often present, this mutant has an enormous selective advantage since all the normal (wild type) bacteria are killed leaving the mutant cell free to reproduce and colonise the whole environment without any competition. Some farmers routinely feed antibiotics to their animals to prevent infection, but this is a perfect environment for resistant bacteria to thrive. The best solution is to stop using the antibiotic so that the resistant strain has no selective advantage, and may die out. Darwin explained the giraffe's long neck as follows: 1. In a population of animals there would be random genetic variation in neck length. 2. In an environment where there were trees and bushes, the longer-necked animals were slightly better adapted as they could reach more leaves, and so competed well compared to their shorter-necked relatives. These longer-necked animals lived longer, through more breeding seasons, and so had more offspring. 3. The shorter-necked animals would be more likely to lose the competition for food, so would be poorly nourished and would probably die young from predation or disease. They would have few, if any, offspring. 4. So in the next generation there were more long-neck alleles than short-neck alleles in the population. If this continued over very many generations, then in time the frequency of long-neck alleles would increase and so the average neck length would increase.
  • 52. 52 Directional Selection occurs when one extreme phonotype (e.g. tallest) is favoured over the other extreme (e.g. shortest). This happens when the environment changes in a particular way. "Environment" includes biotic as well as abiotic factors, so organisms evolve in response to each other. e.g. if predators run faster there is selective pressure for prey to run faster, or if one tree species grows taller, there is selective pressure for other to grow tall. Most environments do change (e.g. due to migration of new species, or natural catastrophes, or climate change, or to sea level change, or continental drift, etc.), so directional selection is common. Stabilising (or Normalising) Selection. This occurs when the intermediate phenotype is selected over extreme phenotypes, and tends to occur when the environment doesn't change much. For example birds’ eggs and human babies of intermediate birth weight are most likely to survive. The mean will not change, the standard deviation will decrease as it selects against the extremes. Disruptive (or Diverging) Selection. This occurs when both extremes of phenotype are selected over intermediate types. For example in a population of finches, birds with large and small beaks feed on large and small seeds respectively and both do well, but birds with intermediate beaks have no advantage, and are selected against. Explain how selection results in an insecticide resistance. Insecticide resistance already in population; (resulting) from mutation; resistant insects are not killed (by insecticide)/survive; reproduce/breed; passing on the relevant allele to the next generation/offspring; resulting in increasing frequency of resistance allele in population Explain what is meant by stabilising selection and describe where it takes place. 1. Occurs in an unchanging environment; 1 2. (Initial range of values in which) mean is best adapted; 3. Selection against extremes / selection for the mean; 4. Mean/median/mode unaltered 5. Range/S.D is reduced; 6. Repeated over many generations; 7. Increasing proportion of populations becomes well adapted to environment; Explain how natural selection produces changes within a species. Variation between members of population/species; predation/disease/competition results in differential survival; some have adaptations that favour survival; survive to reproduce/have more offspring/ pass on their alleles/genes; produces changes in frequency of alleles Explain how resistance to an antibiotic could become widespread in a bacterial population following a gene mutation conferring resistance in just one bacterium. 1. Frequent use of antibiotic creates selection pressure 2. Bacteria with mutation/ resistance have advantage over others 3. (Survive to) reproduce more than other types 4. Pass on advantageous allele/ mutated allele in greater numbers 5. Frequency of (advantageous) allele increases over generations Explain how natural selection favours the evolution of bottom dwelling bacteria containing photosynthetic pigment that absorbs red and blue light most effectively rather than green absorbed by those living near the surface of the water Little green light reaches bottom as absorbed by surface dwellers Red and blue not absorbed and so penetrate; Variation in pigments of sediment dwellers; Bacteria with chlorophyll at an advantage; As chlorophyll absorbs red and blue; (Survive to) reproduce in greater numbers; Pass on advantageous alleles/genes in greater numbers / increase in frequency of advantageous alleles in subsequent generations; Increase in frequency/numbers of bacteria with chlorophyll;
  • 53. 53 The sum of all the alleles of all the genes of all the individuals in a population is called the gene pool The Hardy-Weinberg Principle The frequencies of dominant and recessive alleles in a population remain constant over time, so long as five key conditions about the population were met: 1. There are no mutations, so no new alleles are created. 2. There is no immigration /emigration, so no new alleles are introduced/ lost. 3. There is no selection, so no alleles are favoured or eliminated. 4. Mating is random, so alleles are mixed randomly. 5. The population is large, so there are no genetic bottlenecks. These conditions mean that there is nothing to disturb the gene pool; the allele frequencies in the population will remain constant from generation to generation. Before this it was thought that dominant alleles would increase in frequency over time, and recessive alleles would decrease in frequency, but this intuitive idea is wrong. Dominant alleles need not be common. For example the dominant allele for Huntington’s disease is very rare in the population and almost everyone is homozygous recessive. The Hardy-Weinberg principle can be tested by measuring allele frequencies over time, and it is often found that the frequencies do change. This means that the at least one of the five conditions is not true, and the gene pool is not stable. In other words the population is evolving. So the Hardy-Weinberg principle provides a means of detecting evolution, and quantifying the rate of evolutionary change. If the gene pool is stable then we can use a simple equation to calculate the gene frequencies in a population. There are three kinds of frequencies: Phenotype frequencies are proportions of the different characteristics in the population (e.g. red or white). These are the easiest, because we can see and count them in a population. Genotype frequencies are the proportions of the three possible genotypes (BB, Bb and bb) in the population. This isn’t so easy, because we can’t see the genotypes, but we can calculate them. Allele frequencies are the proportions of the two alleles B and b in the population. Allele frequencies are particularly interesting because evolution causes the allele frequencies to change. The two equations you need are (p= frequency of dominant allele/ q = frequency of recessive allele) 1) p + q = 1 (use this when given allele frequencies) 2) p2 + 2pq + q2 = 1 (use when given phenotype/genotype frequencies) In a study of people, the frequency of the I O allele was found to be 0.55 and that of the I A allele, 0.18. What was the frequency of the I B allele in this population? Sum of allele frequencies must be 1 (p + q = 1) so 0.55 + 0.18 + I B = 1 I B = 0.27 A population of 1000 cats has 840 black cats and 160 white cats. Black is dominant and white is recessive. Calculate how many of the black cats were homozygous and heterozygous. We know that q2 = 0.16 (160/1000) We know that p2 + 2pq = 0.84 (840/1000) We can work out the frequency of the dominant and recessive alleles q2 = 0.16 q = 0.4 p + q = 1 p = 1 – 0.4 p = 0.6 Now we can calculate the genotype frequencies p2 so homozygous dominant black cats = 0.6 ×0.6 = 0.36 2pq, heterozygous cats = 2 × 0.6 × 0.4 = 0.48 q2, homozygous recessive white cats = 0.16 So: there were 360 homozygous black cats and 480 heterozygous making the 840 black cats. In the flour beetle, the allele for red body colour (R) is dominant to the allele for black body colour (r). A mixed culture of red beetles and black beetles was kept in a container in the laboratory under optimal breeding conditions. After one year, there were 149 red beetles and 84 black beetles in the container. (a) Use the Hardy-Weinberg equation to calculate the expected percentage of heterozygous red beetles in this population. Total population = 84 + 149 = 233. Black = recessive =q. 84 blacks means q2 = 0.36 (84/233), thus q = 0.6 P = 1 – 0.6 = 0.4 Heterozygotes =2 × 0.6 × 0.4 = 0.48 = 48%
  • 54. 54 Homogametic sex: the sex that produces gametes containing sex chromosomes of the same type. Female gametes all have X chromosomes Homologous chromosomes: a pair of chromosomes containing the same gene sequences each derived from one parent Homozygous (pure breed): possessing the same alleles of genes at one or more loci on homologous chromosomes Locus: the position on a chromosome of a gene or other chromosome marker Multiple alleles: genes that have more than two different alleles Phenotype: the features of an individual that result from the expression of the genes and their interaction with the environment Recessive allele: an allele whose effects only show when there are no dominant alleles present. A recessive phenotype is always homozygous. The allele not expressed in the heterozygous state Sex chromosomes: the X and Y chromosomes in human beings which determine the sex of an individual Sex linkage: genes, other than those that determine sexual features, which occupy a locus on one sex chromosome but not the other Test-cross: cross fertilisation carried out between an unknown genotype showing the dominant phenotype and an individual showing the recessive phenotype. Genetics definitions: you may wish to add more to this Alleles: alternative forms of the same gene Autosome: a chromosome not involved in sex determination (human genome has 22 pair’s autosomes and 1 pair of sex chromosomes) Chromosomes: the self-replicating genetic structures of the cell containing the DNA Co-dominant alleles: alleles whose effects both show in the phenotype of a heterozygote (Remember incomplete dominance is where we get a blending of characteristics, breeding a red and white flower gives pink flowers, co-dominance both characteristics are expressed so we would get flowers with red and white spots) Dominant allele: an allele whose effect always shows in the phenotype when it is present, it is the allele expressed in the heterozygous state Gene pool: all the alleles of all the genes in a population of organism, which results in variation Genotype: the alleles of a gene (genetic constitution) an individual inherits Haploid: a nucleus with only a single set of chromosomes Heterosomes: chromosomes involved in sex determination which are different in appearance. In humans that Y chromosome determining male sex characteristics is much shorter than the X. Heterozygous: Possessing different alleles of genes at one or more loci on homologous chromosomes Heterogametic sex: the sex that produces gametes containing sex chromosomes of two types. Males produce gametes with either an X or Y in them
  • 55. 55 Individuals can only have two copies of a gene and thus two alleles that may be the same (homozygous [dominant or recessive]) or different (heterozygous). However, there may be more than two alleles of a gene, like blood groups, which have three alleles IA , IB and IO . IA , IB are codominant whilst IO is recessive. Thus there are 6 possible genotypes and 4 possible phenotypes shown in the table across. Monohybrid crosses: A simple breeding experiment involving a single characteristic Test cross: you can see a phenotype but not the genotype. If a person shows the recessive trait, they must be homozygous for the characteristic, but showing a dominant trait they could be homozygous or heterozygous. You can find out which by breeding the unknown with the homozygous recessive. If all the results are dominant, then the parent is likely to be homozygous dominant. There may be some doubt as it is possible that the random nature of fertilisation has just resulted in the dominant allele being passed on, so a large offspring number can help increase the certainty. If the results are mixed then the parent must be heterozygous How genotype controls phenotype Genes are lengths of DNA that code for proteins. It is the proteins that control phenotype as enzymes, pumps and hormones and structural elements Sex determination X and Y chromosomes are non-homologous and are called Heterosomes, whilst the other 22 pairs are autosomes. Males = XY Females = XX Sex linked characteristics The Y chromosomes is small, containing few genes and does little else than determine sex. The X chromosomes is large and contains 1000s of genes. Females have 2 X chromosomes whilst males only have 1 copy, so the inheritance of the genes on the X chromosome is different for males and females, hence this inheritance is sex linked. An example is colour-blindness where XR for dominant, normal colour vision and Xr represent colour blindness. See diagram on the right.
  • 56. 56 Co-dominance/Incomplete dominance In most cases one allele is dominant over another and thus we get just two phenotypes. But in some cases there are more phenotypes as neither allele is completely dominant over the other, thus the heterozygote has a phenotype of its own. With co-dominance, a cross between organisms with two different phenotypes produces offspring with a third phenotype in which both of the parental traits appear together. With incomplete dominance, a cross between organisms with two different phenotypes produces offspring with a third phenotype that is a blending of the parental traits.
  • 57. 57
  • 58. 58 Propagation of the Action Potential Depolarisation of axon membrane causes local currents to be set up These currents cause a change in the permeability of the adjoining region as voltage gated Na + channels open (in adjoining region) Sodium ions enter adjoining region causing depolarisation Repolarisation Sodium channels voltage gates close (absolute refractory: no new action potential can be produced) Potassium voltage gates open Potassium ions leave down electrical/chemical gradient causing Repolarisation; hyperpolarisation (more negative inside the axon than at rest) relative refractory: larger stimulus is required to produce a new action potential Sodium-potassium pump restores resting potential; Resting Potential (-70mv, inside of the axon is negative in relation to the outside) Caused by distribution of ions across membrane controlled by intrinsic protein channels and carriers Sodium potassium pump actively transports sodium out of axon and potassium into the axon Membrane is more permeable to potassium than sodium, sodium gates are closed Potassium diffuses out of the axon Negatively charged proteins are found inside the axon Depolarisation Change in the membrane potential. Inside of neurone becomes positive with respect to outside Voltage Gated sodium channels open Inflow of sodium ions down electrochemical gradient causes depolarisation The ‘all or nothing’ nature of a nerve impulse All action potentials are the same size and have a minimum threshold value for action potential to occur Myelin insulates axon depolarisation so ions can only pass through (plasma membrane of axon) at gaps in myelin sheath (nodes of Ranvier) impulse jumps from node to node (saltatory conduction). In non myelinated neurones depolarisation occurs along the entire length of membrane. Thus energy demand is lower in myelinated neurones as active transport of ions, for maintaining and restoring resting potential occurs only at the nodes, so less ATP required, less respiration needed
  • 59. 59 Reflexes (purpose) 1. Automatic (adjustments to changes in environment)/ involuntary; 2. Reducing/avoiding damage to tissues / prevents injury/named injury 3. Role in homeostasis/example; 4. Posture/balance; 5. Finding/obtaining food/mate/suitable conditions; 6. Escape from predators; Transmission at a synapse Presynaptic membrane depolarises; Calcium channels open; Calcium ions enter; Vesicles move to/fuse with presynaptic membrane; Release of transmitter by exocytosis; Diffusion across gap/cleft; Binds to receptors in postsynaptic membrane; Sodium channels open and sodium ions enter postsynaptic membrane G a n g l i o n c e l l s B i p o l a r c e l l s R o d c e l l C o n e c e l l A high degree of visual acuity: Cone cells (responsible for acuity); Each cone cell connected to an individual neurone; idea of light striking each individual cone cell to generate a separate action potential / impulse; very small area of retina stimulated, so very accurate vision; Visual sensitivity in low light levels: Rod cells (responsible for sensitivity); Several rods connected to each bipolar cell; Additive effect of small amount of light striking several rod cells; creating a large enough depolarisation to generate an action potential in the ganglion cell
  • 60. 60
  • 61. 61
  • 62. 62
  • 63. 63
  • 64. 64 Chemical (ligand) gated: found on the postsynaptic membrane, attachment of a neurotransmitter causes it to open. Some chemicals open sodium channels causing depolarisation (Excitatory) some open potassium channels or chlorine channels causing hyperpolarisation. Stretch mediated: Pacinian corpuscle
  • 65. 65 Describe the events which produce an action potential. 1 Stimulus to threshold / critical firing level; 2 Sodium channels/gates open; 3 Sodium ions enter; 4 Down electrical/chemical gradient; 5 Positive feedback; 6 Depolarisation; 7 Inside becomes positive / membrane potential reverses; 8 Potassium channels/gates open; 9 Potassium ions leave; 10 Down electrical/chemical gradient 11 Repolarisation; 12 Sodium channels/gates close; 13 Undershoot / hyperpolarisation; 14 Sodium-potassium pump restores resting potential; Describe the events which allow transmission to take place across the synapse (6) Increased permeability of (presynaptic) membrane to calcium ions; Ca 2+ enter; vesicles fuse with membrane; exocytosis of / release of acetylcholine / neurotransmitter diffuses across synaptic cleft; binds to receptors on postsynaptic membrane / side increased Na + permeability / opens sodium channels / depolarises membrane acetylcholine broken down by acetylcholinesterase; Reflexes: rapid involuntary repsonses to a stimulus. Rapid: Only involves 3 neurones: receptor, relay and effector neurone; myelination: saltatory conduction; Few synapses; chemical / synaptic transmission is slow OR electrical / nervous transmission is fast; Automatic does not necessarily involve passage to brain / only spinal cord; same pathway used each time; higher brain centres not involved / no thinking; How a resting potential is maintained in a neurone. Membrane less permeable to sodium ions gated channels are closed / fewer channels; Sodium ions actively transported out; By sodium ion carrier / intrinsic proteins; Higher concentration of sodium ions outside the neurone; Inside negative compared to outside / 3 sodium ions out for two potassium ions in Negatively charged proteins / large anions inside axon; Explain the importance of reflex actions. 1. Automatic (adjustments to changes in environment)/ involuntary; 2. Reducing/avoiding damage to tissues 3. Role in homeostasis/example; 4. Posture/balance; 5. Finding/obtaining food/mate/suitable conditions; 6. Escape from predators; When pressure is applied to a Pacinian corpuscle, an impulse is produced in its sensory neurone. Explain how. (Pressure) deforms and opens (sodium) channels Entry of sodium ions; Causes depolarisation (generator potential) Ions diffuse downstream and when threshold of nearby voltage gated channels is reached they open and sodium diffuses in causing depolarisation Describe how this action potential passes along the neurone.propagation. (Depolarisation of axon membrane causes) local currents to be set up; Change permeability (of adjoining region) to Na+/ o pen Na+ g ates (in adjoining region); sodium ions enter adjoining region; adjoining region depolarises; This process repeated along axon / self propagation; Correct reference to/description of saltatory conduction; Why impulses along a non-myelinated axon are slower than along a myelinated axon. Non-myelinated – next section of membrane depolarised / whole membrane; myelinated – depolarisation / ion movement only at nodes; impulse jumps from node to node /saltatory conduction The ‘all or nothing’ principle All action potentials are the same size; a minimum threshold value is needed for action potential to occur Transmission of information may be modified by summation. Summation = addition of a number of impulses converging on a single post synaptic neurone; allows integration of stimuli from a variety of sources (spatial summation); allows weak background stimuli to be filtered out before reaching the brain (temporal summation) Functions of the mitochondria in the synaptic bulb. Active transport of ions/ ionic pump; (reject active transport of Ach) Synthesis of acetylcholine / neurotransmitter/ reform vacuole; Reabsorption of acetylcholine, or acetyl + choline (from cleft); Movement of vesicles (to membrane); Synthesis of relevant enzyme, e.g. acetylcholinesterase. Why transmission in myleinated neurones uses less energy. Myelinated leads to saltatory conduction Active transport of ions is used less only at nodes of Ranvier; Less respiration needed less ATP needed; For repolarisation of ion balance;
  • 66. 66 Baroreceptors monitor the pressure of the blood flowing into and out from the heart Chemoreceptors monitor the pH of the blood flowing in the heart and the brain Rise in pressure stimulates heart to slow Pressure receptors (baroreceptors) in aorta and carotid sinus send impulses to cardio-inhibitory centre in the medulla Impulses are sent along the vagus nerves of the parasympathetic nervous system to SAN; The release of ACh decreases impulses from SAN and this decreases impulses to AVN decreased stimulation of AVN How exercise causes heart rate to increase Respiration increases CO2 produced acidity of blood increases Detected by chemoreceptors in aortic and carotid bodies and medulla Impulses to cardio accelerator centre More impulses along sympathetic nerves Noradrenaline released at SAN increase heart rate Higher pressure of blood in venous return (muscle contraction stronger) Detected by pressure receptors in aorta and carotid artery Impulses sent to the cardio acceleratory centre More impulses via sympathetic nerves affecting the SAN Changes in the heart rate are controlled by a region of the brain called the medulla. It has 2 regions CAC (linked to the SA node by sympathetic nervous system) – increases heart rate by increasing sympathetic stimulation to the heart releasing noradrenaline at the AVN, SAN and the cardiac fibres. It inhibits parasympathetic stimulation CIC (linked to the SA node by the parasympathetic nervous system): decreases cardiac output by inhibiting stimulation of the heart by the sympathetic system and increasing the activity parasympathetic system, where the vagus nerve release ACH at the SAN Mechanism of a heart beat Cardiac muscle is myogenic SAN sends out a wave of depolarisation across the atria Atrial systole occurs AVN relays the impulse to the ventricles (Impulse is delayed to allow time for the ventricles to fill) Impulse passes to the ventricles travelling down the Bundle of His and up the ventricular walls along the purkyne fibres causing ventricular systole
  • 67. 67 Muscles There are three types of muscle: • Skeletal muscle (striated, voluntary) This is always attached to the skeleton, and is under voluntary control via the motor neurones of the somatic nervous system. It can be subdivided into red (slow) muscle and white (fast) muscle. The striated appearance is due to the overlap of thick (myosin) and thin (actin filaments). • Cardiac Muscle This is special type of red skeletal muscle. It looks and works much like skeletal muscle, but is not attached to skeleton, and is not under voluntary control. • Smooth Muscle This is found in internal body organs such as the wall of the gut, the uterus, blood arteries and arterioles. It is under involuntary control via the autonomic nervous system or hormones. Muscles contain about 1000 fibres running the whole length of the muscle, joined together by tendons at the ends Fibres are single muscle cells. They are made from the fusion of many cells. They are multinucleate. They are packed with mitochondria, which provide ATP for contraction and uptake of calcium into the sarcoplasmic reticulum. The sarcoplasm is packed with myofibrils, bundles of filaments. A myofibril is made of repeating dark and light bands. There is a Z line in the middle of the light band and an M line in the middle of the dark band. Under very high resolution the myofibrils are shown to be made of filaments, there are two types, thick (myosin) and thin (actin) Myosin: Thick filament. Each molecule has a tail with two heads at the end. The tails meet at the M line of the A band. The myosin heads contains ATPase, an enzyme complex that hydrolyses ATP  ADP + Pi. Actin: thin filament. Chains of globular proteins. 2 chains are twisted round each other. At point of twist, myosin head binding site is located. Actin is associated with two other proteins 1) Troponin: attached at regular intervals along the chain, can bind calcium ions 2) Tropomyosin: lies in the grooves between the actin chains, blocking the myosin binding site Tropomyosin blocks the myosin binding site on the actin filament when the muscle is at rest. When calcium is released it binds to troponin and this causes the tropomyosin to shift position exposing the binding site for myosin.
  • 68. 68 Closer look at the myofibril banding pattern I-Band/Light band/Isotropic band: light passes through easily. Contains only actin filaments Dark Z line running down it, where proteins anchor the actin filaments Distance between Z lines = a sarcomere A-band/Dark band/Anisotropic band: Actin and myosin overlap Darker M line down the centre, proteins anchor filaments H-band, region in A band that is less dense as no overlap with actin here, only myosin present. Sarcomeres get shorter when the muscle contracts, so the whole muscle gets shorter. But the dark band, which represents the thick filament, does not change in length. This shows that the filaments don’t contract themselves, but instead they must slide past each other. This sliding filament theory The sarcomere shortens The I bands shortens as actin moves between the myosin The H band shortens or disappears as overlap between 2 filaments increases The A band does not change myosin does not move Energy for muscle contraction Muscle contraction requires ATP; this can be sourced form a variety of places 1) ATP stores in the muscle last for around 2-3 seconds of activity, produced by aerobic respiration 2) Regeneration of ATP from Creatine Phosphate/PC (without respiration). The hydrolysis of PC releases inorganic phosphate and energy which can be used to phosphorylate ADP  ATP. This is a coupled reaction as they occur together PC  P + C + energy ADP + P + energy  ATP 3) From anaerobic glycolysis. This produces lactic acid and some ATP. The build-up of lactic acid means that this process is short lived. The possible reasons for this are….. The change in pH (more acidic) affects the enzymes involved in glycolysis The increases in acidity affect the binding of calcium to troponin.
  • 69. 69 Neuromuscular Junction Nerve impulse depolarises the presynaptic membrane Calcium channels opened and calcium ions enter the presynaptic membrane Synaptic vesicles move towards and fuse with, the presynaptic membrane; Release of transmitter substance (Ach skeletal muscles or noradrenaline effcetors associated with the sympathetic nervous system) into synaptic cleft Diffusion of transmitter substance across cleft Attachment to receptor sites on intrinsic protein molecules on post synaptic membrane causes Ion gated sodium channels to open and sodium ion influx down concentration gradient Causing depolarisation of post synaptic membrane/sarcolemma;
  • 70. 70 Muscle fibres 1) White/fast twitch: (principally releases energy by anaerobic respiration) Speed of response is more important than sustained contraction Provide rapid and powerful contractions: hydrolyses ATP rapidly (ATP from CP/ATP or Glycolysis) Fewer mitochondria Low density of capillaries Low myoglobin concentration Extensive sarcoplasmic reticulum: rapid release and uptake of calcium More myosin filaments High concentration of anaerobic enzymes CP store Higher concentrations of ATPase than slow twitch so that ATP can be hydrolysed rapidly. Fatigue quickly and accumulate lactic acid 2) Red/slow twitch/tonic muscle fibres (principally releases energy by aerobic respiration) Slower, less powerful sustained contractions (endurance muscles) Many mitochondria (release energy) Dense capillary network (providing oxygen and glucose) High myoglobin (oxygen holding component of muscle) Glycogen store Small diameter giving short diffusion pathway High concentration of enzymes involved in aerobic respiration High resistance to fatigue Explain the advantage of having both fast and slow twitch fibres Fast fibres make immediate contraction possible before the blood supply adjusts Most energy anaerobically generated; fast fibres used in explosive locomotion; slow fibres allow sustained contraction Slow fibres used in maintaining posture/endurance events Respire / release energy aerobically; Or too much lactate would accumulate; Slow twitch fibres adapted to aerobic metabolism; As have many mitochondria; Site of Krebs’ cycle; And electron transport chain; Much ATP formed; Also are resistant to fatigue;
  • 71. 71 The I band = actin only (z line is dark line in middle of I band where proteins hold actin in place The A band = actin and myosin overlap. The H-zone is a lighter region within the A band where only actin is present. There is a dark line, the m-line here where proteins hold myosin in place Sarcomere = distance between z-line In contraction: sarcomere gets smaller, H-zone gets smaller, I-band gets smaller but…..the A band remains unchanged Transmission across the neuromuscular junction Nerve impulse depolarises the presynaptic membrane; calcium channels opened and calcium ions enter the presynaptic membrane; synaptic vesicles move towards and fuse with, the presynaptic membrane; release of transmitter substance (Ach skeletal muscles or noradrenaline effcetors associated with the sympathetic nervous system) into synaptic cleft diffusion of transmitter substance across cleft attachment to receptor sites on intrinsic protein molecules on post synaptic membrane causes ion gated sodium channels to open and sodium ion influx down concentration gradient; causing depolarisation of post synaptic membrane/sarcolemma; Describe role of ATP and Calcium in muscle contraction Calcium ions bind to troponin; Remove blocking action of tropomyosin and exposes actin binding sites; Calcium activates myosin ATPase and ATP is hydrolysed allowing myosin to form a cross-bridge ATP is required to break the cross bridge and to remove calcium form the sarcoplasm into the sarcoplasmic reticulum (active transport)
  • 72. 72 At rest the tropomyosin blocks the myosin binding site on the actin filament At rest the myosin head ATPase is inactive and the myosin is in its low energy configuration (the head bends back over the myosin tail. The muscle is in a relaxed state The depolarisation of the sarcolemma (an action potential) causes calcium to be released from the sarcoplasmic reticulum. This causes some important changes….. Calcium binds to troponin and causes a conformational change in the troponin- tropomyosin complex to expose the binding sites Calcium activates the myosin head ATPase and hydrolyses ATP. This causes the myosin to change into the high energy configuration where the myosin head is at a right angle to its tail and an acto-myosin cross bridge forms. Note the ADP and Pi remain attached The ADP and Pi are released from the myosin head and it reverts to the low energy configuration (power stroke) and pulls the actin filament across as it goes. The cross bridge is broken when a second ATP molecule attaches to the myosin head The ATP for muscle contraction comes from the following… From ATP stored in muscle (2-3 secs worth) Anaerobic glycolysis  leads to lactic acid Aerobic respiration Alactic system, phosphocreatine (PC) Break down of PC releases energy and inorganic P. The inorganic P is attached to ADP using the energy released from PC hydrolysis, this is a coupled reaction. Lactic acid prevents muscle contraction because Affects enzymes involved in ATP production Affects the binding of calcium to protein troponin
  • 73. 73 Plants can sense and respond to stimuli. Many of these responses are directional growth responses, called tropisms. Tropisms can be positive (growing towards the stimulus) or negative (growing away from the stimulus) and occur in response to a variety of stimuli: From these experiments (1-3) the Darwins concluded that light is detected only at the shoot tip, and an “influence” was transmitted from the tip down the shoot to cause bending further down. They had no idea what this “influence” was. Frits Went (4-6) showed that the “influence” was a chemical. He knew that seedlings with their tips cut off would not grow, while seedlings with an intact tip would. So he cut off the tips off growing seedlings, placed them on small blocks of agar for two hours, and then placed the agar blocks on top of cut seedlings in the dark. Agar jelly allows chemicals to diffuse through but contains no living cells, and a control experiment using agar blocks that had not been in contact with shoot tips did not promote growth. Went concluded that a chemical substance had diffused from the shoot tip into the agar, and that this substance stimulated growth further down the shoot. He called this substance auxin. In the 1960s Winslow Briggs (7-9) used Went’s method (experiment 6) to assay the amount of auxin in plant material. He found that the greater the amount of auxin, the greater the bending. In the experiments below the numbers refer to the angle of bending and therefore to the amount of auxin. These discoveries are summarised in the Cholodny-Went theory, which states that auxin is synthesized in the coleoptile tip; asymmetric illumination is detected by the coleoptile tip and this causes auxin to move into the darker side; auxin diffuses down the coleoptile; and the higher auxin concentration on the darker side causes the coleoptile to bend toward the light source. Although there is a lot of evidence supporting this theory, it is by no means certain and some recent studies using radioactive tracers have found no difference in IAA concentration on the dark and light sides of a shoot. An alternative mechanism is that IAA is present on both sides but is somehow inhibited on the light side, so there is little growth. How does auxin work? In 1934 auxin was identified as a compound called indoleacetic acid, or IAA. It was the first of a group of substances controlling plant growth responses called plant growth regulators, or PGRs. PGRs are a bit like animal hormones, but the term hormones is not used for plants because PGRs are not made in glands and do not travel in blood. IAA is hydrophobic so it can diffuse through cell membranes and so move around the plant. IAA stimulates growth by: 1. Binding to a receptor protein in the target cell membranes and activating a proton pump. 2. This pump pumps protons (hydrogen ions) from the cytoplasm of these cells to their cell walls. 3. The resulting decrease in pH activates an enzyme that breaks the bonds between cellulose microfibrils. 4. This loosens the cell wall and so allows the cell to elongate under the internal turgor pressure.
  • 74. 74 Explain how the body of a mammal may respond to a rise in the environmental temperature. Reducing body temp Hot receptors in skin; nervous impulse; to hypothalamus; blood temperature monitored; heat loss centre involved; vasodilation / dilation of arterioles; more blood to surface / heat lost by radiation; piloerector muscles relax; hairs flatten on skin surface; less insulation; sweating initiated / increased; panting / licking; evaporation removes latent heat; drop in metabolic rate / use less brown fat; accept long term changes such as less fat deposition; thinner fur; migration; accept one behavioural process; Cross-channel swimmers experience a large decrease in external temperature when they enter the water. Describe the processes involved in thermoregulation in response to this large decrease in external temperature. (7) Raising body temp 1. hypothalamus (contains the thermoregulatory centre); 2.has receptors which detect temperature changes of blood; 3.receives impulses from receptors in skin; 4.nerve impulses transmitted (from hypothalamus / brain); 5.results in vasoconstriction / constriction of arterioles / dilation of shunt vessels; 6.diversion of blood to core / specified organ / less blood to skin; 7.muscular contraction /shivering generates heat via respiration; 8.release of thyroxine / adrenaline; 9.increase in metabolic rate / respiration; 10.correct reference to negative feedback mechanisms; Describe the role of insulin in the control of blood glucose concentration. (4) increase in blood sugar leads to lower blood sugar (homeostatic principle)/ (more) insulin secreted; binds to (specific) receptors on (liver/muscle) cells; leads to more glucose entering cells/carrier activity/ increased permeability to glucose; glucose leaves the blood; glucose entering cell converted to glycogen; Describe how a small amount of glucagon in the body could cause a rapid increase in the concentration of glucose in the blood plasma. (3) Ref to cascade / amplification effect; 1 >1 molecule of cyclic AMP formed per glucagon (molecule); each cyclic AMP activates >1 enzyme(molecule) ; each enzyme causes breakdown of >1 glycogen (molecule); each glycogen gives >1 glucose / glycogen is a polymer; glucose diffuses into blood / glucose moves high to low concentration; 12 (b) Explain how the hormone glucagon brings about its changes in the body. It acts on liver cells; causing conversion of glycogen into glucose; via action of an enzyme; gluconeogenesis; Negative feedback An initial stimulus causes a response that reduces the magnitude of the initial stimulus Positive feedback A stimulus causes a response that intensifies the initial input
  • 75. 75 Hormones… Chemicals secreted from endocrine glands Carried in the blood stream to their target organs Target organs have specific receptors that compliment the shape of the hormone 2nd Messenger Model/cascade effect of hormones Hormone (1st messenger) does not enter the cell but attaches to a receptor on the cell membrane Attachment starts a cascade system through the action of a second messenger cAMP Example of cascade effect specific to glucagon Attachment of 1 molecule of glucagon activates an enzyme adenylate cyclase 1 Active Adenylate cyclase converts many molecules of ATP  to many cAMP’s Each molecule of cAMP activates more than one glycogen phosphorylase enzyme Each glycogen phosphorylase enzyme catalyses the hydrolysis of more than one glycogen molecule Each glycogen molecule is made up of many glucose monomers In this process a small amount of a hormone (glucagon) causes a series of amplified steps that causes a big response. Hormones are…. Small molecules Transported in the plasma Effective in small amounts
  • 76. 76 Blood temperature monitored by thermoreceptors in hypotahlamus Environmental temperature monitored by thermoreceptors in skin send impulses to… Environmental temperature monitored by thermoreceptors in skin send impulses to… H Y P O T H A L A M U S Cooling Down Thermoreceptors in skin detect rise in environmental temperature and send impulses to the hypothalamus Thermorecptors in the hypothalamus detect rise in blood temperature Heat loss centre is stimulated (parasympathetic nerves mainly involved) Impulses sent via parasympathetic nerves to the precapillary sphincters in arterioles and they relax causing vasodilation allowing more blood to flow in the capillaries in the surface of the skin causing more heat loss by radiation Impulses along parasympathetic nerves cause erector pilli muscles to relax so hairs lie flat reducing the layer of insulating air Increased impulses along the sympathetic nerves causes an increase in sweating. The high latent heat of vaporisation of water uses heat energy from the body thus cooling the body down. Heat loss by the evaporation of water in sweat. Metabolic rate decreases Warming Up Thermoreceptors in skin detect rise in environmental temperature and send impulses to the hypothalamus Thermorecptors in the hypothalamus detect rise in blood temperature Heat gain centre is stimulated (mainly sympathetic nerves involved here) 2 responses- heat conservation and heat generation Conservation Vasoconstriction impulses sent along the sympathetic nerves cause pre capillary sphincters in arterioles to contract and reduce blood flow in the capillaries supplying the skin. Blood is diverted through the arteriovenous shunt vessel, so less heat loss by radiation occurs. Piloerection impulses along the sympathetic nerves to the erector pili muscles cause them to contract and the hair stands up trapping a layer of insulating air Trapped layer of air warms up and reduces the temperature gradient between the blood and environment. Reduced sweating, impulses via the parasympathetic nerves causes less sweating Generation Shivering- increased muscle activity, increases respiration, releasing heat energy that transfers to blood flowing through the organs. Increased metabolism- due to increase in release of adrenaline from adrenal glands and increased thyroxine from the thyroid glands. Brown fat oxidation (infants and animals). Rich in mitochondria and oxidation of fat releases heat energy. Brown fat is located at the back of the neck and warms blood flowing to the brain
  • 77. 77
  • 78. 78 P l a s m a g l u c o s e c o n c e n t r a t i o n N o f o o d f r o m t h i s p o i n t o n K e y C h a n g e i n t h i s p e r i o d d u e t o g l u c a g o n C h a n g e i n t h i s p e r i o d d u e t o i n s u l i n T i m e Describe how blood glucose concentration is controlled by hormones in an individual who is not affected by diabetes. Insulin / glucagon secreted by pancreas / islets of Langerhans; Hormone receptors in membrane (of target cells); (insulin stimulates) conversion of glucose to glycogen / glycogenesis: activates / involves enzymes; stimulates uptake by cells; conversion of glucose to lipid / protein; glucagon stimulates conversion of glycogen to glucose;/ glycogenolysis; glucagon stimulates conversion of lipid / protein to glucose / gluconeogenesis; G l u c a g o n R e c e p t o r C e l l s u r f a c e m e m b r a n e A T P C y c l i c A M P G l y c o g e n G l u c o s e A c t i v e e n z y m e I n a c t i v e e n z y m e A d e n y l a t e c y c l a s e } How the cascade effect works with hormones Ref to cascade / amplification effect; >1 molecule of cyclic AMP formed per glucagon (molecule); each cyclic AMP activates >1 enzyme(molecule) ; each enzyme causes breakdown of >1 glycogen (molecule); each glycogen gives >1 glucose / glycogen is a polymer; glucose diffuses into blood / glucose moves high to low concentration; Use evidence from the graph to explain the role of negative feedback in the control of plasma glucose concentration. (5) 1. Deviation of a value from norm initiates corrective mechanisms; 2. Fluctuations in plasma glucose concentration detected by hypothalmus/islet cells in pancreas; 3. Initial decrease, no food given (in plasma glucose) stimulates (increased) secretion of glucagon; 4. Increases (in plasma glucose) stimulate (increased) secretion of insulin; 5. Correct ref. to role of  and/or  cells as secretors; 6. Correct ref. to interconversion of glycogen / glucose; 7. Increased/decreased uptake of glucose by cells (as appropriate)/correct ref to change in membrane permeability;
  • 79. 79 Fasting blood glucose level: this is the amount of glucose in the blood after fasting overnight (about 10hours). It tells us the amount of glucose required by the cells to maintain resting metabolic rate Diabetes is a condition in which there are higher than normal blood glucose levels in the body. Symptoms can be, excessive thirst, hunger and urination. Sweet smelling breath (Ketosis: due to the high level of ketones form fat metabolism), glucose in the urine. Type I- pancreas does not secrete enough insulin Type II – liver no longer responds to insulin Pancreas monitors and controls the BGL The organ has both endocrine and exocrine properties Endocrine secreting hormones into the blood vessels Exocrine properties secreting enzymes into ducts The endocrine tissue of the pancreas is called the Islets of Langerhans. this contains two types of cells Alpha cells Secreting glucagon Causes glycogenolysis (glycogen  glucose) Through the action of glycogen phosphorylase Beta cells Secreting insulin Causes glycogenesis (glucose  glycogen) Through the action of glycogen synthase Role of insulin Binds to specific receptors on the membrane and opens channel proteins in the membrane increasing the permeability of the cells (mainly in the liver and muscle) to glucose Increases respiration so that more glucose is used Causes the activation of enzymes involved in the conversion of glucose to glycogen (glycogenesis) Causes the conversion of glucose into fat in adipose tissue Role of glucagon Only affects the liver cells Acts through the cascade effect through a second messenger Causes the activation of an enzyme (glycogen phosphorylase) that causes the hydrolysis of glycogen to glucose. It also encourages the formation of glucose from non glucose substrates (amino acids, fatty acids) in a process called gluconeogensis Adrenaline (sometimes called epinephrine) causes increased glycogenolysis
  • 80. 80 1. FSH is secreted by the pituitary glands, and stimulates the development of a Graafian follicle in one of the ovaries. This follicle contains a single ovum cell surrounded by other calls. 2. The follicle secretes oestrogen, which stimulates the uterus to rebuild the endometrium wall that has been shed during menstruation. Oestrogen also affects the pituitary gland, initially inhibiting the release of FSH. However, as the follicle gradually develops, the concentration of oestrogen in the blood rises, and it starts to stimulate the release of FSH and LH by the pituitary gland. 3. The sudden surge of LH at about day 14 causes the fully developed follicle to burst, release the ovum in the oviduct – ovulation. LH also stimulates the follicle to develop into a body called the corpus luteum, which secretes progesterone. 4. Progesterone stimulates the uterus to complete the development of the endometrium wall, which is now ready to receive an embryo. Progesterone also inhibits the release of LH and FSH by the pituitary gland, which in turn stops the release of oestrogen and progesterone by the ovaries. 5. The corpus luteum degenerates over the next 10 days, due to prostaglandins produces by the ovary, so less progesterone is secreted. When the concentration of progesterone drops low enough menstruation is triggered. The inhibition of the pituitary gland is also removed, so FSH starts to be released and the cycle starts again. If an egg is fertilised and the embryo implants in the uterus, the embryo secretes a hormone called human chorionic gonadotrophin (HCG). HCG stops the corpus luteum degenerating, so progesterone continues to be produced and there is no menstruation. Progesterone also stops the pituitary releasing FSH, so no more ova are matured during pregnancy. Pregnancy test kits test for the presence of small amounts of HCG in the urine. The menstrual cycle in humans is controlled by four hormones secreted by two glands. • The pituitary gland, below the hypothalamus in the brain, secretes the hormones follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) and luteinising hormone (LH), which target the ovaries. • The ovaries are endocrine organs as well as creating and releasing ova. They secrete the hormones oestrogen and progesterone, which target the pituitary gland and the uterus. The effects of these four hormones are shown in this diagram.
  • 81. 81 During the oestrous cycle in a mammal, one or more follicles mature. Ovulation then takes place. Describe the part played by hormones in controlling these events. (6) FSH secreted by pituitary gland; Stimulates growth of follicle; Ovary/follicle cells produce oestrogen; Negative feedback/inhibits secretion of FSH; Oestrogen stimulates secretion of LH/LH from pituitary; LH stimulating ovulation; Second increase in FSH also associated with ovulation; Explain how oral contraceptives containing progesterone and oestrogen work. (5) Oestrogen inhibits FSH; prevents follicle developing; progesterone inhibits LH; also inhibits FSH; inhibits ovulation; FSH and LH bring about ovulation Describe the role of hormones in controlling the development of the changes associated with puberty in girls. (6) Production of FSH/LH/pituitary hormones; Stimulate ovary/follicle development; Producing oestrogen; Oestrogen stimulating breast development; Oestrogen stimulating pelvic girdle growth; Androgen secretion; Androgens responsible for growth spurt/pubic hair development; Growth hormone also involved; Explain how the different components of nervous system are involved in the cooling an animal down (6) (b) Stimulus is increased blood temperature; Increase in temperature results from exercise/respiration/metabolism; Detected by receptors in hypothalamus; Hypothalamus is coordinator; In this case, the heat loss centre; Effectors are muscles; Of arteriole; Response involves vasodilation; Increased blood flow to capillaries; Allowing heat loss by radiation/convection; Correct reference to action potential/nerve impulse; Describe how the body responds to a rise in core body temperature. (5) Temperature receptors stimulated in; (in skin disqualifies) hypothalamus; heat loss centre stimulated; nerve impulses to sweat glands; increase rate of / start sweat production; nerve impulses to skin arterioles; vasodilation (ref to vessels moving disqualifies) Explain how the body of a mammal may respond to a rise in the environmental temperature. Hot receptors in skin; nervous impulse; to hypothalamus; blood temperature monitored; heat loss centre involved; vasodilation / dilation of arterioles; more blood to surface / heat lost by radiation; piloerector muscles relax; hairs flatten on skin surface; less insulation; sweating initiated / increased; panting / licking; evaporation removes latent heat; drop in metabolic rate / use less brown fat; accept long term changes such as less fat deposition; thinner fur; migration; accept one behavioural process;Describe the important differences between the nervous and hormonal co–ordination systems found in a mammal.(4) Rapid / slow; direct / broadcast; short lived/ long term; mainly electrical ; chemical; delivery via nerves / blood vessels; cause depolarisation of target cell membrane / receptors in membrane of target cell; Explain how normal core body temperature is maintained when a person moves into a cold room. (5) 1. Sensors in skin/hypothalmus detect reduced temperature; 2. heat gain centre activated/inhibition of heat loss centre; 3. vasoconstriction/constriction of arterioles in skin surface; (R capillaried) 4. dilation of shunt vessels/constriction of – capillary sphincter; 5. less blood to skin surface/capillaries 6. reduced heat loss by radiation; 7. incresed heat gain by increased metabolic rate/respiration/ movement/shivering; 8. decreased heat loss by putting on clothes/huddling/reduced sweating; During exercise, much heat is generated. Describe the homeostatic mechanisms that restore normal body temperature following vigorous exercise.(5) Receptors in hypothalamus detect increase in core temperature / temperature of blood; Heat loss centre stimulated; Skin arteries / arterioles dilate / vasodilation; Shunt vessels / pre-capillary sphincters constrict; More blood flows to surface (capillaries); Heat loss by radiation; Heat loss by evaporation of sweat; Reduced metabolic rate; Remove clothing / seek cooler area / cold drink;
  • 82. 82 Use a gene probe to locate the desired gene Remove using a restriction enzyme Cuts at recognition sequence/restriction site Typically a palindromic sequence GAATTC CTTAAG Can produce sticky ends Or blunt ends Use reverse transcriptase on mRNA from cell producing gene product cDNA formed Use nucleotides and DNA polymerase to make gene Why It’s better to use mRNA Than look for one gene among the many in the nucleus Large amounts of mRNA can be obtained from the cell producing the protein The introns are removed Plasmid = vector A carrier that transfers genetic material from one organism to the next Cut with the same restriction enzyme Gene and plasmid anneal by H- bonds between complementary base pairs DNA ligase forms phosphate sugar bonds in the covalent backbone Getting the recombinant genetic material into the bacteria Heat shock: Incubate, recombinant plasmids, with bacteria and calcium ions at 00 C Raise temperature to 420 C suddenly Low success rate Other methods Electroporation: voltage across cell membrane Or use a virus, adapted to get genetic material inside host cells Gene markers A marker gene is a gene used in molecular biology to determine if a nucleic acid sequence has been successfully inserted into an organism's DNA Selective: targets a feature that normally protects the organism form harm, antibiotic resistance genes Screening Changes organisms appearance (GFP) or metabolism (enzyme marker) Faster than using the selective markers Replica plating Use R- plasmid with resistance to 2 antibiotics Insert desired gene within gene for tetracycline resistance Transformed bacteria have ampicillin resistance not to tetracycline. Grow on ampicillin plate Those that grow have a plasmid (may not be recombinant) Create replica, tetracycline plate Missing colonies have recombinant plasmid Fertility segment removed from the plasmid to prevent conjugation (transfer of genetic material between organisms. Reduces the risk of other organisms getting the gene
  • 83. Remember this process has a low success rate. When trying to make recombinant plasmids there are several possible outcomes (recombinant plasmid, reformed plasmid and rings of sample DNA . When trying to transform the bacteria there are three possible outcomes. So we must identify the bacteria that have been transformed 83 Replica plating Bacteria are spread on ampicillin agar to get separate colonies Bacteria containing plasmids will survive Replica plate with tetracycline produced Colonies transferred using nylon/felt material Bacteria growing on ampicillin but not tetracycline have recombinant plasmid Ampicillin plate Tetracycline plate
  • 84. 84 Isolation of a gene: 1) Restriction enzymes (restriction endonucleases): The enzymes have very specific active sites that hydrolyse the phosphodiester bond in DNA backbone These cut DNA at specific base sequences (recognition sequences) They are produced naturally by bacteria (defence against viruses) and are named after the bacteria from which they are sourced. There are 1000s of types with unique active sites and hence recognition sequences. These recognition sequences are usually palindromic sequences, meaning that they read the same both ways, they are 4-8 base pairs long. GAATTC CTTAAG Usually they make a staggered cut and produce sticky ends: short sections on unpaired bases (single stranded DNA) Sometimes they cut straight across and make blunt ends The resulting products are called restriction fragments The resulting sticky ends can anneal with other sticky ends produced by the action of the same restriction enzyme DNA ligase Repairs the DNA by joining nucleotides and reforming the phosphodiester bonds in backbone Reverse transcriptase An enzyme produced by Retroviruses, who have their genetic information as RNA. Reverse transcriptase converts RNA to DNA It is used to generate DNA sequences for a gene. Only certain genes are expressed in cells. So if we know what cell expresses the gene we want (e.g. insulin) then we know these cells will have the mRNA for the protein. mRNA is extracted and mixed with reverse transcriptase forming cDNA. The cDNA is heated with DNA nucleotides and polymerase. Why use reverse transcriptase……. 1) The resulting DNA does not have the introns (genes with introns are too big to be incorporated into the bacterial plasmids, plus bacteria cannot splice out the introns, so the cDNA can be expressed by bacteria 2) A large amount of mRNA can be acquired 3) Do not have to locate and cut the gene among the 1000s in the nucleus 4) It forms a stable copy of the gene, as DNA is less easily broken down than RNA
  • 85. 85 In Vivo gene cloning (in vivo: means using a whole living organism, not just part, here the plasmid and then bacteria are used to amplify the gene.) We have seen that we can obtain a desired gene by using restriction enzyme to cut at specific palindromic recognition sites/restriction sequences or by using reverse transcriptase to make cDNA from mRNA (removed from a cell that produces a the desired protein). We can determine the gene by gene sequencing or analysing the amino acids making up the protein and working out the codons for these. Now we must use the gene. We can amplify Clone the gene) the amount of it using in vivo techniques or as discussed later, in vitro techniques (PCR). Using in vivo we can both amplify the gene and have the gene expressed. The diagram below shows how a gene can be incorporated into a plasmid using restriction and ligase enzymes. 1. A restriction enzyme is used to cut the gene from the donor DNA, with sticky ends. 2. The same restriction enzyme cuts the plasmid in the middle of one of the marker genes (we’ll see why this is useful later). But use of the same restriction enzyme produces complimentary sticky ends 3. The gene and plasmid are mixed in a test tube and they anneal because they were cut with the same restriction enzyme and have the same sticky ends. 4. The fragments are joined covalently by DNA ligase to form a hybrid vector/recombinant plasmid (in other words a mixture or hybrid of bacterial and foreign DNA). 5. Several other products are also formed: some plasmids will simply re-anneal with themselves to re-form the original plasmid, and some DNA fragments will join together to form chains or circles. These different products cannot easily be separated, but it doesn’t matter, as the marker genes can be used later to identify the correct hybrid vector. Vectors: something that carries genetic material form one organism to another Characteristics The vector must be able to replicate once inside the host It must have more than one recognition site for the restriction enzyme to cut It should have some form of genetic marker to make it identifiable Easily integrated into the host Easy to obtain and handle Plasmids make good vectors because They are big enough to hold the genes we want It is circular so is less likely to be broken down It contains control sequences (transcription promoter) so the gene is replicated and expressed They often contain marker genes in the form of antibiotic resistance that serve as recognition sites for the endonucleases They are separate to the main DNA The negative aspect of using plasmids as vectors is that relatively small genes must be inserted into them Viral vectors Advantages: They are adapted to gain entry to the host cells They are often host specific with regard to infection They can integrate their DNA into that of the host Disadvantages: But they can trigger an immune response Uptake may be sporadic as some viruses (retro viruses) only infect dividing cells The expression of the gene is not always guaranteed as it is not inserted into the chromosome. Why clone a gene? A particular gene can be isolated and its nucleotide sequence determined Control sequences of DNA can be identified & analyzed Protein/enzyme/RNA function can be investigated Mutations can be identified, e.g. gene defects related to specific diseases Organisms can be ‘engineered’ for specific purposes, e.g. insulin production, insect resistance, etc. Genetic fingerprinting
  • 86. 86 Advantages of in vivo Very little risk of contamination as it is based around the annealing of complementary sticky ends that must be produced using restriction enzymes, unlikely any contaminating DNA will possess these. Accuracy of copying is greater than that of PCR It can be used to produce active proteins rather than just the gene itself, as the bacteria will translate the gene that has been integrated into its genome. Disadvantages of in vivo Slow process as the gene must be identified; removed, added to the plasmid, then the bacteria must be transformed, identified and cultured The success rate of transformation is very low The success rate of recombination is very low Large amounts of DNA needed Needs pure intact DNA Takes a few days to complete Transformation: Transformation means inserting new DNA (usually a recombinant plasmid) into a living cell (called a host cell), which is thus genetically modified, or transformed. A transformed cell can replicate and express the genes in the new DNA. DNA is a large molecule that does not readily cross cell membranes, so the membranes must be made permeable in some way. There are different ways of doing this depending on the type of host cell. These methods are outlined below Heats shock: host cell and vector are incubated together in a solution containing calcium ions and 00 C. The temperature is suddenly raised to 400 C. This causes some cells to transform. It works well on bacteria and animal cells. Electroporation: high voltage pulse disrupts the membrane and allows the vector to enter Viruses: as mentioned above, mainly as their mechanism of infection relies on getting to genes into a host cell. The viruses must be genetically engineered so they can’t reproduce themselves and they are non-toxic. Micro-Injection. To transform individual cells, such as fertilised animal egg cells, the DNA is injected directly into the nucleus using an incredibly fine micro-pipette. Gene Gun. Tiny gold particles coated with DNA can be fired at plant cells using a compressed air gun. The particles can penetrate the tough cell wall and deliver the DNA to the nucleus. Plant Tumours. Plant cells are infected with a transformed bacterium, which inserts its plasmid into the plant cells' chromosomal DNA. Whole new plants are grown from these cells by micropropagation. Liposomes. Human cells in vivo can be transformed by DNA encased in liposomes, which fuse with the cell membrane, delivering the DNA into the cell. Viruses. Human cells in vivo can be infected by genetically-engineered viruses, which deliver the DNA into host cells. The viruses must first be made it safe, so they can’t cause disease.
  • 87. 87 Marker Genes Marker genes (or reporter genes) are used to find which cells have actually taken up the hybrid vector Selective markers: The R plasmid. This plasmid contains the genes for resistance to two antibiotics Tetracycline Ampicilin The restriction enzyme cuts at the gene for tetracycline, The gene is inserted into this gene The plasmid no longer carries the resistance to tetracycline but is still resistant to ampicillin So all bacteria that took up a plasmid (irrespective of whether it is the original reformed plasmids or the recombinant) are resistant to ampicillin. The bacteria are grown on agar containing ampicillin and any that grow have taken up some form of plasmid A replica plate is made but this time it contains tetracycline. So where the bacteria are no missing (didn’t grow on the replica) it means the plasmid they took up was the recombinant plasmid. So replica plating can be used to identify transformed bacteria. Marker genes and Replica plating Bacteria are spread on ampicillin agar to get separate colonies Bacteria containing plasmids (recombinant or original reformed) will survive Replica plate with tetracycline produced Colonies transferred using nylon/felt material Bacteria growing on ampicillin but not tetracycline have recombinant plasmid Identification of transformed cell using gene markers Identification of the cell with the recombinant plasmid Some key things to remember are this………… Some plasmids will have re-joined without taking up the gene we want Some plasmids will now be recombinant Some cells have not taken up any plasmid Some have taken up foreign genetic material (DNA loop) So the cells with the recombinant plasmid must be identified using gene markers The markers can be selective or screening markers. Selective markers: protects the organism from a selective agent that would normally kill it (antibiotics) Screening marker: These markers will make the cell look or behave (metabolically) different.
  • 88. 88 Why clone a gene? A particular gene can be isolated and its nucleotide sequence determined Control sequences of DNA can be identified & analyzed Protein/enzyme/RNA function can be investigated Mutations can be identified, e.g. gene defects related to specific diseases Organisms can be ‘engineered’ for specific purposes, e.g. insulin production, insect resistance, etc. Genetic fingerprinting Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR): (In vitro gene cloning) The amplification of small quantities of DNA This is basically DNA replication in a test tube It requires some key materials DNA polymerase: sourced form thermophilic bacteria, making it very heat stable Free nucleotides: that can form H-bonds with the template strands Primers: short sections of DNA that are complimentary to bases at one of the ends of the DNA. They are crucial as DNA polymerase can only add new nucleotides to an existing chain; it also prevents the original strands from annealing (re-joining), ensures only target sequences are copied, those that lie between the primers Three key stages involved Separation of DNA at 95o C: this is usually done by DNA helicase during in vivo replication. In this process high temperature are used to break the H bonds between the bases. Annealing of primers at 55o C: the mixture is cooled to 55o C and the primers attach to their complementary bases. This provides the starting point for the DNA polymerase to begin copying the DNA Synthesis of DNA: the temperature is raised to 720 C. This is the optimum temperature for the DNA polymerase; it begins to add free nucleotides to the primers. Heat stable DNA polymerase is used as it can work at a higher temperature and so the reaction takes place faster The whole cycle takes about 2 minutes meaning that a lot of DNA can be rapidly produced. Advantages of in vitro Small amounts of genetic material can be used and amplified The amplification is rapid Degraded (damaged/old DNA can be used) Can be completed in a few hours Disadvantages of in vitro Any contamination is amplified It takes time to make primers and DNA sequence must be known at least in part Increased frequency of copying error Any copying errors will be copied at each subsequent cycle DNA is not expressed
  • 89. Advantages of in vitro Small amounts of genetic material can be used and amplified The amplification is rapid Degraded (damaged/old DNA can be used) Can be completed in a few hours Disadvantages of in vitro Any contamination is amplified It takes time to make primers and DNA sequence must be known at least in part Increased frequency of copying error Any copying errors will be copied at each subsequent cycle DNA is not expressed Advantages of in vivo Very little risk of contamination as it is based around the annealing of complementary sticky ends that must be produced using restriction enzymes, unlikely any contaminating DNA will possess these. Accuracy of copying is greater than that of PCR It can be used to produce active proteins rather than just the gene itself, as the bacteria will translate the gene that has been integrated into its genome. Disadvantages of in vivo Slow process as the gene must be identified; removed, added to the plasmid, then the bacteria must be transformed, identified and cultured The success rate of transformation is very low The success rate of recombination is very low Large amounts of DNA needed Needs pure intact DNA Takes a few days to complete Why clone a gene? A particular gene can be isolated and its nucleotide sequence determined Control sequences of DNA can be identified & analyzed Protein/enzyme/RNA function can be investigated Mutations can be identified, e.g. gene defects related to specific diseases Organisms can be ‘engineered’ for specific purposes, e.g. insulin production, insect resistance, etc. 89
  • 90. 90 Transcription (DNA  mRNA) The start of each gene is marked by a promoter (sequence of bases) Section of DNA unzips (H-bonds break, DNA helicase) Free RNA nucleotides line up to complementary bases on the antisense strand U replaces T in mRNA RNA polymerase joins the nucleotides Pre mRNA strand is formed Pre mRNA is modified, introns removed, exons spliced by enzymes Mature mRNA leaves the nucleus Compare replication and transcription Alike H bonds break/DNA unwinds/DNA unzips; between (complementary) bases; DNA acts as a template for complimentary base complementary nucleotides/bases added/DNA acts as template; same, correctly named, enzymes e.g. polymerase; Different Uracil replaces thymine all copied in replication or only section copied in transcription Only one strand is used as a template in transcription (antisense strand), both strands are used in replication RNA polymerase in transcription whereas DNA polymerase is sued in replication mRNA is produced in transcription, DNA is produced in replication
  • 91. 91 Translation (protein synthesis) mRNA moves into cytoplasm through nuclear pore to ribosome; mRNA read in codons / triplets anticodon of tRNA which is complimentary to the codon of mRNA matches up; The tRNA carries specific amino acid; ATP used in activation / joining amino acids; amino acids join by peptide bonds; In condensation recations This requires energy tRNA used repeatedly as it is released and collects another amino acid; sequence of bases / codons determines sequence of amino acids the primary structure of the protein
  • 92. Transcription factors Switch on the desired gene These are activated from an inactive form By hormones usually (oestrogen example) Transcription factor attaches to promoter region by gene to be transcribed Transcription initiation complex forms RNA polymerase can attach Transcription (DNA  mRNA) The start of each gene is marked by a promoter (sequence of bases) Section of DNA unzips (H-bonds break, DNA helicase) Free RNA nucleotides line up to complementary bases on the antisense strand U replaces T in mRNA RNA polymerase joins the nucleotides Pre mRNA strand is formed Pre mRNA is modified, introns removed, exons spliced Mature mRNA leaves the nucleus Translation (protein synthesis) mRNA enters the ribosomes Read as base triplets (codons) tRNA with complementary anticodon Carries specific amino acid Peptide bonds form between adjacent amino acids (condensation reaction) ATP is required 92 siRNA: this is involved in post transcriptional regulation of translation. siRNA is formed from the hydrolysis of longer pieces of double stranded RNA. It is then split into single strands by an endonuclease. The passenger strand is no longer required and the guide strand is incorporated into the RNA Interference Specificity Complex (RISC). This complex moves to a region on the mRNA stand with a complementary base sequence and the mRNA is then cleaved, thus preventing translation.
  • 93. Mutation: change in the structure or quantity of genetic material. Occur naturally, but the frequency can be increased by mutagenic agents like: X-rays, Benzene, Uranium, Gamma Rays, UV light, high energy radiation The length of exposure and the size of the dose may influence whether mutations occur DNA base sequence determines the mRNA sequence; this determines the order of amino acids assembled at the ribosomes. The primary structure determine how H-bonds form between the amino acids during folding for the secondary structure, further folding then ensues to form the tertiary structure of the protein. Silent mutations do not result in a change to the amino acid sequence of a protein. They may occur in a non- coding region (outside of a gene or within an intron), or they may occur within an exon in a manner that does not alter the final amino acid sequence. This happens when the change is on the third base of a codon, due to the degeneracy of the genetic code, most amino acids have more than one codon, differing only in the third base. So the genetic code is more likely to tolerate mutations in the third base This mutation alters the codon so that when it is transcribed a different amino acid will be put in place. This can have a big effect if the amino acid is crucial to the bonding in folding of the protein or if it acts as a part of the active site of an enzyme. However, if an amino acid with similar properties is coded for, or the amino acid was not involved in the folding of the chain or the functioning of the enzyme, then it may not be a serious mutation. With a nonsense mutation, the new nucleotide changes a codon that specified an amino acid to one of the STOP codons (TAA, TAG, or TGA). Therefore, translation of the messenger RNA 93
  • 94. transcribed from this mutant gene will stop prematurely. The earlier in the gene that this occurs, the more truncated the protein product and the more likely that it will be unable to function. This is caused by addition or deletion of bases. Changes the way the codons are read (causes a frame shift) and as such changes the primary sequence of amino acids. This will affect the folding of the protein and may result in a non-functioning protein. CFTR protein in cystic fibrosis is a result of deletion 94
  • 95. 95 Electrophoresis Separates DNA (restriction fragments) due to differences in the length. Short fragments will travel further than long fragments in a given time It uses an aragose or polyacrylamide gel covered in a buffer solution It works because an electric current is applied across the gel, and the nucleotides contain a negatively charged phosphate group, so DNA moves toward the positive anode. Visualising the DNA Staining: using chemicals to stain the DNA blue or fluorescent molecules so the DNA appears under UV light. These chemicals are included in the gel and are picked up by the DNA as it diffuses through the gel Radiolabelling (autoradiography): DNA samples are radioactively labelled with an isotope of phosphate (P32 ). When the gel is completed, photographic film is placed on top of the gel in the dark for a few hours. The radiation exposes the film and the DNA shows up as dark bands. Restriction mapping A restriction map is a diagram of a piece of DNA marked with the locations of sites where it is cut by restriction enzymes. A piece of DNA is cut with two different restriction enzymes, both on their own, and together. This gives three different mixtures of restriction fragments, which are run on an electrophoresis gel (labelled E1, E2 and E1+E2 on the gel below). The first lane on this gel contains a “DNA ladder” – a mixture of DNA fragments of known sizes – which is used to calibrate the gel. By comparison with the ladder bands, the length of each restriction fragment can be measured (marked in kilobases, kb on this diagram). From this information alone we have to deduce the restriction map. Firstly, the fragment lengths in each lane add up to 17, so we know the original DNA was 17kb long. There must be two recognition sites for restriction enzyme 1 (E1), since it gave three bands, while there must be just one recognition site for restriction enzyme 2 (E2), since it gave two bands. By a process of logic, we can construct the restriction map (on left) to account for the banding pattern. 1Kb = 1000 bases
  • 96. How a genetic finger print is carried out and how it can be used 99.9% of the DNA in humans is the same. The 0.1% ( over 100,00 base pairs) shows enough variation to distinguish individuals. Differences occur in non-coding DNA due to mutations that can accumulate in these regions as they do not affect function. Makes use of regions of genetic material, called introns that contain regions of repeating sequences Satellites: any DNA with repetitive sequences Tandem repeat: simple sequences of bases in DNA repeated without break Short tandem repeats/microsatellites: a tandem repeat with a sequence <10bases Minisatellite: tandem repeats with a sequence of 10-60 bases Variable non tandem repeats/VNTRs): region of DNA with a particular tandem repeat. Everyone has the same repeating sequence in this region; the number of repeats varies from individual These VNTRs are unique to an individual These are inherited, but the combinations inherited are random, but when compared against parent DNA there is some comparable sequences. The process The DNA is extracted in a solvent of chloroform and phenol The DNA is cut to fragments Using restriction enzymes Different sized fragments are separated by gel electrophoresis. Smaller fragments travel further DNA double strands separated by alkali DNA Transferred to nylon membrane (Southern Blotting, described in line below) and fixed by UV light Nylon membrane placed onto gel, towels on top of that, weight to get good contact between membrane and gel. Paper absorbes the alkali and draws up –ve DNA which sticks to the +ve membrane Radioactively/fluorescently labelled DNA probes are applied and anneal with complementary base sequences. 96
  • 97. Visualisation of the DNA is then done by, autoradiography (when using radioactive probes) or UV light (when using fluorescence) 97 Gene/DNA probes Short single strands of DNA They are radioactively/fluorescently labelled Complimentary to at least part of the target gene They will then hybridise with the restriction fragments that have been separated by electrophoresis and contain the complimentary sequences Identification either by Autoradiography or fluorescence Southern Blot: used to detect a specific target sequence in DNA. IN a gel the DNA is fragile and also it continues to diffuse through the gel and this can blur the bands. In a blot the DNA is fixed so the target gene can be identified. 1. DNA is extracted and amplified by PCR 2. DNA is digested by restriction enzymes 3. Restriction fragments are separated using gel electrophoresis 4. Gel is placed in an alkali (this separates the DNA breaking H- bonds) 5. A nylon/nitrocellulose sheet is placed on top of the gel and covered with paper towels and pressed down with a weight to ensure a good contact 6. The alkali is drawn up by the towels and takes the DNA with it. The negative DNA adheres to the positive nylon sheet 7. Nylon sheet is peeled off and treated with UV light to fix the DNA 8. Sheet is placed in a bag of DNA probes that will anneal to specific complimentary base sequences if present 9. The hybridised DNA must then be visualised by autoradiography or fluorescence Uses of southern blotting Identify the few restriction fragments with complementary sequences, out of the 100s of fragments produced Identify genes in one species that are similar to those in another for purpose of classification Used in genetic finger prints Screen for genetic diseases
  • 98. 98 tRNA vs mRNA tRNA (carries amino acids with complementary anticodon to mRNA codon) Clover shaped Standard length Has an amino acid binding site Anticodon tRNA has H bonds between complementary base pairs Limited number of types (64) mRNA (carries information from the Nucleus to the ribosome) Linear Variable length (depends on the length of gene) Many different types (depends on the gene) No H-bonding No base pairs DNA Vs RNA Similarities: Contain phosphate Made up of nucleotides Contains organic bases (A, C and G) (not T as it is replaced by U in RNA) Pentose sugar Differences RNA single stranded RNA has non-coding strands (introns) removed Ribose sugar in RNA deoxyribose in DNA U in ribose replaces the T 3 types of RNA, only one DNA Smaller than DNA Describe the features of a gene Gene is a short (length) of DNA; Gene is a sequence of bases/chain of nucleotides; Triplet (base) code (codon) On sense/coding strand; Each triplet coding for amino acid; Degenerate code, where most amino acids have more than one codon. Of the 64 codons 1 is a start (methionine, which is often removed) and 3 are stop codes Non-overlapping where each base is part of one codon Sequence of triplets/bases code for protein Give ways in which the structure of the DNA molecule enables it to carry out its functions. Sugar – phosphate backbone gives strength; Coiling gives compact shape; Sequence of bases allows information to be stored; Long molecule / coiling stores large amount of information; Complementary base pairing enables information to be replicated or transcribed; Double helix protects weak hydrogen bonds / double helix makes molecule stable; Many hydrogen bonds together give molecule stability; Prevents code being corrupted; Hydrogen bonding allows chains to split easily for replication / transcription Explain how DNA replicates Hydrogen bonds broken by DNA helicase semi-conservative replication where both strands used (as templates) nucleotides line up to their complementary base pairing , H-bond DNA polymerase; joins the nucleotides Describe the molecular structure of DNA Associated with histone proteins Double helix Polymer of nucleotides; composition of a nucleotide as pentose, phosphate and base 4 bases named ATCG sugar-phosphate ‘backbone’; two (polynucleotide) strands running antiparallel specific base-pairing; example e.g. A–T / C–G held by hydrogen bonding;
  • 99. Base sequencing (Sanger Method) Used to determine the exact order of bases in a gene. Uses modified nucleotides; they have an oxygen removed (dideoxynucleotides) and can only bond with one other nucleotide. These bases act as terminators in DNA synthesis Four tubes are set up containing Primers (labelled) Normal nucleotides (A, T, C, G) DNA polymerase The DNA to be sequenced Into tube 1, modified base A is added Into tube 2, modified base T is added Into tube 3, modified base C is added Into tube 4 modified base G is added As the binding of the nucleotides (normal or modified) is equally likely in all tubes chains of different lengths are created in each test-tube. But in each test tube all the chains have the same last nucleotide. These chain fragments can be separated by gel electrophoresis. The negatively charged DNA is attracted to the positive terminal on the gel. Shorter chains travel a further distance. DNA to be sequenced: CTGACTTCGACAA Primer attached TGTT (primer) 99 In tube 1 possible chains are TTGTTGA TTGTTGAA TTGTTGAAGTCA TTGTTGAAGTCAG In tube 2 possible chains are… TTGTCGAAGT TTGTCGAAGTCAG The base sequence for the gel shown on the right side of the page is as follows (start from the bottom (shortest chain) and read up the page) TCCTAAGTCCTCCGGATGGTACTTCTAGTTC But this is the complementary bases for the original strand, so the actual sequence for the desired gene is the complementary strand to this AGGATTCAGGAGGCCTACCATGAAGATCAAG
  • 100. 100
  • 101. 101 GM Crops Nitrogen fixing ability Increased nutritional value Longer shelf life (reduced softening) Disease resistance Pesticide resistance (produce toxin) Herbicide resistance Tolerance to extreme conditions GM Bacteria Produce antibiotics, bacteria will do this naturally but are altered to do it faster and in greater quantities. Produce useful hormones (insulin produced this way is more effective than animal insulin, safer, no rejection and preserves animal welfare Enzymes for the food industry GM Animals Pharming/transgenic, to produce pharmaceuticals Xenotransplantation, transfer organs or tissues form animal to humans. Animals are engineered to reduce rejection Disease resistance Growth hormones Genetic engineering has made it possible to transfer genes from one species to another. For example, a gene that gives resistance to herbicide and another gene which gives resistance to insect attack have been transferred into maize. Some people think that there will be great advantages in growing maize with these genes. Others are equally convinced that there are long-term dangers in growing crops of this maize. Evaluate both of these viewpoints. Positive: Fewer crops lost to insect damage Fewer crops lost to diseases spread by insects; Can spray herbicide with no loss to crop and this will reduce competition from weeds increasing yield Less use of insecticide required, which is better for the environment and will not impact upon other food chains Possibly cheaper food as farmer loss and input is not as high Negative: Gene transfer to non-crop species creation of “plague” weeds resistant to the herbicide Transfer of insecticide genes into non crop species may affect food chains Selects for the development of insects resistant to the pesticide Encourage an excessive use of herbicides which may affect the environment New allergens created A new variety of tomato has been produced by genetic engineering. This variety contains a synthetic gene that blocks the action of a natural gene that would make the fruit soften rapidly once ripe. It also contains a marker gene. The marker gene added by the scientists makes this variety of tomato resistant to the antibiotic, kanamycin. It is possible that this gene could be taken up by disease-producing bacteria in the human gut. In humans, kanamycin is used to treat certain types of gut infections. Using information from the passage, explain the advantages and disadvantages of putting this new variety of tomato on the market. advantages e.g.: food stays firm for longer; allowing shipment and reducing losses longer shelf life; greater profit for the producer and possibly cheaper food for the consumer disadvantages e.g. transfer of mutant gene to bacteria / gut bacteria might become resistant to kanamycin; more difficult to treat gut infection; consumer resistance to GM food; long term effects unknown Improving tolerance may mean growing crops in regions they normally wouldn’t grow, may solve food shortage and malnourishment, but may affect the economy of countries that relay on the export of these crops. The crop may become a pest affecting delicate ecosystem. Hormones from GM bacteria: Insulin is produced this way. Previously it was obtained from animals, but this meant animal welfare was poor, there was a risk of passing on pathogens, risk of rejection and as it was from animals it was not as effective. Using insulin made form bacteria means that these issues are resolved and also it can be produced in large quantities quickly and cheaply GMO: produced in 3 ways: Alter the genes Delete/switch off a gene Add a foreign gene
  • 102. 102 Organism Modification Long life tomato There are two well-known projects, both affecting the gene for the enzyme polygalactourinase (PG), a pectinase that softens fruits as they ripen. Tomatoes that make less PG ripen more slowly and retain more flavour. The American “Flavr Savr”tomato used antisense technology to silence the gene, while the British Zeneca tomato disrupted the gene. Both were successful and were on sale for a few years, but neither is produced any more. Insect resistant crops Genes for various powerful protein toxins have been transferred from the bacterium Bacillus thuringiensis to crop plants including maize, rice and potatoes. These Bt toxins are thousands of times more powerful than chemical insecticides, and since they are built-in to the crops, insecticide spraying (which is non-specific and damages the environment) is unnecessary. Virus resistant crops Gene for virus coat protein has been cloned and inserted into tobacco, potato and tomato plants. The coat protein seems to “immunise” the plants, which are much more resistant to viral attack. Herbicide resistant crops The gene for resistance to the herbicide BASTA has been transferred from Streptomyces bacteria to tomato, potato, corn, and wheat plants, making them resistant to BASTA. Fields can safely be sprayed with this herbicide, which will kill all weeds, but not the crops. However, this means continued use of agrochemicals, so is controversial. Pest resistant legumes The gene for an enzyme that synthesises a chemical toxic to weevils has been transferred from Bacillus bacteria to The Rhizobium bacteria that live in the root nodules of legume plants. These root nodules are now resistant to attack by weevils. N fixing crops This is a huge project, which aims to transfer the 15-or-so genes required for nitrogen fixation from the nitrogen-fixing bacteria Rhizobium into cereals and other crop plants. These crops would then be able to fix their own atmospheric nitrogen and would not need any fertiliser. However, the process is extremely complex, and the project is nowhere near success. Crop improvement Proteins in some crop plants, including wheat, are often deficient in essential amino acid (which is why vegetarians have to watch their diet so carefully), so the protein genes are being altered to improve their composition for human consumption. mastitis-resistant cattle The gene for the enzyme lactoferrin, which helps to resists the infection that causes the udder disease mastitis, has been introduced to Herman – the first transgenic bull. Herman’s offspring inherit this gene, do not get mastitis and so produce more milk. Tick resistant sheep The gene for the enzyme chitinase, which kills ticks by digesting their exoskeletons, has been transferred from plants to sheep. These sheep should be immune to tick parasites, and may not need sheep dip. Fast growing fish A number of fish species, including salmon, trout and carp, have been given a gene from another fish (the ocean pout) which activates the fish’s own growth hormone gene so that they grow larger and more quickly. Salmon grow to 30 times their normal mass at 10 times the normal rate. Environment cleaning microbes Genes for enzymes that digest many different hydrocarbons found in crude oil have been transferred to Pseudomonas bacteria so that they can clean up oil spills. Benefits: Medicines and drugs can be produced safely in large quantities from microbes rather than from slaughtered animals. Benefit humans and can spare animal suffering as well. Agricultural productivity can be improved while using less pesticides or fertilisers, so helping the environment. GM crops can grow on previously unsuitable soil or in unsuitable climates. GM crops can improve the nutrition and health of millions of people by improving the nutritional quality of their staple crops. Risks • Genetic modification of an organism may have unforeseen genetic effects on that organism and its offspring. These genetic effects could include metabolic diseases or cancer, and would be particularly important in vertebrate animals, which have a nervous system and so are capable of suffering. The research process may also harm animals. • Genes transferred into GMOs could be transferred again into other organisms, by natural accidents. These natural accidents could include horizontal gene transmission in bacteria, cross-species pollination in plants, and viral transfer. This could result in a weed being resistant to a herbicide, or a pathogenic bacterium being resistant to an antibiotic. To avoid transfer via crosspollination, genes can now be inserted into chloroplast DNA, which is not found in pollen. • A GMO may have an unforeseen effect on its food web, affecting other organisms. Many ecosystems are often delicately balanced, and a GMO could change that balance. • GMOs may continue to reduce the genetic biodiversity already occurring due to selective breeding. •. There could be unexpected and complicated social and economic consequences from using GMOs. For example if GM bananas could be grown in temperate countries, that would be disastrous for the economies of those Caribbean countries who rely on banana exports. • Developing GMOs is expensive, and the ownership of the technology remains with the large multi-national corporations. This means the benefits may not be available to farmers in third world countries who need it most. Evaluating Biotechnology: The whole point of creating GMOs is to benefit humans. Opposition is often based on ethical, moral or social grounds, such as harm to animals or the environment, though there can also be more practical issues, such as distrust of large corporations.
  • 103. 103 The purpose of genetic modification is usually to benefit humans in many ways…… Increase crop yield by introducing herbicide resistance, pesticide production and disease resistance) Improve nutritional value of crops Develop crops that can grow in inhospitable environments Making vaccines Making medicine GM Bacteria: Modified to increase the rate of antibiotic production Produce enzymes for use in industry Lipases for cheese manufacture, proteases to tenderise meat/baby food) and amylases for brewing Modified to produce hormones (insulin and growth hormones and sex hormones) Bacteria can now produce human insulin for use in treating diabetes. This is better than using animal insulin because… Protects animal welfare, the insulin is more specific and thus effective, it can be produced in large amounts, and the required amount, it is less likely to cause an immune response GM crops Modified in a variety of ways… Tomatoes modified to prevent ripening allowing them to stay longer on the vine and still be transported without damage and consequent loss of product Herbicide resistance Disease resistance Pest resistant: gene added so that the plant can produce a toxin to kill the pest GM animals Modified in a variety of ways Genes for resistance to diseases Growth gene added for a rapid growth Genes added so animals produce medically useful proteins in their milk GM crops Benefits: Less crop damage/loss by insects, increase yield, reduce consumer costs Less competition from weeds as herbicide can be used, increase yield reduces consumer costs Pesticide production means less use of pesticide spraying, protects environment as many pesticides are broad spectrum and affect non target species, affecting food chains. Improve nutrition in countries that can grow limited crops and that have limited food GM crops Concerns: New allergens being produced Selection for pesticide resistant insects leading to increased cost of developing new pesticides in future and possible surges in some insect populations Transfer of added genes to non-crop species, cross species pollination, producing super weeds (resistant to herbicides) and affecting natural wildlife and food chains GM crops can be made infertile, but then farmers need to buy new seeds every year, so cost goes up for consumers Disrupt economy of some countries that relay on exporting produce that does not grow in certain countries. If they can now grow the crop themselves this may affect the economy. Herbicide resistance encourages excessive use by farmers which then affects the environment Transfer of genes into gut micro flora and how this may affect bacteria, increasing resistance??? GM animal’s benefits Rapid growth means quick turn over for farmer maximising profits, cheaper food for consumer Initially expensive to modify animal, but with embryo cloning cheap source of medical proteins and a large supply GM animal’s concerns Animal welfare neglected as animals grow rapidly they suffer with heart, breathing and joint issues Risks to the organism and it’s offspring such as metabolic disorders and cancer Research harms animals initially
  • 104. 104 Gene therapy: the insertion of gene into the cells and tissues of individuals to treat genetic disorders. Types of Gene Therapy It is important to appreciate the different between somatic cell therapy and germ-line therapy. • Somatic cell therapy means genetically altering specific body (or somatic) cells in order to treat the disease. This therapy may treat the disease in the patient, but any genetic changes will not be passed on the offspring of the patient. • Germ-line therapy means genetically altering those cells (sperm cells, sperm precursor cells, ova, ova precursor cells, zygotes or early embryos) that will pass their genes down the “germ-line” to future generations. Alterations to any of these cells will affect every cell in the resulting human, and in all his or her descendants. Treatment using gene therapy Gene replacement: a healthy gene replaces a defective gene Gene supplementation: copies of the healthy gene are added alongside the defective gene. The added dominant genes mask the effect of the recessive allele. Problems of Gene Therapy • Most gene therapy attempted so far has had only a short-lived effect. Problems with integrating the therapeutic DNA into the host cell, and of replicating new DNA when the host cell divides, have meant that patients have to repeat the gene therapy treatment at intervals. • Therapeutic DNA and modified host cells are recognised as non-self by the immune system and so destroyed in a primary immune response. Subsequent repeated treatments stimulate a greater secondary immune response, which can be harmful to the patient. • There is a chance that the therapeutic DNA is integrated in the host genome in the middle of another gene, for example in a tumour suppressor gene. • Viruses are the most successful vectors in gene therapy but they also present a variety of potential problems to the patient including toxicity, immune and inflammatory responses and recovery of pathogenicity. •Multigene disorders are probably impossible to treat effectively using gene therapy. Liposome aerosols may not be fine enough the reach the bronchioles Few of the delivered genes are expressed The uptake of the therapeutic gene is low Cystic fibrosis: This is caused by a recessive mutant allele, where three bases, AAA are missing (a mutation resulting from deletion). The normal gene (the cystic fibrosis trans-membrane conductance regulator) CFTR produces a protein of some 1480 amino acids. The deletion results in the absence of a single amino acid, but as such the protein cannot perform its function of transporting chloride ions out of cells across the membrane. Water will normally follow as a result (osmosis) and epithelial membranes are kept moist. In CF sufferers, the protein is either not made or does not function. The epithelial membranes are dry and thus the mucus is sticky and thick. The symptoms include……………. Mucus congestion in the lungs leading to risk of chest infection (cilia can’t shift the mucus) Breathing difficulties and less gas exchange Thick mucus in pancreatic ducts preventing enzymes form reaching the small intestine (duodenum) and fibrosis cysts form. Thick mucus in the sperm ducts of a male, possibly leading to infertility. Parents can be genetically screened to see if they carry the gene. The correct gene (the therapeutic DNA) needs to be introduced into human cells, where it can be expressed. Some of the most common methods are: • Liposomes. The therapeutic DNA is encased in a lipid vesicle called a liposome. The liposome membrane then fuses with the cell membrane, delivering the therapeutic DNA into the cell. • Viruses. Normal viral infection depends on the virus delivering its own DNA into host cells, where it can be expressed to make new virus particles. So genetically-modified viruses can be used to deliver human genes by the same method. The virus must first be genetically engineered to make it safe, so that it can’t reproduce itself or make toxins. • Stem cells. In some cases stem cells can be removed from the patient (e.g. from bone marrow), genetically modified in vitro with the therapeutic DNA, then the stem cells injected back into the patient. This method is safer and avoids immune rejection, but only works for some tissues. SCID (severe combined immunodeficiency): sufferers cannot make ADA (adenosine deaminase) that breaks down toxins in white blood cells.
  • 105. 105
  • 106. 106 Totipotent: stem cells that can differentiate into any type of cell (embryos <32 cells) Pluripotent: stem cells that can differentiate into nearly all cells (5 day old embryo) Multipotent: stem cells that develop into a related family of cells. Adult stem cell, these are used to repair and replace damaged tissue